diff options
Diffstat (limited to '')
50 files changed, 14173 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/doc/Makefile.am b/doc/Makefile.am new file mode 100644 index 0000000..47fba85 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/Makefile.am @@ -0,0 +1,226 @@ +MANPAGES_IN = \ + man/knot.conf.5in \ + man/knotc.8in \ + man/knotd.8in \ + man/kcatalogprint.8in \ + man/keymgr.8in \ + man/kjournalprint.8in \ + man/kdig.1in \ + man/khost.1in \ + man/knsupdate.1in \ + man/knsec3hash.1in \ + man/kzonecheck.1in \ + man/kzonesign.1in \ + man/kxdpgun.8in + +MANPAGES_RST = \ + reference.rst \ + man_knotc.rst \ + man_knotd.rst \ + man_kcatalogprint.rst \ + man_keymgr.rst \ + man_kjournalprint.rst \ + man_kdig.rst \ + man_khost.rst \ + man_knsupdate.rst \ + man_knsec3hash.rst \ + man_kzonecheck.rst \ + man_kzonesign.rst \ + man_kxdpgun.rst + +EXTRA_DIST = \ + conf.py \ + \ + appendices.rst \ + configuration.rst \ + index.rst \ + installation.rst \ + introduction.rst \ + migration.rst \ + modules.rst.in \ + operation.rst \ + reference.rst \ + requirements.rst \ + troubleshooting.rst \ + utilities.rst \ + \ + $(MANPAGES_IN) \ + $(MANPAGES_RST) \ + \ + logo.pdf \ + logo.svg \ + \ + theme_html + +SPHINX_V = $(SPHINX_V_@AM_V@) +SPHINX_V_ = $(SPHINX_V_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +SPHINX_V_0 = -q +SPHINX_V_1 = -n + +AM_V_SPHINX = $(AM_V_SPHINX_@AM_V@) +AM_V_SPHINX_ = $(AM_V_SPHINX_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +AM_V_SPHINX_0 = @echo " SPHINX $@"; + +SPHINXBUILDDIR = $(builddir)/_build + +_SPHINXOPTS = -c $(srcdir) \ + -a \ + $(SPHINX_V) + +ALLSPHINXOPTS = $(_SPHINXOPTS) \ + -D version="$(VERSION)" \ + -D today="$(RELEASE_DATE)" \ + -D release="$(VERSION)" \ + $(SPHINXOPTS) \ + $(srcdir) + +man_SPHINXOPTS = $(_SPHINXOPTS) \ + -D version="@""VERSION@" \ + -D today="@""RELEASE_DATE@" \ + -D release="@""VERSION@" \ + $(SPHINXOPTS) \ + $(srcdir) + +.PHONY: html-local singlehtml pdf-local info-local epub man install-html-local install-singlehtml install-pdf-local install-info-local install-epub + +man_MANS = + +if HAVE_DAEMON +man_MANS += \ + man/knot.conf.5 \ + man/knotc.8 \ + man/knotd.8 +endif # HAVE_DAEMON + +if HAVE_UTILS +if HAVE_DAEMON +man_MANS += \ + man/kcatalogprint.8 \ + man/keymgr.8 \ + man/kjournalprint.8 \ + man/kzonecheck.1 \ + man/kzonesign.1 +endif # HAVE_DAEMON + +man_MANS += \ + man/kdig.1 \ + man/khost.1 \ + man/knsupdate.1 \ + man/knsec3hash.1 + +if ENABLE_XDP +man_MANS += man/kxdpgun.8 +endif # ENABLE_XDP +endif # HAVE_UTILS + +man/knot.conf.5: man/knot.conf.5in +man/knotc.8: man/knotc.8in +man/knotd.8: man/knotd.8in +man/kcatalogprint.8: man/kcatalogprint.8in +man/keymgr.8: man/keymgr.8in +man/kjournalprint.8: man/kjournalprint.8in +man/kdig.1: man/kdig.1in +man/khost.1: man/khost.1in +man/knsupdate.1: man/knsupdate.1in +man/knsec3hash.1: man/knsec3hash.1in +man/kzonecheck.1: man/kzonecheck.1in +man/kzonesign.1: man/kzonesign.1in +man/kxdpgun.8: man/kxdpgun.8in + +man_SUBST = $(AM_V_GEN)mkdir -p man; \ + sed -e 's,[@]VERSION@,$(VERSION),' \ + -e 's,[@]RELEASE_DATE@,$(RELEASE_DATE),' \ + -e 's,[@]config_dir@,$(config_dir),' \ + -e 's,[@]storage_dir@,$(storage_dir),' \ + -e 's,[@]run_dir@,$(run_dir),' \ + -e 's,[@]conf_mapsize@,$(conf_mapsize),' \ + $< > $@ + +.1in.1: + $(man_SUBST) + +.5in.5: + $(man_SUBST) + +.8in.8: + $(man_SUBST) + +if HAVE_DOCS + +if HAVE_SPHINXBUILD +html-local: + $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b html -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html + @echo "The HTML documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/" + +install-html-local: + $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_sources + $(INSTALL) -D $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/*.html $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/_sources/* $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_sources/ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/_static/* $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static/ + +singlehtml: + $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b singlehtml -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml + @echo "The single HTML documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml/" + +install-singlehtml: singlehtml + $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml/*.html $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml/_static/* $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static/ + +epub: + $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b epub -A today=$(RELEASE_DATE) -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/epub + @echo "The EPUB documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/epub/" + +install-epub: + $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/epub/KnotDNS.epub $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ + +if HAVE_PDFLATEX +pdf-local: + $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b latex -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex + $(MAKE) -C $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex all-pdf + @echo "The PDF documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex/" + +install-pdf-local: + $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex/KnotDNS.pdf $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ + +else +pdf-local install-pdf-local: + @echo "Install 'pdflatex' and re-run configure to be able to generate PDF documentation!" +endif # HAVE_PDFLATEX + +if HAVE_MAKEINFO +info-local: + $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b texinfo -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo + $(MAKE) -C $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo info + @echo "The Info pages have been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo/" + +install-info-local: + $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(infodir) + $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo/knot.info $(DESTDIR)/$(infodir)/ + +else +info-local install-info-local: + @echo "Install 'texinfo' and re-run configure to be able to generate Info pages!" +endif # HAVE_MAKEINFO + +.NOTPARALLEL: man +man: $(man_MANS) +$(MANPAGES_IN): $(MANPAGES_RST) + $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b man -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(man_SPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/man + @mkdir -p $(srcdir)/man + @for f in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/man/*; do \ + sed -e '/^\.TP$$/ {' -e 'n' -e 's/^\.B //' -e '}' "$$f" > "$(srcdir)/man/$$(basename $$f)in"; \ + done + +else +html-local singlehtml pdf-local info-local epub man install-html-local install-singlehtml install-pdf-local install-info-local install-epub: + @echo "Install 'sphinx-build' and re-run configure to be able to generate documentation!" +endif # HAVE_SPHINXBUILD + +endif # HAVE_DOCS + +clean-local: + -rm -rf $(SPHINXBUILDDIR) + -rm -f man/*.1 man/*.5 man/*.8 diff --git a/doc/Makefile.in b/doc/Makefile.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3f55ad --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/Makefile.in @@ -0,0 +1,918 @@ +# Makefile.in generated by automake 1.16.3 from Makefile.am. +# @configure_input@ + +# Copyright (C) 1994-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc. + +# This Makefile.in is free software; the Free Software Foundation +# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it, +# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved. + +# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, +# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without +# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A +# PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +@SET_MAKE@ +VPATH = @srcdir@ +am__is_gnu_make = { \ + if test -z '$(MAKELEVEL)'; then \ + false; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_HOST)'; then \ + true; \ + elif test -n '$(MAKE_VERSION)' && test -n '$(CURDIR)'; then \ + true; \ + else \ + false; \ + fi; \ +} +am__make_running_with_option = \ + case $${target_option-} in \ + ?) ;; \ + *) echo "am__make_running_with_option: internal error: invalid" \ + "target option '$${target_option-}' specified" >&2; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + has_opt=no; \ + sane_makeflags=$$MAKEFLAGS; \ + if $(am__is_gnu_make); then \ + sane_makeflags=$$MFLAGS; \ + else \ + case $$MAKEFLAGS in \ + *\\[\ \ ]*) \ + bs=\\; \ + sane_makeflags=`printf '%s\n' "$$MAKEFLAGS" \ + | sed "s/$$bs$$bs[$$bs $$bs ]*//g"`;; \ + esac; \ + fi; \ + skip_next=no; \ + strip_trailopt () \ + { \ + flg=`printf '%s\n' "$$flg" | sed "s/$$1.*$$//"`; \ + }; \ + for flg in $$sane_makeflags; do \ + test $$skip_next = yes && { skip_next=no; continue; }; \ + case $$flg in \ + *=*|--*) continue;; \ + -*I) strip_trailopt 'I'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*I?*) strip_trailopt 'I';; \ + -*O) strip_trailopt 'O'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*O?*) strip_trailopt 'O';; \ + -*l) strip_trailopt 'l'; skip_next=yes;; \ + -*l?*) strip_trailopt 'l';; \ + -[dEDm]) skip_next=yes;; \ + -[JT]) skip_next=yes;; \ + esac; \ + case $$flg in \ + *$$target_option*) has_opt=yes; break;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + test $$has_opt = yes +am__make_dryrun = (target_option=n; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +am__make_keepgoing = (target_option=k; $(am__make_running_with_option)) +pkgdatadir = $(datadir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkgincludedir = $(includedir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibdir = $(libdir)/@PACKAGE@ +pkglibexecdir = $(libexecdir)/@PACKAGE@ +am__cd = CDPATH="$${ZSH_VERSION+.}$(PATH_SEPARATOR)" && cd +install_sh_DATA = $(install_sh) -c -m 644 +install_sh_PROGRAM = $(install_sh) -c +install_sh_SCRIPT = $(install_sh) -c +INSTALL_HEADER = $(INSTALL_DATA) +transform = $(program_transform_name) +NORMAL_INSTALL = : +PRE_INSTALL = : +POST_INSTALL = : +NORMAL_UNINSTALL = : +PRE_UNINSTALL = : +POST_UNINSTALL = : +build_triplet = @build@ +host_triplet = @host@ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@am__append_1 = \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@ man/knot.conf.5 \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@ man/knotc.8 \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@ man/knotd.8 + +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@am__append_2 = \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/kcatalogprint.8 \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/keymgr.8 \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/kjournalprint.8 \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/kzonecheck.1 \ +@HAVE_DAEMON_TRUE@@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/kzonesign.1 + +@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@am__append_3 = \ +@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/kdig.1 \ +@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/khost.1 \ +@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/knsupdate.1 \ +@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@ man/knsec3hash.1 + +@ENABLE_XDP_TRUE@@HAVE_UTILS_TRUE@am__append_4 = man/kxdpgun.8 +subdir = doc +ACLOCAL_M4 = $(top_srcdir)/aclocal.m4 +am__aclocal_m4_deps = $(top_srcdir)/m4/ax_check_compile_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ax_check_link_flag.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/code-coverage.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/knot-lib-version.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/knot-module.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/libtool.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltoptions.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltsugar.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/ltversion.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/lt~obsolete.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/sanitizer.m4 $(top_srcdir)/m4/visibility.m4 \ + $(top_srcdir)/m4/knot-version.m4 $(top_srcdir)/configure.ac +am__configure_deps = $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) $(CONFIGURE_DEPENDENCIES) \ + $(ACLOCAL_M4) +DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__DIST_COMMON) +mkinstalldirs = $(install_sh) -d +CONFIG_HEADER = $(top_builddir)/src/config.h +CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES = modules.rst +CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES = +AM_V_P = $(am__v_P_@AM_V@) +am__v_P_ = $(am__v_P_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_P_0 = false +am__v_P_1 = : +AM_V_GEN = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_V@) +am__v_GEN_ = $(am__v_GEN_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_GEN_0 = @echo " GEN " $@; +am__v_GEN_1 = +AM_V_at = $(am__v_at_@AM_V@) +am__v_at_ = $(am__v_at_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +am__v_at_0 = @ +am__v_at_1 = +SOURCES = +DIST_SOURCES = +am__can_run_installinfo = \ + case $$AM_UPDATE_INFO_DIR in \ + n|no|NO) false;; \ + *) (install-info --version) >/dev/null 2>&1;; \ + esac +am__vpath_adj_setup = srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's|.|.|g'`; +am__vpath_adj = case $$p in \ + $(srcdir)/*) f=`echo "$$p" | sed "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||"`;; \ + *) f=$$p;; \ + esac; +am__strip_dir = f=`echo $$p | sed -e 's|^.*/||'`; +am__install_max = 40 +am__nobase_strip_setup = \ + srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*|]/\\\\&/g'` +am__nobase_strip = \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p"; done | sed -e "s|$$srcdirstrip/||" +am__nobase_list = $(am__nobase_strip_setup); \ + for p in $$list; do echo "$$p $$p"; done | \ + sed "s| $$srcdirstrip/| |;"' / .*\//!s/ .*/ ./; s,\( .*\)/[^/]*$$,\1,' | \ + $(AWK) 'BEGIN { files["."] = "" } { files[$$2] = files[$$2] " " $$1; \ + if (++n[$$2] == $(am__install_max)) \ + { print $$2, files[$$2]; n[$$2] = 0; files[$$2] = "" } } \ + END { for (dir in files) print dir, files[dir] }' +am__base_list = \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' | \ + sed '$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;$$!N;s/\n/ /g' +am__uninstall_files_from_dir = { \ + test -z "$$files" \ + || { test ! -d "$$dir" && test ! -f "$$dir" && test ! -r "$$dir"; } \ + || { echo " ( cd '$$dir' && rm -f" $$files ")"; \ + $(am__cd) "$$dir" && rm -f $$files; }; \ + } +man1dir = $(mandir)/man1 +am__installdirs = "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)" \ + "$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)" +man5dir = $(mandir)/man5 +man8dir = $(mandir)/man8 +NROFF = nroff +MANS = $(man_MANS) +am__tagged_files = $(HEADERS) $(SOURCES) $(TAGS_FILES) $(LISP) +am__DIST_COMMON = $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(srcdir)/modules.rst.in +DISTFILES = $(DIST_COMMON) $(DIST_SOURCES) $(TEXINFOS) $(EXTRA_DIST) +ACLOCAL = @ACLOCAL@ +AMTAR = @AMTAR@ +AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY = @AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY@ +AR = @AR@ +AUTOCONF = @AUTOCONF@ +AUTOHEADER = @AUTOHEADER@ +AUTOMAKE = @AUTOMAKE@ +AWK = @AWK@ +CC = @CC@ +CCDEPMODE = @CCDEPMODE@ +CFLAGS = @CFLAGS@ +CFLAG_VISIBILITY = @CFLAG_VISIBILITY@ +CODE_COVERAGE_ENABLED = @CODE_COVERAGE_ENABLED@ +CPP = @CPP@ +CPPFLAGS = @CPPFLAGS@ +CYGPATH_W = @CYGPATH_W@ +DEFS = @DEFS@ +DEPDIR = @DEPDIR@ +DLLTOOL = @DLLTOOL@ +DNSTAP_CFLAGS = @DNSTAP_CFLAGS@ +DNSTAP_LIBS = @DNSTAP_LIBS@ +DSYMUTIL = @DSYMUTIL@ +DUMPBIN = @DUMPBIN@ +ECHO_C = @ECHO_C@ +ECHO_N = @ECHO_N@ +ECHO_T = @ECHO_T@ +EGREP = @EGREP@ +EXEEXT = @EXEEXT@ +FGREP = @FGREP@ +GENHTML = @GENHTML@ +GREP = @GREP@ +HAVE_VISIBILITY = @HAVE_VISIBILITY@ +INSTALL = @INSTALL@ +INSTALL_DATA = @INSTALL_DATA@ +INSTALL_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_PROGRAM@ +INSTALL_SCRIPT = @INSTALL_SCRIPT@ +INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM = @INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM@ +KNOT_VERSION_MAJOR = @KNOT_VERSION_MAJOR@ +KNOT_VERSION_MINOR = @KNOT_VERSION_MINOR@ +KNOT_VERSION_PATCH = @KNOT_VERSION_PATCH@ +LCOV = @LCOV@ +LD = @LD@ +LDFLAGS = @LDFLAGS@ +LDFLAG_EXCLUDE_LIBS = @LDFLAG_EXCLUDE_LIBS@ +LIBOBJS = @LIBOBJS@ +LIBS = @LIBS@ +LIBTOOL = @LIBTOOL@ +LIPO = @LIPO@ +LN_S = @LN_S@ +LTLIBOBJS = @LTLIBOBJS@ +LT_NO_UNDEFINED = @LT_NO_UNDEFINED@ +LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH = @LT_SYS_LIBRARY_PATH@ +MAKEINFO = @MAKEINFO@ +MANIFEST_TOOL = @MANIFEST_TOOL@ +MKDIR_P = @MKDIR_P@ +NM = @NM@ +NMEDIT = @NMEDIT@ +OBJDUMP = @OBJDUMP@ +OBJEXT = @OBJEXT@ +OTOOL = @OTOOL@ +OTOOL64 = @OTOOL64@ +PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@ +PACKAGE_BUGREPORT = @PACKAGE_BUGREPORT@ +PACKAGE_NAME = @PACKAGE_NAME@ +PACKAGE_STRING = @PACKAGE_STRING@ +PACKAGE_TARNAME = @PACKAGE_TARNAME@ +PACKAGE_URL = @PACKAGE_URL@ +PACKAGE_VERSION = @PACKAGE_VERSION@ +PATH_SEPARATOR = @PATH_SEPARATOR@ +PDFLATEX = @PDFLATEX@ +PKG_CONFIG = @PKG_CONFIG@ +PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR = @PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR@ +PKG_CONFIG_PATH = @PKG_CONFIG_PATH@ +PROTOC_C = @PROTOC_C@ +RANLIB = @RANLIB@ +RELEASE_DATE = @RELEASE_DATE@ +SED = @SED@ +SET_MAKE = @SET_MAKE@ +SHELL = @SHELL@ +SPHINXBUILD = @SPHINXBUILD@ +STRIP = @STRIP@ +VERSION = @VERSION@ +abs_builddir = @abs_builddir@ +abs_srcdir = @abs_srcdir@ +abs_top_builddir = @abs_top_builddir@ +abs_top_srcdir = @abs_top_srcdir@ +ac_ct_AR = @ac_ct_AR@ +ac_ct_CC = @ac_ct_CC@ +ac_ct_DUMPBIN = @ac_ct_DUMPBIN@ +am__include = @am__include@ +am__leading_dot = @am__leading_dot@ +am__quote = @am__quote@ +am__tar = @am__tar@ +am__untar = @am__untar@ +bindir = @bindir@ +build = @build@ +build_alias = @build_alias@ +build_cpu = @build_cpu@ +build_os = @build_os@ +build_vendor = @build_vendor@ +builddir = @builddir@ +cap_ng_CFLAGS = @cap_ng_CFLAGS@ +cap_ng_LIBS = @cap_ng_LIBS@ +conf_mapsize = @conf_mapsize@ +config_dir = @config_dir@ +datadir = @datadir@ +datarootdir = @datarootdir@ +dlopen_LIBS = @dlopen_LIBS@ +docdir = @docdir@ +dvidir = @dvidir@ +embedded_libbpf_CFLAGS = @embedded_libbpf_CFLAGS@ +embedded_libbpf_LIBS = @embedded_libbpf_LIBS@ +embedded_libngtcp2_CFLAGS = @embedded_libngtcp2_CFLAGS@ +embedded_libngtcp2_LIBS = @embedded_libngtcp2_LIBS@ +exec_prefix = @exec_prefix@ +fuzzer_CFLAGS = @fuzzer_CFLAGS@ +fuzzer_LDFLAGS = @fuzzer_LDFLAGS@ +gnutls_CFLAGS = @gnutls_CFLAGS@ +gnutls_LIBS = @gnutls_LIBS@ +host = @host@ +host_alias = @host_alias@ +host_cpu = @host_cpu@ +host_os = @host_os@ +host_vendor = @host_vendor@ +htmldir = @htmldir@ +includedir = @includedir@ +infodir = @infodir@ +install_sh = @install_sh@ +libbpf_CFLAGS = @libbpf_CFLAGS@ +libbpf_LIBS = @libbpf_LIBS@ +libdir = @libdir@ +libdnssec_SONAME = @libdnssec_SONAME@ +libdnssec_SOVERSION = @libdnssec_SOVERSION@ +libdnssec_VERSION_INFO = @libdnssec_VERSION_INFO@ +libedit_CFLAGS = @libedit_CFLAGS@ +libedit_LIBS = @libedit_LIBS@ +libelf_CFLAGS = @libelf_CFLAGS@ +libelf_LIBS = @libelf_LIBS@ +libexecdir = @libexecdir@ +libfstrm_CFLAGS = @libfstrm_CFLAGS@ +libfstrm_LIBS = @libfstrm_LIBS@ +libidn2_CFLAGS = @libidn2_CFLAGS@ +libidn2_LIBS = @libidn2_LIBS@ +libidn_CFLAGS = @libidn_CFLAGS@ +libidn_LIBS = @libidn_LIBS@ +libknot_SONAME = @libknot_SONAME@ +libknot_SOVERSION = @libknot_SOVERSION@ +libknot_VERSION_INFO = @libknot_VERSION_INFO@ +libkqueue_CFLAGS = @libkqueue_CFLAGS@ +libkqueue_LIBS = @libkqueue_LIBS@ +libmaxminddb_CFLAGS = @libmaxminddb_CFLAGS@ +libmaxminddb_LIBS = @libmaxminddb_LIBS@ +libmnl_CFLAGS = @libmnl_CFLAGS@ +libmnl_LIBS = @libmnl_LIBS@ +libnghttp2_CFLAGS = @libnghttp2_CFLAGS@ +libnghttp2_LIBS = @libnghttp2_LIBS@ +libngtcp2_CFLAGS = @libngtcp2_CFLAGS@ +libngtcp2_LIBS = @libngtcp2_LIBS@ +libprotobuf_c_CFLAGS = @libprotobuf_c_CFLAGS@ +libprotobuf_c_LIBS = @libprotobuf_c_LIBS@ +liburcu_CFLAGS = @liburcu_CFLAGS@ +liburcu_LIBS = @liburcu_LIBS@ +liburcu_PKGCONFIG = @liburcu_PKGCONFIG@ +libxdp_CFLAGS = @libxdp_CFLAGS@ +libxdp_LIBS = @libxdp_LIBS@ +libzscanner_SONAME = @libzscanner_SONAME@ +libzscanner_SOVERSION = @libzscanner_SOVERSION@ +libzscanner_VERSION_INFO = @libzscanner_VERSION_INFO@ +lmdb_CFLAGS = @lmdb_CFLAGS@ +lmdb_LIBS = @lmdb_LIBS@ +localedir = @localedir@ +localstatedir = @localstatedir@ +malloc_LIBS = @malloc_LIBS@ +mandir = @mandir@ +math_LIBS = @math_LIBS@ +mkdir_p = @mkdir_p@ +module_dir = @module_dir@ +module_instdir = @module_instdir@ +oldincludedir = @oldincludedir@ +pdfdir = @pdfdir@ +pkgconfigdir = @pkgconfigdir@ +prefix = @prefix@ +program_transform_name = @program_transform_name@ +psdir = @psdir@ +pthread_LIBS = @pthread_LIBS@ +run_dir = @run_dir@ +runstatedir = @runstatedir@ +sbindir = @sbindir@ +sharedstatedir = @sharedstatedir@ +srcdir = @srcdir@ +storage_dir = @storage_dir@ +sysconfdir = @sysconfdir@ +systemd_CFLAGS = @systemd_CFLAGS@ +systemd_LIBS = @systemd_LIBS@ +target_alias = @target_alias@ +top_build_prefix = @top_build_prefix@ +top_builddir = @top_builddir@ +top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@ +MANPAGES_IN = \ + man/knot.conf.5in \ + man/knotc.8in \ + man/knotd.8in \ + man/kcatalogprint.8in \ + man/keymgr.8in \ + man/kjournalprint.8in \ + man/kdig.1in \ + man/khost.1in \ + man/knsupdate.1in \ + man/knsec3hash.1in \ + man/kzonecheck.1in \ + man/kzonesign.1in \ + man/kxdpgun.8in + +MANPAGES_RST = \ + reference.rst \ + man_knotc.rst \ + man_knotd.rst \ + man_kcatalogprint.rst \ + man_keymgr.rst \ + man_kjournalprint.rst \ + man_kdig.rst \ + man_khost.rst \ + man_knsupdate.rst \ + man_knsec3hash.rst \ + man_kzonecheck.rst \ + man_kzonesign.rst \ + man_kxdpgun.rst + +EXTRA_DIST = \ + conf.py \ + \ + appendices.rst \ + configuration.rst \ + index.rst \ + installation.rst \ + introduction.rst \ + migration.rst \ + modules.rst.in \ + operation.rst \ + reference.rst \ + requirements.rst \ + troubleshooting.rst \ + utilities.rst \ + \ + $(MANPAGES_IN) \ + $(MANPAGES_RST) \ + \ + logo.pdf \ + logo.svg \ + \ + theme_html + +SPHINX_V = $(SPHINX_V_@AM_V@) +SPHINX_V_ = $(SPHINX_V_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +SPHINX_V_0 = -q +SPHINX_V_1 = -n +AM_V_SPHINX = $(AM_V_SPHINX_@AM_V@) +AM_V_SPHINX_ = $(AM_V_SPHINX_@AM_DEFAULT_V@) +AM_V_SPHINX_0 = @echo " SPHINX $@"; +SPHINXBUILDDIR = $(builddir)/_build +_SPHINXOPTS = -c $(srcdir) \ + -a \ + $(SPHINX_V) + +ALLSPHINXOPTS = $(_SPHINXOPTS) \ + -D version="$(VERSION)" \ + -D today="$(RELEASE_DATE)" \ + -D release="$(VERSION)" \ + $(SPHINXOPTS) \ + $(srcdir) + +man_SPHINXOPTS = $(_SPHINXOPTS) \ + -D version="@""VERSION@" \ + -D today="@""RELEASE_DATE@" \ + -D release="@""VERSION@" \ + $(SPHINXOPTS) \ + $(srcdir) + +man_MANS = $(am__append_1) $(am__append_2) $(am__append_3) \ + $(am__append_4) +man_SUBST = $(AM_V_GEN)mkdir -p man; \ + sed -e 's,[@]VERSION@,$(VERSION),' \ + -e 's,[@]RELEASE_DATE@,$(RELEASE_DATE),' \ + -e 's,[@]config_dir@,$(config_dir),' \ + -e 's,[@]storage_dir@,$(storage_dir),' \ + -e 's,[@]run_dir@,$(run_dir),' \ + -e 's,[@]conf_mapsize@,$(conf_mapsize),' \ + $< > $@ + +all: all-am + +.SUFFIXES: +.SUFFIXES: .1 .1in .5 .5in .8 .8in +$(srcdir)/Makefile.in: $(srcdir)/Makefile.am $(am__configure_deps) + @for dep in $?; do \ + case '$(am__configure_deps)' in \ + *$$dep*) \ + ( cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh ) \ + && { if test -f $@; then exit 0; else break; fi; }; \ + exit 1;; \ + esac; \ + done; \ + echo ' cd $(top_srcdir) && $(AUTOMAKE) --foreign doc/Makefile'; \ + $(am__cd) $(top_srcdir) && \ + $(AUTOMAKE) --foreign doc/Makefile +Makefile: $(srcdir)/Makefile.in $(top_builddir)/config.status + @case '$?' in \ + *config.status*) \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh;; \ + *) \ + echo ' cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles)'; \ + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ $(am__maybe_remake_depfiles);; \ + esac; + +$(top_builddir)/config.status: $(top_srcdir)/configure $(CONFIG_STATUS_DEPENDENCIES) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh + +$(top_srcdir)/configure: $(am__configure_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(ACLOCAL_M4): $(am__aclocal_m4_deps) + cd $(top_builddir) && $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) am--refresh +$(am__aclocal_m4_deps): +modules.rst: $(top_builddir)/config.status $(srcdir)/modules.rst.in + cd $(top_builddir) && $(SHELL) ./config.status $(subdir)/$@ + +mostlyclean-libtool: + -rm -f *.lo + +clean-libtool: + -rm -rf .libs _libs +install-man1: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man1dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man1: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man1dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.1[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^1][0-9a-z]*$$,1,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +install-man5: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man5dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.5[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^5][0-9a-z]*$$,5,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man5: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man5dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.5[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^5][0-9a-z]*$$,5,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +install-man8: $(man_MANS) + @$(NORMAL_INSTALL) + @list1=''; \ + list2='$(man_MANS)'; \ + test -n "$(man8dir)" \ + && test -n "`echo $$list1$$list2`" \ + || exit 0; \ + echo " $(MKDIR_P) '$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)'"; \ + $(MKDIR_P) "$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)" || exit 1; \ + { for i in $$list1; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + if test -n "$$list2"; then \ + for i in $$list2; do echo "$$i"; done \ + | sed -n '/\.8[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + fi; \ + } | while read p; do \ + if test -f $$p; then d=; else d="$(srcdir)/"; fi; \ + echo "$$d$$p"; echo "$$p"; \ + done | \ + sed -e 'n;s,.*/,,;p;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^8][0-9a-z]*$$,8,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,' | \ + sed 'N;N;s,\n, ,g' | { \ + list=; while read file base inst; do \ + if test "$$base" = "$$inst"; then list="$$list $$file"; else \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) '$$file' '$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)/$$inst'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) "$$file" "$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)/$$inst" || exit $$?; \ + fi; \ + done; \ + for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done | $(am__base_list) | \ + while read files; do \ + test -z "$$files" || { \ + echo " $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files '$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)'"; \ + $(INSTALL_DATA) $$files "$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)" || exit $$?; }; \ + done; } + +uninstall-man8: + @$(NORMAL_UNINSTALL) + @list=''; test -n "$(man8dir)" || exit 0; \ + files=`{ for i in $$list; do echo "$$i"; done; \ + l2='$(man_MANS)'; for i in $$l2; do echo "$$i"; done | \ + sed -n '/\.8[a-z]*$$/p'; \ + } | sed -e 's,.*/,,;h;s,.*\.,,;s,^[^8][0-9a-z]*$$,8,;x' \ + -e 's,\.[0-9a-z]*$$,,;$(transform);G;s,\n,.,'`; \ + dir='$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)'; $(am__uninstall_files_from_dir) +tags TAGS: + +ctags CTAGS: + +cscope cscopelist: + + +distdir: $(BUILT_SOURCES) + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) distdir-am + +distdir-am: $(DISTFILES) + @srcdirstrip=`echo "$(srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + topsrcdirstrip=`echo "$(top_srcdir)" | sed 's/[].[^$$\\*]/\\\\&/g'`; \ + list='$(DISTFILES)'; \ + dist_files=`for file in $$list; do echo $$file; done | \ + sed -e "s|^$$srcdirstrip/||;t" \ + -e "s|^$$topsrcdirstrip/|$(top_builddir)/|;t"`; \ + case $$dist_files in \ + */*) $(MKDIR_P) `echo "$$dist_files" | \ + sed '/\//!d;s|^|$(distdir)/|;s,/[^/]*$$,,' | \ + sort -u` ;; \ + esac; \ + for file in $$dist_files; do \ + if test -f $$file || test -d $$file; then d=.; else d=$(srcdir); fi; \ + if test -d $$d/$$file; then \ + dir=`echo "/$$file" | sed -e 's,/[^/]*$$,,'`; \ + if test -d "$(distdir)/$$file"; then \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + if test -d $(srcdir)/$$file && test $$d != $(srcdir); then \ + cp -fpR $(srcdir)/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + find "$(distdir)/$$file" -type d ! -perm -700 -exec chmod u+rwx {} \;; \ + fi; \ + cp -fpR $$d/$$file "$(distdir)$$dir" || exit 1; \ + else \ + test -f "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || cp -p $$d/$$file "$(distdir)/$$file" \ + || exit 1; \ + fi; \ + done +check-am: all-am +check: check-am +all-am: Makefile $(MANS) +installdirs: + for dir in "$(DESTDIR)$(man1dir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man5dir)" "$(DESTDIR)$(man8dir)"; do \ + test -z "$$dir" || $(MKDIR_P) "$$dir"; \ + done +install: install-am +install-exec: install-exec-am +install-data: install-data-am +uninstall: uninstall-am + +install-am: all-am + @$(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) install-exec-am install-data-am + +installcheck: installcheck-am +install-strip: + if test -z '$(STRIP)'; then \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + install; \ + else \ + $(MAKE) $(AM_MAKEFLAGS) INSTALL_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" \ + install_sh_PROGRAM="$(INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM)" INSTALL_STRIP_FLAG=-s \ + "INSTALL_PROGRAM_ENV=STRIPPROG='$(STRIP)'" install; \ + fi +mostlyclean-generic: + +clean-generic: + +distclean-generic: + -test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_FILES) + -test . = "$(srcdir)" || test -z "$(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES)" || rm -f $(CONFIG_CLEAN_VPATH_FILES) + +maintainer-clean-generic: + @echo "This command is intended for maintainers to use" + @echo "it deletes files that may require special tools to rebuild." +@HAVE_DOCS_FALSE@install-pdf-local: +@HAVE_PDFLATEX_FALSE@install-pdf-local: +@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@install-pdf-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_FALSE@install-html-local: +@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@install-html-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_FALSE@info-local: +@HAVE_MAKEINFO_FALSE@info-local: +@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@info-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_FALSE@html-local: +@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@html-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_FALSE@install-info-local: +@HAVE_MAKEINFO_FALSE@install-info-local: +@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@install-info-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_FALSE@pdf-local: +@HAVE_PDFLATEX_FALSE@pdf-local: +@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@pdf-local: +clean: clean-am + +clean-am: clean-generic clean-libtool clean-local mostlyclean-am + +distclean: distclean-am + -rm -f Makefile +distclean-am: clean-am distclean-generic + +dvi: dvi-am + +dvi-am: + +html: html-am + +html-am: html-local + +info: info-am + +info-am: info-local + +install-data-am: install-man + +install-dvi: install-dvi-am + +install-dvi-am: + +install-exec-am: + +install-html: install-html-am + +install-html-am: install-html-local + +install-info: install-info-am + +install-info-am: install-info-local + +install-man: install-man1 install-man5 install-man8 + +install-pdf: install-pdf-am + +install-pdf-am: install-pdf-local + +install-ps: install-ps-am + +install-ps-am: + +installcheck-am: + +maintainer-clean: maintainer-clean-am + -rm -f Makefile +maintainer-clean-am: distclean-am maintainer-clean-generic + +mostlyclean: mostlyclean-am + +mostlyclean-am: mostlyclean-generic mostlyclean-libtool + +pdf: pdf-am + +pdf-am: pdf-local + +ps: ps-am + +ps-am: + +uninstall-am: uninstall-man + +uninstall-man: uninstall-man1 uninstall-man5 uninstall-man8 + +.MAKE: install-am install-strip + +.PHONY: all all-am check check-am clean clean-generic clean-libtool \ + clean-local cscopelist-am ctags-am distclean distclean-generic \ + distclean-libtool distdir dvi dvi-am html html-am html-local \ + info info-am info-local install install-am install-data \ + install-data-am install-dvi install-dvi-am install-exec \ + install-exec-am install-html install-html-am \ + install-html-local install-info install-info-am \ + install-info-local install-man install-man1 install-man5 \ + install-man8 install-pdf install-pdf-am install-pdf-local \ + install-ps install-ps-am install-strip installcheck \ + installcheck-am installdirs maintainer-clean \ + maintainer-clean-generic mostlyclean mostlyclean-generic \ + mostlyclean-libtool pdf pdf-am pdf-local ps ps-am tags-am \ + uninstall uninstall-am uninstall-man uninstall-man1 \ + uninstall-man5 uninstall-man8 + +.PRECIOUS: Makefile + + +.PHONY: html-local singlehtml pdf-local info-local epub man install-html-local install-singlehtml install-pdf-local install-info-local install-epub + +man/knot.conf.5: man/knot.conf.5in +man/knotc.8: man/knotc.8in +man/knotd.8: man/knotd.8in +man/kcatalogprint.8: man/kcatalogprint.8in +man/keymgr.8: man/keymgr.8in +man/kjournalprint.8: man/kjournalprint.8in +man/kdig.1: man/kdig.1in +man/khost.1: man/khost.1in +man/knsupdate.1: man/knsupdate.1in +man/knsec3hash.1: man/knsec3hash.1in +man/kzonecheck.1: man/kzonecheck.1in +man/kzonesign.1: man/kzonesign.1in +man/kxdpgun.8: man/kxdpgun.8in + +.1in.1: + $(man_SUBST) + +.5in.5: + $(man_SUBST) + +.8in.8: + $(man_SUBST) + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@html-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b html -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @echo "The HTML documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/" + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@install-html-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_sources +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL) -D $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/*.html $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/_sources/* $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_sources/ +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/html/_static/* $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static/ + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@singlehtml: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b singlehtml -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @echo "The single HTML documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml/" + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@install-singlehtml: singlehtml +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml/*.html $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/singlehtml/_static/* $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/_static/ + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@epub: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b epub -A today=$(RELEASE_DATE) -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/epub +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @echo "The EPUB documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/epub/" + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@install-epub: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/epub/KnotDNS.epub $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@pdf-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b latex -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(MAKE) -C $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex all-pdf +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @echo "The PDF documentation has been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex/" + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@install-pdf-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir) +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/latex/KnotDNS.pdf $(DESTDIR)/$(docdir)/ + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_FALSE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@pdf-local install-pdf-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_PDFLATEX_FALSE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @echo "Install 'pdflatex' and re-run configure to be able to generate PDF documentation!" + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@info-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b texinfo -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(ALLSPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(MAKE) -C $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo info +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @echo "The Info pages have been built in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo/" + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@install-info-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL) -d $(DESTDIR)/$(infodir) +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(INSTALL_DATA) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/texinfo/knot.info $(DESTDIR)/$(infodir)/ + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_FALSE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@info-local install-info-local: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_MAKEINFO_FALSE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @echo "Install 'texinfo' and re-run configure to be able to generate Info pages!" + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@.NOTPARALLEL: man +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@man: $(man_MANS) +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@$(MANPAGES_IN): $(MANPAGES_RST) +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ $(AM_V_SPHINX)$(SPHINXBUILD) -b man -d $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/doctrees $(man_SPHINXOPTS) $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/man +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @mkdir -p $(srcdir)/man +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ @for f in $(SPHINXBUILDDIR)/man/*; do \ +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ sed -e '/^\.TP$$/ {' -e 'n' -e 's/^\.B //' -e '}' "$$f" > "$(srcdir)/man/$$(basename $$f)in"; \ +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_TRUE@ done + +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@html-local singlehtml pdf-local info-local epub man install-html-local install-singlehtml install-pdf-local install-info-local install-epub: +@HAVE_DOCS_TRUE@@HAVE_SPHINXBUILD_FALSE@ @echo "Install 'sphinx-build' and re-run configure to be able to generate documentation!" + +clean-local: + -rm -rf $(SPHINXBUILDDIR) + -rm -f man/*.1 man/*.5 man/*.8 + +# Tell versions [3.59,3.63) of GNU make to not export all variables. +# Otherwise a system limit (for SysV at least) may be exceeded. +.NOEXPORT: diff --git a/doc/appendices.rst b/doc/appendices.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..309bb20 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/appendices.rst @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Appendices: + +********** +Appendices +********** + +.. _compatible_pkcs11_devices: + +Compatible PKCS #11 Devices +=========================== + +This section has informative character. Knot DNS has been tested with several +devices which claim to support PKCS #11 interface. The following table +indicates which algorithms and operations have been observed to work. Please +notice minimal GnuTLS library version required for particular algorithm +support. + +.. |yes| replace:: **yes** +.. |no| replace:: no +.. |unknown| replace:: ? + +.. list-table:: + :header-rows: 1 + :stub-columns: 1 + + * - + - Key generate + - Key import + - ED25519 256-bit + - ECDSA 256-bit + - ECDSA 384-bit + - RSA 1024-bit + - RSA 2048-bit + - RSA 4096-bit + * - `Feitian ePass 2003 <https://www.ftsafe.com/Products/PKI/Standard>`_ + - |yes| + - |no| + - |no| + - |no| + - |no| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |no| + * - `SafeNet Network HSM (Luna SA 4) <https://safenet.gemalto.com/data-encryption/hardware-security-modules-hsms/luna-hsms-key-management/luna-sa-network-hsm/>`_ + - |yes| + - |no| + - |no| + - |no| + - |no| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + * - `SoftHSM 2.0 <https://www.opendnssec.org/softhsm/>`_ [#fn-softhsm]_ + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + * - `Trustway Proteccio NetHSM <https://atos.net/en/solutions/cyber-security/data-protection-and-governance/hardware-security-module-trustway-proteccio-nethsm>`_ + - |yes| + - ECDSA only + - |no| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + * - `Ultra Electronics CIS Keyper Plus (Model 9860-2) <https://www.ultra.group/our-business-units/intelligence-communications/cyber/key-management/#acc-keyperplus>`_ + - |yes| + - RSA only + - |no| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + * - `Utimaco SecurityServer (V4) <https://hsm.utimaco.com/products-hardware-security-modules/general-purpose-hsm/securityserver-cse/>`_ [#fn-utimaco]_ + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |no| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |yes| + +.. in progress: key ID checks have to be disabled in code + * - `Yubikey NEO <https://www.yubico.com/products/yubikey-hardware/yubikey-neo/>`_ + - |no| + - |no| + - |no| + - |yes| + - |no| + - |yes| + - |yes| + - |no| + +.. [#fn-softhsm] Algorithms supported depend on support in OpenSSL on which SoftHSM relies. + A command similar to the following may be used to verify what algorithms are supported: + ``$ pkcs11-tool --modul /usr/lib64/pkcs11/libsofthsm2.so -M``. +.. [#fn-utimaco] Requires setting the number of background workers to 1! + +The following table summarizes supported DNSSEC algorithm numbers and minimal +GnuTLS library version required. Any algorithm may work with older library, +however the supported operations may be limited (e.g. private key import). + +.. list-table:: + :header-rows: 1 + :stub-columns: 1 + + * - + - `Numbers <https://www.iana.org/assignments/dns-sec-alg-numbers/dns-sec-alg-numbers.xhtml#dns-sec-alg-numbers-1>`_ + - GnuTLS version + * - ED25519 + - 15 + - 3.6.0 or newer + * - ECDSA + - 13, 14 + - 3.4.8 or newer + * - RSA + - 5, 7, 8, 10 + - 3.4.6 or newer diff --git a/doc/conf.py b/doc/conf.py new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d814073 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/conf.py @@ -0,0 +1,272 @@ +# -*- coding: utf-8 -*- +# +# Knot DNS documentation build configuration file, created by +# sphinx-quickstart on Tue Apr 15 13:48:28 2014. +# +# This file is execfile()d with the current directory set to its containing dir. +# +# Note that not all possible configuration values are present in this +# autogenerated file. +# +# All configuration values have a default; values that are commented out +# serve to show the default. + +import sys, os, time, logging + +sys.setrecursionlimit(1500) + +# If extensions (or modules to document with autodoc) are in another directory, +# add these directories to sys.path here. If the directory is relative to the +# documentation root, use os.path.abspath to make it absolute, like shown here. +sys.path.insert(0, os.path.abspath('.')) + +# -- General configuration ----------------------------------------------------- + +# If your documentation needs a minimal Sphinx version, state it here. +#needs_sphinx = '1.0' + +# Add any Sphinx extension module names here, as strings. They can be extensions +# coming with Sphinx (named 'sphinx.ext.*') or your custom ones. +extensions = [] + +# Add any paths that contain templates here, relative to this directory. +templates_path = ['_templates'] + +# The suffix of source filenames. +source_suffix = '.rst' + +# The encoding of source files. +#source_encoding = 'utf-8-sig' + +# The master toctree document. +master_doc = 'index' + +# General information about the project. +project = 'Knot DNS' +copyright_year = 2023 +current_year = time.localtime().tm_year +if current_year > copyright_year: + logging.warning('Copyright year is %d, but current year is %d.'%(copyright_year, current_year)) + logging.warning('Maybe you should update copyright_year in doc/conf.py?') +copyright = u'Copyright 2010–%d, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o.' % copyright_year +author = 'CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz>' + +# The version info for the project you're documenting, acts as replacement for +# |version| and |release|, also used in various other places throughout the +# built documents. +# +# The short X.Y version. +#version = '' +# The full version, including alpha/beta/rc tags. +#release = '' + +# The language for content autogenerated by Sphinx. Refer to documentation +# for a list of supported languages. +#language = None + +# There are two options for replacing |today|: either, you set today to some +# non-false value, then it is used: +#today = False +# Else, today_fmt is used as the format for a strftime call. +#today_fmt = '%B %d, %Y' + +# List of patterns, relative to source directory, that match files and +# directories to ignore when looking for source files. +exclude_patterns = ['_build', 'modules'] + +# The reST default role (used for this markup: `text`) to use for all documents. +#default_role = None + +# If true, '()' will be appended to :func: etc. cross-reference text. +#add_function_parentheses = True + +# If true, the current module name will be prepended to all description +# unit titles (such as .. function::). +#add_module_names = True + +# If true, sectionauthor and moduleauthor directives will be shown in the +# output. They are ignored by default. +#show_authors = False + +# The name of the Pygments (syntax highlighting) style to use. +pygments_style = 'sphinx' + +# A list of ignored prefixes for module index sorting. +#modindex_common_prefix = [] + +# -- Options for HTML output --------------------------------------------------- + +# The theme to use for HTML and HTML Help pages. See the documentation for +# a list of builtin themes. +html_theme = 'theme_html' + +# Theme options are theme-specific and customize the look and feel of a theme +# further. For a list of options available for each theme, see the +# documentation. +#html_theme_options = {} + +# Add any paths that contain custom themes here, relative to this directory. +html_theme_path = ['.'] + +# The name for this set of Sphinx documents. If None, it defaults to +# "<project> v<release> documentation". +#html_title = None + +# A shorter title for the navigation bar. Default is the same as html_title. +#html_short_title = None + +# The name of an image file (relative to this directory) to place at the top +# of the sidebar. +html_logo = 'logo.svg' + +# The name of an image file (within the static path) to use as favicon of the +# docs. This file should be a Windows icon file (.ico) being 16x16 or 32x32 +# pixels large. +#html_favicon = None + +# Add any paths that contain custom static files (such as style sheets) here, +# relative to this directory. They are copied after the builtin static files, +# so a file named "default.css" will overwrite the builtin "default.css". +#html_static_path = ['_static'] + +# If not '', a 'Last updated on:' timestamp is inserted at every page bottom, +# using the given strftime format. +#html_last_updated_fmt = '%b %d, %Y' + +# If true, smartquotes will be used to convert quotes and dashes to +# typographically correct entities. +smartquotes = False + +# Custom sidebar templates, maps document names to template names. +#html_sidebars = {} + +# Additional templates that should be rendered to pages, maps page names to +# template names. +#html_additional_pages = {} + +# If false, no module index is generated. +html_domain_indices = False + +# If false, no index is generated. +html_use_index = False + +# If true, the index is split into individual pages for each letter. +#html_split_index = False + +# If true, links to the reST sources are added to the pages. +#html_show_sourcelink = True + +# If true, "Created using Sphinx" is shown in the HTML footer. Default is True. +#html_show_sphinx = True + +# If true, "(C) Copyright ..." is shown in the HTML footer. Default is True. +#html_show_copyright = True + +# If true, an OpenSearch description file will be output, and all pages will +# contain a <link> tag referring to it. The value of this option must be the +# base URL from which the finished HTML is served. +#html_use_opensearch = '' + +# This is the file name suffix for HTML files (e.g. ".xhtml"). +#html_file_suffix = None + +# Output file base name for HTML help builder. +htmlhelp_basename = 'KnotDNSdoc' + +# -- Options for LaTeX output -------------------------------------------------- + +latex_elements = { +# The paper size ('letterpaper' or 'a4paper'). +'papersize': 'a4paper', + +# The font size ('10pt', '11pt' or '12pt'). +#'pointsize': '10pt', + +# Additional stuff for the LaTeX preamble. +#'preamble': '', + +# No empty pages between chapters +'classoptions': ',openany,oneside', + +# Language preferences +'babel': '\\usepackage[english]{babel}', +} + +# Grouping the document tree into LaTeX files. List of tuples +# (source start file, target name, title, author, documentclass [howto/manual]). +latex_documents = [ + ('index', 'KnotDNS.tex', 'Knot DNS Documentation', copyright, 'manual'), +] + +# The name of an image file (relative to this directory) to place at the top of +# the title page. +latex_logo = 'logo.pdf' + +# For "manual" documents, if this is true, then toplevel headings are parts, +# not chapters. +#latex_use_parts = False + +# If true, show page references after internal links. +#latex_show_pagerefs = False + +# If true, show URL addresses after external links. +#latex_show_urls = False + +# Documents to append as an appendix to all manuals. +#latex_appendices = [] + +# If false, no module index is generated. +latex_domain_indices = False + +# -- Options for manual page output -------------------------------------------- + +# One entry per manual page. List of tuples +# (source start file, name, description, authors, manual section). +man_pages = [ + ('reference', 'knot.conf', 'Knot DNS configuration file', author, 5), + ('man_knotc', 'knotc', 'Knot DNS control utility', author, 8), + ('man_knotd', 'knotd', 'Knot DNS server daemon', author, 8), + ('man_kcatalogprint', 'kcatalogprint', 'Knot DNS catalog print utility', author, 8), + ('man_keymgr', 'keymgr', 'Knot DNS key management utility', author, 8), + ('man_kjournalprint', 'kjournalprint', 'Knot DNS journal print utility', author, 8), + ('man_kdig', 'kdig', 'Advanced DNS lookup utility', author, 1), + ('man_khost', 'khost', 'Simple DNS lookup utility', author, 1), + ('man_knsec3hash', 'knsec3hash', 'Simple utility to compute NSEC3 hash', author, 1), + ('man_knsupdate', 'knsupdate', 'Dynamic DNS update utility', author, 1), + ('man_kzonecheck', 'kzonecheck', 'Knot DNS zone check tool', author, 1), + ('man_kzonesign', 'kzonesign', 'DNSSEC signing utility', author, 1), + ('man_kxdpgun', 'kxdpgun', 'XDP-powered DNS benchmarking tool', author, 8), +] + +# If true, show URL addresses after external links. +#man_show_urls = False + +# -- Options for Texinfo output ------------------------------------------------ + +# Grouping the document tree into Texinfo files. List of tuples +# (source start file, target name, title, author, +# dir menu entry, description, category) +texinfo_documents = [ + ('index', 'knot', 'Knot DNS Documentation', author, + 'KnotDNS', 'Knot Authoritative DNS Server', 'Miscellaneous') +] + +# Documents to append as an appendix to all manuals. +#texinfo_appendices = [] + +# If false, no module index is generated. +#texinfo_domain_indices = True + +# How to display URL addresses: 'footnote', 'no', or 'inline'. +#texinfo_show_urls = 'footnote' + +# -- Options for Epub output ---------------------------------------------- + +epub_title = project +epub_author = author +epub_publisher = author +epub_copyright = copyright + +epub_theme = 'theme_epub' +epub_cover = ('_static/logo.svg', 'epub-cover.html') +epub_exclude_files = ['epub-cover.xhtml'] diff --git a/doc/configuration.rst b/doc/configuration.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d91a117 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/configuration.rst @@ -0,0 +1,905 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Configuration: + +************* +Configuration +************* + +Simple configuration +==================== + +The following example presents a simple configuration file +which can be used as a base for your Knot DNS setup:: + + # Example of a very simple Knot DNS configuration. + + server: + listen: 0.0.0.0@53 + listen: ::@53 + + zone: + - domain: example.com + storage: /var/lib/knot/zones/ + file: example.com.zone + + log: + - target: syslog + any: info + +Now let's walk through this configuration step by step: + +- The :ref:`server_listen` statement in the :ref:`server section<Server section>` + defines where the server will listen for incoming connections. + We have defined the server to listen on all available IPv4 and IPv6 addresses, + all on port 53. +- The :ref:`zone section` defines the zones that the server will + serve. In this case, we defined one zone named *example.com* which is stored + in the zone file :file:`/var/lib/knot/zones/example.com.zone`. +- The :ref:`log section` defines the log facilities for + the server. In this example, we told Knot DNS to send its log messages with + the severity ``info`` or more serious to the syslog (or systemd journal). + +For detailed description of all configuration items see +:ref:`Configuration Reference`. + +Zone templates +============== + +A zone template allows a single zone configuration to be shared among several +zones. There is no inheritance between templates; they are exclusive. The +``default`` template identifier is reserved for the default template:: + + template: + - id: default + storage: /var/lib/knot/master + semantic-checks: on + + - id: signed + storage: /var/lib/knot/signed + dnssec-signing: on + semantic-checks: on + master: [master1, master2] + + - id: slave + storage: /var/lib/knot/slave + + zone: + - domain: example1.com # Uses default template + + - domain: example2.com # Uses default template + semantic-checks: off # Override default settings + + - domain: example.cz + template: signed + master: master3 # Override masters to just master3 + + - domain: example1.eu + template: slave + master: master1 + + - domain: example2.eu + template: slave + master: master2 + +.. NOTE:: + Each template option can be explicitly overridden in zone-specific configuration. + +.. _ACL: + +Access control list (ACL) +========================= + +Some types of incoming DNS requests must be authorized before they can be +processed by the server. A zone can have configured :ref:`zone_acl` which is +a sequence of :ref:`rules <ACL section>` describing what requests are authorized. +By default if :ref:`automatic ACL <server_automatic-acl>` is not enabled, all requests, +which require authorization, are denied. + +Every ACL rule can allow or deny one or more request types based on the +source IP address, network subnet, or address range and/or if the request is +secured by a given TSIG key. See :doc:`keymgr -t<man_keymgr>` on how +to generate a TSIG key. + +If there are multiple ACL rules assigned to a zone, they are applied in the +specified order of the :ref:`zone_acl` configuration. The first rule that matches +the given request is applied and the remaining rules are ignored. Some examples:: + + acl: + - id: address_rule + address: [2001:db8::1, 192.168.2.0/24] + action: transfer + + - id: deny_rule + address: 192.168.2.100 + action: transfer + deny: on + + zone: + - domain: acl1.example.com + acl: [deny_rule, address_rule] # Allow some addresses with an exception + +:: + + key: + - id: key1 # The real TSIG key name + algorithm: hmac-sha256 + secret: 4Tc0K1QkcMCs7cOW2LuSWnxQY0qysdvsZlSb4yTN9pA= + + acl: + - id: deny_all + address: 192.168.3.0/24 + deny: on # No action specified and deny on implies denial of all actions + + - id: key_rule + key: key1 # Access based just on TSIG key + action: [transfer, notify] + + zone: + - domain: acl2.example.com + acl: [deny_all, key_rule] # Allow with the TSIG except for the subnet + +In the case of dynamic DNS updates, some additional conditions may be specified +for more granular filtering. See more in the section :ref:`Restricting dynamic updates`. + +.. NOTE:: + If more conditions (address ranges and/or a key) + are given in a single ACL rule, all of them have to be satisfied for the rule to match. + +.. TIP:: + In order to restrict regular DNS queries, use module :ref:`queryacl<mod-queryacl>`. + +Secondary (slave) zone +====================== + +Knot DNS doesn't strictly differ between primary (formerly known as master) +and secondary (formerly known as slave) zones. The only requirement for a secondary +zone is to have a :ref:`zone_master` statement set. For effective zone synchronization, +incoming zone change notifications (NOTIFY), which require authorization, can be +enabled using :ref:`automatic ACL <server_automatic-acl>` or :ref:`explicit ACL <zone_acl>` +configuration. Optional transaction authentication (TSIG) is supported for both +zone transfers and zone notifications:: + + server: + automatic-acl: on # Enabled automatic ACL + + key: + - id: xfr_notify_key # Common TSIG key for XFR an NOTIFY + algorithm: hmac-sha256 + secret: VFRejzw8h4M7mb0xZKRFiZAfhhd1eDGybjqHr2FV3vc= + + remote: + - id: primary + address: [2001:DB8:1::1, 192.168.1.1] # Primary server IP addresses + # via: [2001:DB8:2::1, 10.0.0.1] # Local source addresses (optional) + key: xfr_notify_key # TSIG key (optional) + + zone: + - domain: example.com + master: primary # Primary remote(s) + +An example of explicit ACL with different TSIG keys for zone transfers +and notifications:: + + key: + - id: notify_key # TSIG key for NOTIFY + algorithm: hmac-sha256 + secret: uBbhV4aeSS4fPd+wF2ZIn5pxOMF35xEtdq2ibi2hHEQ= + + - id: xfr_key # TSIG key for XFR + algorithm: hmac-sha256 + secret: VFRejzw8h4M7mb0xZKRFiZAfhhd1eDGybjqHr2FV3vc= + + remote: + - id: primary + address: [2001:DB8:1::1, 192.168.1.1] # Primary server IP addresses + # via: [2001:DB8:2::1, 10.0.0.1] # Local source addresses if needed + key: xfr_key # Optional TSIG key + + acl: + - id: notify_from_primary # ACL rule for NOTIFY from primary + address: [2001:DB8:1::1, 192.168.1.1] # Primary addresses (optional) + key: notify_key # TSIG key (optional) + action: notify + + zone: + - domain: example.com + master: primary # Primary remote(s) + acl: notify_from_primary # Explicit ACL(s) + +Note that the :ref:`zone_master` option accepts a list of remotes, which are +queried for a zone refresh sequentially in the specified order. When the server +receives a zone change notification from a listed remote, only that remote is +used for a subsequent zone transfer. + +.. NOTE:: + When transferring a lot of zones, the server may easily get into a state + where all available ports are in the TIME_WAIT state, thus transfers + cease until the operating system closes the ports for good. There are + several ways to work around this: + + * Allow reusing of ports in TIME_WAIT (sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_tw_reuse=1) + * Shorten TIME_WAIT timeout (tcp_fin_timeout) + * Increase available local port count + +Primary (master) zone +===================== + +A zone is considered primary if it doesn't have :ref:`zone_master` set. As +outgoing zone transfers (XFR) require authorization, it must be enabled +using :ref:`automatic ACL <server_automatic-acl>` or :ref:`explicit ACL <zone_acl>` +configuration. Outgoing zone change notifications (NOTIFY) to remotes can be +set by configuring :ref:`zone_notify`. Transaction authentication +(TSIG) is supported for both zone transfers and zone notifications:: + + server: + automatic-acl: on # Enabled automatic ACL + + key: + - id: xfr_notify_key # Common TSIG key for XFR an NOTIFY + algorithm: hmac-sha256 + secret: VFRejzw8h4M7mb0xZKRFiZAfhhd1eDGybjqHr2FV3vc= + + remote: + - id: secondary + address: [2001:DB8:1::1, 192.168.1.1] # Secondary server IP addresses + # via: [2001:DB8:2::1, 10.0.0.1] # Local source addresses (optional) + key: xfr_notify_key # TSIG key (optional) + + acl: + - id: local_xfr # Allow XFR to localhost without TSIG + address: [::1, 127.0.0.1] + action: transfer + + zone: + - domain: example.com + notify: secondary # Secondary remote(s) + acl: local_xfr # Explicit ACL for local XFR + +Note that the :ref:`zone_notify` option accepts a list of remotes, which are +all notified sequentially in the specified order. + +A secondary zone may serve as a primary zone for a different set of remotes +at the same time. + +Dynamic updates +=============== + +Dynamic updates for the zone are allowed via proper ACL rule with the +``update`` action. If the zone is configured as a secondary and a DNS update +message is accepted, the server forwards the message to its primary master. +The primary master's response is then forwarded back to the originator. + +However, if the zone is configured as a primary, the update is accepted and +processed:: + + acl: + - id: update_acl + address: 192.168.3.0/24 + action: update + + zone: + - domain: example.com + acl: update_acl + +.. _Restricting dynamic updates: + +Restricting dynamic updates +--------------------------- + +There are several additional ACL options for dynamic DNS updates which affect +the request classification based on the update contents. + +Updates can be restricted to specific resource record types:: + + acl: + - id: type_rule + action: update + update-type: [A, AAAA, MX] # Updated records must match one of the specified types + +Another possibility is restriction on the owner name of updated records. The option +:ref:`acl_update-owner` is used to select the source of domain +names which are used for the comparison. And the option :ref:`acl_update-owner-match` +specifies the required relation between the record owner and the reference domain +names. Example:: + + acl: + - id: owner_rule1 + action: update + update-owner: name # Updated record owners are restricted by the next conditions + update-owner-match: equal # The record owner must exactly match one name from the next list + update-owner-name: [foo, bar.] # Reference domain names + +.. NOTE:: + If the specified owner name is non-FQDN (e.g. ``foo``), it's considered relatively + to the effective zone name. So it can apply to more zones + (e.g. ``foo.example.com.`` or ``foo.example.net.``). Alternatively, if the + name is FQDN (e.g. ``bar.``), the rule only applies to this name. + +If the reference domain name is the zone name, the following variant can be used:: + + acl: + - id: owner_rule2 + action: update + update-owner: zone # The reference name is the zone name + update-owner-match: sub # Any record owner matches except for the zone name itself + + template: + - id: default + acl: owner_rule2 + + zone: + - domain: example.com. + - domain: example.net. + +The last variant is for the cases where the reference domain name is a TSIG key name, +which must be used for the transaction security:: + + key: + - id: example.com # Key names are always considered FQDN + ... + - id: steve.example.net + ... + - id: jane.example.net + ... + + acl: + - id: owner_rule3_com + action: update + update-owner: key # The reference name is the TSIG key name + update-owner-match: sub # The record owner must be a subdomain of the key name + key: [example.com] # One common key for updating all non-apex records + + - id: owner_rule3_net + action: update + update-owner: key # The reference name is the TSIG key name + update-owner-match: equal # The record owner must exactly match the used key name + key: [steve.example.net, jane.example.net] # Keys for updating specific zone nodes + + zone: + - domain: example.com. + acl: owner_rule3_com + - domain: example.net. + acl: owner_rule3_net + +.. _dnssec: + +Automatic DNSSEC signing +======================== + +Knot DNS supports automatic DNSSEC signing of zones. The signing +can operate in two modes: + +1. :ref:`Automatic key management <dnssec-automatic-zsk-management>`. + In this mode, the server maintains signing keys. New keys are generated + according to assigned policy and are rolled automatically in a safe manner. + No zone operator intervention is necessary. + +2. :ref:`Manual key management <dnssec-manual-key-management>`. + In this mode, the server maintains zone signatures only. The signatures + are kept up-to-date and signing keys are rolled according to timing + parameters assigned to the keys. The keys must be generated and timing + parameters must be assigned by the zone operator. + +The DNSSEC signing process maintains some metadata which is stored in the +:abbr:`KASP (Key And Signature Policy)` database. This database is backed +by LMDB. + +.. WARNING:: + Make sure to set the KASP database permissions correctly. For manual key + management, the database must be *readable* by the server process. For + automatic key management, it must be *writeable*. If no HSM is used, + the database also contains private key material – don't set the permissions + too weak. + +.. _dnssec-automatic-zsk-management: + +Automatic ZSK management +------------------------ + +For automatic ZSK management a signing :ref:`policy<Policy section>` has to +be configured and assigned to the zone. The policy specifies how the zone +is signed (i.e. signing algorithm, key size, key lifetime, signature lifetime, +etc.). If no policy is specified or the ``default`` one is assigned, the +default signing parameters are used. + +A minimal zone configuration may look as follows:: + + zone: + - domain: myzone.test + dnssec-signing: on + +With a custom signing policy, the policy section will be added:: + + policy: + - id: custom_policy + signing-threads: 4 + algorithm: ECDSAP256SHA256 + zsk-lifetime: 60d + + zone: + - domain: myzone.test + dnssec-signing: on + dnssec-policy: custom_policy + +After configuring the server, reload the changes: + +.. code-block:: console + + $ knotc reload + +The server will generate initial signing keys and sign the zone properly. Check +the server logs to see whether everything went well. + +.. _dnssec-automatic-ksk-management: + +Automatic KSK management +------------------------ + +For automatic KSK management, first configure ZSK management like above, and use +additional options in :ref:`policy section <Policy section>`, mostly specifying +desired (finite) lifetime for KSK: :: + + remote: + - id: parent_zone_server + address: 192.168.12.1@53 + + submission: + - id: parent_zone_sbm + parent: [parent_zone_server] + + policy: + - id: custom_policy + signing-threads: 4 + algorithm: ECDSAP256SHA256 + zsk-lifetime: 60d + ksk-lifetime: 365d + ksk-submission: parent_zone_sbm + + zone: + - domain: myzone.test + dnssec-signing: on + dnssec-policy: custom_policy + +After the initially-generated KSK reaches its lifetime, new KSK is published and after +convenience delay the submission is started. The server publishes CDS and CDNSKEY records +and the user shall propagate them to the parent. The server periodically checks for +DS at the parent zone and when positive, finishes the rollover. + +.. _dnssec-manual-key-management: + +Manual key management +--------------------- + +For automatic DNSSEC signing with manual key management, a signing policy +with manual key management flag has to be set:: + + policy: + - id: manual + manual: on + + zone: + - domain: myzone.test + dnssec-signing: on + dnssec-policy: manual + +To generate signing keys, use the :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>` utility. +For example, we can use Single-Type Signing: + +.. code-block:: console + + $ keymgr myzone.test. generate algorithm=ECDSAP256SHA256 ksk=yes zsk=yes + +And reload the server. The zone will be signed. + +To perform a manual rollover of a key, the timing parameters of the key need +to be set. Let's roll the key. Generate a new key, but do not activate +it yet: + +.. code-block:: console + + $ keymgr myzone.test. generate algorithm=ECDSAP256SHA256 ksk=yes zsk=yes active=+1d + +Take the key ID (or key tag) of the old key and disable it the same time +the new key gets activated: + +.. code-block:: console + + $ keymgr myzone.test. set <old_key_id> retire=+2d remove=+3d + +Reload the server again. The new key will be published (i.e. the DNSKEY record +will be added into the zone). Remember to update the DS record in the +parent zone to include a reference to the new key. This must happen within one +day (in this case) including a delay required to propagate the new DS to +caches. + +.. WARNING:: + If you ever decide to switch from manual key management to automatic key management, + note that the automatic key management uses + :ref:`policy_zsk-lifetime` and :ref:`policy_ksk-lifetime` policy configuration + options to schedule key rollovers and it internally uses timestamps of keys differently + than in the manual case. As a consequence it might break if the ``retire`` or ``remove`` timestamps + are set for the manually generated keys currently in use. Make sure to set these timestamps + to zero using :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>`: + + .. code-block:: console + + $ keymgr myzone.test. set <key_id> retire=0 remove=0 + + and configure your policy suitably according to :ref:`dnssec-automatic-zsk-management` + and :ref:`dnssec-automatic-ksk-management`. + +.. _dnssec-signing: + +Zone signing +------------ + +The signing process consists of the following steps: + +#. Processing KASP database events. (e.g. performing a step of a rollover). +#. Updating the DNSKEY records. The whole DNSKEY set in zone apex is replaced + by the keys from the KASP database. Note that keys added into the zone file + manually will be removed. To add an extra DNSKEY record into the set, the + key must be imported into the KASP database (possibly deactivated). +#. Fixing the NSEC or NSEC3 chain. +#. Removing expired signatures, invalid signatures, signatures expiring + in a short time, and signatures issued by an unknown key. +#. Creating missing signatures. Unless the Single-Type Signing Scheme + is used, DNSKEY records in a zone apex are signed by KSK keys and + all other records are signed by ZSK keys. +#. Updating and re-signing SOA record. + +The signing is initiated on the following occasions: + +- Start of the server +- Zone reload +- Reaching the signature refresh period +- Key set changed due to rollover event +- Received DDNS update +- Forced zone re-sign via server control interface + +On a forced zone re-sign, all signatures in the zone are dropped and recreated. + +The ``knotc zone-status`` command can be used to see when the next scheduled +DNSSEC re-sign will happen. + +.. _dnssec-on-slave-signing: + +On-secondary (on-slave) signing +------------------------------- + +It is possible to enable automatic DNSSEC zone signing even on a secondary +server. If enabled, the zone is signed after every AXFR/IXFR transfer +from primary, so that the secondary always serves a signed up-to-date version +of the zone. + +It is strongly recommended to block any outside access to the primary +server, so that only the secondary server's signed version of the zone is served. + +Enabled on-secondary signing introduces events when the secondary zone changes +while the primary zone remains unchanged, such as a key rollover or +refreshing of RRSIG records, which cause inequality of zone SOA serial +between primary and secondary. The secondary server handles this by saving the +primary's SOA serial in a special variable inside KASP DB and appropriately +modifying AXFR/IXFR queries/answers to keep the communication with +primary server consistent while applying the changes with a different serial. + +.. _catalog-zones: + +Catalog zones +============= + +Catalog zones are a concept whereby a list of zones to be configured is maintained +as contents of a separate, special zone. This approach has the benefit of simple +propagation of a zone list to secondary servers, especially when the list is +frequently updated. Currently, catalog zones are described in this `Internet Draft +<https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-dnsop-dns-catalog-zones>`_. + +Terminology first. *Catalog zone* is a meta-zone which shall not be a part +of the DNS tree, but it contains information about the set of member zones and +is transferable to secondary servers using common AXFR/IXFR techniques. +A *catalog-member zone* (or just *member zone*) is a zone based on +information from the catalog zone and not from configuration file/database. +*Member properties* are some additional information related to each member zone, +also distributed with the catalog zone. + +A catalog zone is handled almost in the same way as a regular zone: +It can be configured using all the standard options (but for example +DNSSEC signing is useless as the zone won't be queried by clients), including primary/secondary configuration +and ACLs. A catalog zone is indicated by setting the option +:ref:`zone_catalog-role`. The difference is that standard DNS +queries to a catalog zone are answered with REFUSED as though the zone +doesn't exist, unless querying over TCP from an address with transfers enabled +by ACL. The name of the catalog zone is arbitrary. It's possible to configure +multiple catalog zones. + +.. WARNING:: + Don't choose a name for a catalog zone below a name of any other + existing zones configured on the server as it would effectively "shadow" + part of your DNS subtree. + +Upon catalog zone (re)load or change, all the PTR records in the format +``unique-id.zones.catalog. 0 IN PTR member.com.`` (but not ``too.deep.zones.catalog.``!) +are processed and member zones created, with zone names taken from the +PTR records' RData, and zone settings taken from the configuration +templates specified by :ref:`zone_catalog-template`. + +The owner names of the PTR records shall follow this scheme: + +.. code-block:: console + + <unique-id>.zones.<catalog-zone>. + +where the mentioned labels shall match: + +- *<unique-id>* — Single label that is recommended to be unique among member zones. +- ``zones`` — Required label. +- *<catalog-zone>* — Name of the catalog zone. + +Additionally, records in the format +``group.unique-id.zones.catalog. 0 IN TXT "conf-template"`` +are processed as a definition of the member's *group* property. The +``unique-id`` must match the one of the PTR record defining the member. + +All other records and other member properties are ignored. They remain in the catalog +zone, however, and might be for example transferred to a secondary server, +which may interpret catalog zones differently. SOA still needs to be present in +the catalog zone and its serial handled appropriately. An apex NS record must be +present as for any other zone. The version record ``version 0 IN TXT "2"`` +is required at the catalog zone apex. + +A catalog zone may be modified using any standard means (e.g. AXFR/IXFR, DDNS, +zone file reload). In the case of incremental change, only affected +member zones are reloaded. + +The catalog zone must have at least one :ref:`zone_catalog-template` +configured. The configuration for any defined member zone is taken from its +*group* property value, which should match some catalog-template name. +If the *group* property is not defined for a member, is empty, or doesn't match +any of defined catalog-template names, the first catalog-template +(in the order from configuration) is used. Nesting of catalog zones isn't +supported. + +Any de-cataloged member zone is purged immediately, including its +zone file, journal, timers, and DNSSEC keys. The zone file is not +deleted if :ref:`zone_zonefile-sync` is set to *-1* for member zones. +Any member zone, whose PTR record's owner has been changed, is purged +immediately if and only if the *<unique-id>* has been changed. + +When setting up catalog zones, it might be useful to set +:ref:`database_catalog-db` and :ref:`database_catalog-db-max-size` +to non-default values. + +.. NOTE:: + + Whenever a catalog zone is updated, the server reloads itself with + all configured zones, including possibly existing other catalog zones. + It's similar to calling `knotc zone-reload` (for all zones). + The consequence is that new zone files might be discovered and reloaded, + even for zones that do not relate to updated catalog zone. + + Catalog zones never expire automatically, regardless of what is declared + in the catalog zone SOA. However, a catalog zone can be expired manually + at any time using `knotc -f zone-purge +expire`. + + Currently, expiration of a catalog zone doesn't have any effect on its + member zones. This will likely change in the future depending on the + Internet Draft. + +.. WARNING:: + + The server does not work well if one member zone appears in two catalog zones + concurrently. The user is encouraged to avoid this situation whatsoever. + Thus, there is no way a member zone can be migrated from one catalog + to another while preserving its metadata. Following steps may be used + as a workaround: + + * :ref:`Back up<Data and metadata backup>` the member zone's metadata + (on each server separately). + * Remove the member zone from the catalog it's a member of. + * Wait for the catalog zone to be propagated to all servers. + * Add the member zone to the other catalog. + * Restore the backed up metadata (on each server separately). + +Catalog zones configuration examples +------------------------------------ + +Below are configuration snippets (e.g. `server` and `log` sections missing) +of very simple catalog zone setups, in order to illustrate the relations +between catalog-related configuration options. + +First setup represents a very simple scenario where the primary is +the catalog zone generator and the secondary is the catalog zone consumer. + +Primary configuration:: + + acl: + - id: slave_xfr + address: ... + action: transfer + + template: + - id: mmemb + catalog-role: member + catalog-zone: catz. + acl: slave_xfr + + zone: + - domain: catz. + catalog-role: generate + acl: slave_xfr + + - domain: foo.com. + template: mmemb + + - domain: bar.com. + template: mmemb + +Secondary configuration:: + + acl: + - id: master_notify + address: ... + action: notify + + template: + - id: smemb + master: master + acl: master_notify + + zone: + - domain: catz. + master: master + acl: master_notify + catalog-role: interpret + catalog-template: smemb + +When new zones are added (or removed) to the primary configuration with assigned +`mmemb` template, they will automatically propagate to the secondary +and have the `smemb` template assigned there. + +Second example is with a hand-written (or script-generated) catalog zone, +while employing configuration groups:: + + catz. 0 SOA invalid. invalid. 1625079950 3600 600 2147483646 0 + catz. 0 NS invalid. + version.catz. 0 TXT "2" + nj2xg5bnmz2w4ltd.zones.catz. 0 PTR just-fun.com. + group.nj2xg5bnmz2w4ltd.zones.catz. 0 TXT unsigned + nvxxezjnmz2w4ltd.zones.catz. 0 PTR more-fun.com. + group.nvxxezjnmz2w4ltd.zones.catz. 0 TXT unsigned + nfwxa33sorqw45bo.zones.catz. 0 PTR important.com. + group.nfwxa33sorqw45bo.zones.catz. 0 TXT signed + mjqw42zomnxw2lq0.zones.catz. 0 PTR bank.com. + group.mjqw42zomnxw2lq0.zones.catz. 0 TXT signed + +And the server in this case is configured to distinguish the groups by applying +different templates:: + + template: + - id: unsigned + ... + + - id: signed + dnssec-signing: on + dnssec-policy: ... + ... + + zone: + - domain: catz. + file: ... + catalog-role: interpret + catalog-template: [ unsigned, signed ] + +.. _query-modules: + +Query modules +============= + +Knot DNS supports configurable query modules that can alter the way +queries are processed. Each query requires a finite number of steps to +be resolved. We call this set of steps a *query plan*, an abstraction +that groups these steps into several stages. + +* Before-query processing +* Answer, Authority, Additional records packet sections processing +* After-query processing + +For example, processing an Internet-class query needs to find an +answer. Then based on the previous state, it may also append an +authority SOA or provide additional records. Each of these actions +represents a 'processing step'. Now, if a query module is loaded for a +zone, it is provided with an implicit query plan which can be extended +by the module or even changed altogether. + +A module is active if its name, which includes the ``mod-`` prefix, is assigned +to the zone/template :ref:`zone_module` option or to the ``default`` template +:ref:`template_global-module` option if activating for all queries. +If the module is configurable, a corresponding module section with +an identifier must be created and then referenced in the form of +``module_name/module_id``. See :ref:`Modules` for the list of available modules. + +.. NOTE:: + Query modules are processed in the order they are specified in the + zone/template configuration. In most cases, the recommended order is:: + + mod-synthrecord, mod-onlinesign, mod-cookies, mod-rrl, mod-dnstap, mod-stats + +Performance Tuning +================== + +Numbers of Workers +------------------ + +There are three types of workers ready for parallel execution of performance-oriented tasks: +UDP workers, TCP workers, and Background workers. The first two types handle all network requests +via the UDP and TCP protocol (respectively) and do the response jobs for common +queries. Background workers process changes to the zone. + +By default, Knot determines a well-fitting number of workers based on the number of CPU cores. +The user can specify the number of workers for each type with configuration/server section: +:ref:`server_udp-workers`, :ref:`server_tcp-workers`, :ref:`server_background-workers`. + +An indication of when to increase the number of workers is when the server is lagging behind +expected performance, while CPU usage remains low. This is usually due to waiting for network +or I/O response during the operation. It may be caused by Knot design not fitting the use-case well. +The user should try increasing the number of workers (of the related type) slightly above 100 and if +the performance improves, decide a further, exact setting. + +Number of available file descriptors +------------------------------------ + +A name server configured for a large number of zones (hundreds or more) needs enough file descriptors +available for zone transfers and zone file updates, which default OS settings often don't provide. +It's necessary to check with the OS configuration and documentation and ensure the number of file +descriptors (sometimes called a number of concurrently open files) effective for the knotd process +is set suitably high. The number of concurrently open incoming TCP connections must be taken into +account too. In other words, the required setting is affected by the :ref:`server_tcp-max-clients` +setting. + +Sysctl and NIC optimizations +---------------------------- + +There are several recommendations based on Knot developers' experience with their specific HW and SW +(mainstream Intel-based servers, Debian-based GNU/Linux distribution). They may improve or impact +performance in common use cases. + +If your NIC driver allows it (see /proc/interrupts for hint), set CPU affinity (/proc/irq/$IRQ/smp_affinity) +manually so that each NIC channel is served by unique CPU core(s). You must turn off irqbalance service +in advance to avoid configuration override. + +Configure sysctl as follows: :: + + socket_bufsize=1048576 + busy_latency=0 + backlog=40000 + optmem_max=20480 + + net.core.wmem_max = $socket_bufsize + net.core.wmem_default = $socket_bufsize + net.core.rmem_max = $socket_bufsize + net.core.rmem_default = $socket_bufsize + net.core.busy_read = $busy_latency + net.core.busy_poll = $busy_latency + net.core.netdev_max_backlog = $backlog + net.core.optmem_max = $optmem_max + +Disable huge pages. + +Configure your CPU to "performance" mode. This can be achieved depending on architecture, e.g. in BIOS, +or e.g. configuring /sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cpufreq/scaling_governor to "performance". + +Tune your NIC device with ethtool: :: + + ethtool -A $dev autoneg off rx off tx off + ethtool -K $dev tso off gro off ufo off + ethtool -G $dev rx 4096 tx 4096 + ethtool -C $dev rx-usecs 75 + ethtool -C $dev tx-usecs 75 + ethtool -N $dev rx-flow-hash udp4 sdfn + ethtool -N $dev rx-flow-hash udp6 sdfn + +On FreeBSD you can just: :: + + ifconfig ${dev} -rxcsum -txcsum -lro -tso + +Knot developers are open to hear about users' further suggestions about network devices tuning/optimization. diff --git a/doc/index.rst b/doc/index.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c2bd3dd --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/index.rst @@ -0,0 +1,19 @@ +.. highlight:: none + +Welcome to Knot DNS's documentation! +==================================== + +.. toctree:: + :maxdepth: 2 + + introduction + requirements + installation + configuration + operation + troubleshooting + reference + modules + utilities + migration + appendices diff --git a/doc/installation.rst b/doc/installation.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ff71a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/installation.rst @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ +.. highlight:: console +.. _Installation: + +************ +Installation +************ + +.. _Installation from a package_: + +Installation from a package +=========================== + +Knot DNS may already be included in your operating system distribution and +therefore can be installed from packages (Linux), ports (BSD), or via +Homebrew (macOS). This is always preferred unless you want to test the latest +features, contribute to Knot development, or you know what you are doing. + +See the project `download <https://www.knot-dns.cz/download>`_ page for +the latest information. + +.. _Installation from source code: + +Installation from source code +============================= + +Required build environment +-------------------------- + +The build process relies on these standard tools: + +* make +* libtool +* pkg-config +* autoconf >= 2.65 +* python-sphinx (optional, for documentation building) + +GCC >= 4.1 is mandatory for atomic built-ins, but the latest +available version is recommended. Another requirement is ``_GNU_SOURCE`` +and C99 support, otherwise it adapts to the available compiler features. +LLVM clang compiler since version 2.9 can be used as well. + +Getting the source code +----------------------- + +You can find the source code for the latest release on `www.knot-dns.cz <https://www.knot-dns.cz>`_. +Alternatively, you can fetch the whole project from the git repository +`https://gitlab.nic.cz/knot/knot-dns.git <https://gitlab.nic.cz/knot/knot-dns>`_. + +After obtaining the source code, compilation and installation is quite a +straightforward process using autotools. + +.. _Configuring and generating Makefiles: + +Configuring and generating Makefiles +------------------------------------ + +If compiling from git source, you need to bootstrap the ``./configure`` file first:: + + $ autoreconf -i -f + +In most cases, you can just run configure without any options:: + + $ ./configure + +For all available configure options run:: + + $ ./configure --help + +Compilation +----------- + +After running ``./configure`` you can compile Knot DNS by running +``make`` command, which will produce binaries and other related +files:: + + $ make + +.. NOTE:: + The compilation with enabled optimizations may take a long time. In such + a case the ``--disable-fastparser`` configure option can help. + +Installation +------------ + +When you have finished building Knot DNS, it's time to install the +binaries and configuration files into the operation system hierarchy. +You can do so by executing:: + + $ make install + +When installing as a non-root user, you might have to gain elevated privileges by +switching to root user, e.g. ``sudo make install`` or ``su -c 'make install'``. diff --git a/doc/introduction.rst b/doc/introduction.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a54f6e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/introduction.rst @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Introduction: + +************ +Introduction +************ + +What is Knot DNS +================ + +Knot DNS is a high-performance open-source DNS server. It +implements only the authoritative domain name service. Knot DNS +can reliably serve TLD domains as well as any other zones. + +Knot DNS benefits from its multi-threaded and mostly lock-free +implementation which allows it to scale well on SMP systems and +operate non-stop even when adding or removing zones. + +The server itself is accompanied by several utilities for general DNS +operations or for maintaining the server. + +For more info and downloads see `www.knot-dns.cz <https://www.knot-dns.cz>`_. + +Knot DNS features +================= + +DNS features: + +* Primary and secondary server operation +* Internet class (IN) +* DNS extension (EDNS0, EDE) +* TCP and UDP protocols +* Zone catalog generation and interpretation +* Minimal responses +* Dynamic zone updates +* DNSSEC with NSEC and NSEC3 +* ZONEMD generation and validation +* Transaction signature using TSIG +* Full and incremental zone transfers (AXFR, IXFR) +* Name server identification using NSID or Chaos TXT records +* Resource record types A, NS, CNAME, SOA, PTR, HINFO, MINFO, MX, + TXT, RP, AFSDB, RT, KEY, AAAA, LOC, SRV, NAPTR, KX, CERT, DNAME, APL, DS, + SSHFP, IPSECKEY, RRSIG, NSEC, DNSKEY, DHCID, NSEC3, NSEC3PARAM, TLSA, SMIMEA, + CDS, CDNSKEY, OPENPGPKEY, CSYNC, ZONEMD, SVCB, HTTPS, SPF, NID, L32, L64, LP, + EUI48, EUI64, URI, CAA, and Unknown + +Server features: + +* IPv4 and IPv6 support +* Semantic zone checks +* Server control interface +* Zone journal storage +* Persistent zone event timers +* YAML-based or database-based configuration +* Query processing modules with dynamic loading +* On-the-fly zone management and server reconfiguration +* Multithreaded DNSSEC zone signing and zone validation +* Automatic DNSSEC key management +* Zone data backup and restore +* Offline KSK operation +* PKCS #11 interface + +Remarkable module extensions: + +* Response rate limiting +* Forward and reverse records synthesis +* DNS request traffic statistics +* Efficient DNS traffic logging interface +* Dnstap traffic logging +* Online DNSSEC signing +* GeoIP response tailoring supporting ECS and DNSSEC + +Remarkable supported networking features: + +* TCP Fast Open (client and server) +* High-performance UDP and TCP through AF_XDP processing (on Linux 4.18+) +* Inbound DNS-over-QUIC processing (on Linux) +* SO_REUSEPORT (on Linux) or SO_REUSEPORT_LB (on FreeBSD 12.0+) on UDP and by choice on TCP +* Binding to non-local addresses (IP_FREEBIND on Linux, IP_BINDANY/IPV6_BINDANY on FreeBSD) +* Ignoring PMTU information for IPv4/UDP via IP_PMTUDISC_OMIT + +License +======= + +Knot DNS is licensed under the `GNU General Public License <https://www.gnu.org/copyleft/gpl.html>`_ +version 3 or (at your option) any later version. The full text of the license +is available in the ``COPYING`` file distributed with source code. diff --git a/doc/logo.pdf b/doc/logo.pdf Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..113566b --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/logo.pdf diff --git a/doc/logo.svg b/doc/logo.svg new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0085ca --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/logo.svg @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ +<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?> +<!-- Generator: Adobe Illustrator 23.0.6, SVG Export Plug-In . SVG Version: 6.00 Build 0) --> +<svg version="1.1" id="Vrstva_1" xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2000/svg" xmlns:xlink="http://www.w3.org/1999/xlink" x="0px" y="0px" + viewBox="0 0 600 225" style="enable-background:new 0 0 600 225;" xml:space="preserve"> +<style type="text/css"> + .st0{fill:#003893;} +</style> +<path class="st0" d="M319.2,106.8l-30.5-37.9h-0.2v37.9h-19.5V24.6h19.5V58h0.4l29.4-33.4H343l-35.4,37.9l37.5,44.4H319.2 + M407.2,106.8L374.1,53h-0.3l0.5,53.8h-19.3V24.6h22.6l33,53.6h0.4l-0.5-53.6h19.3v82.2H407.2z M486.1,109 + c-25.7,0-44.7-17.7-44.7-43.7c0-26.4,19-43,44.7-43c25.8,0,44.8,16.6,44.8,43C530.9,91.3,511.9,109,486.1,109z M486.1,40.3 + c-13.9,0-23.5,10.7-23.5,25.1c0,14.9,9.6,25.5,23.5,25.5c13.8,0,23.6-10.7,23.6-25.5C509.7,50.9,500,40.3,486.1,40.3z M576.8,41.5 + v65.3h-19.9V41.5h-23.2v-17H600v17H576.8z M299.6,200.2h-30.7V118h29.7c23.3,0,47,9.8,47,40.9C345.7,187.8,322.2,200.2,299.6,200.2z + M298.2,134.9h-9.9V183h9.4c14.2,0,27.3-5.8,27.3-24.2C325,140.4,311.9,134.9,298.2,134.9z M407.2,200.2l-33.1-53.8h-0.3l0.5,53.8 + h-19.3V118h22.6l33,53.6h0.4l-0.5-53.6h19.3v82.2H407.2z M488.6,139.3c-3.4-4.3-9.5-7.1-14.6-7.1c-5.1,0-11.5,1.7-11.5,8.2 + c0,5.5,4.9,7.2,12.7,9.6c11.1,3.6,25.5,8.4,25.5,24.7c0,18.9-15.2,27.4-31.5,27.4c-11.7,0-23.6-4.3-30.8-11.8l13-13.2 + c3.9,5,11.3,8.7,17.8,8.7c6,0,11.4-2.3,11.4-8.9c0-6.3-6.3-8.2-17.1-11.7c-10.5-3.4-21-8.7-21-23.6c0-18.2,16.5-25.8,31.8-25.8 + c9.3,0,19.7,3.5,26.9,10.1L488.6,139.3z M184.9,27.1c1.3,6.9,2.1,14,2.1,21.3c0,22.2-6.6,43-17.9,60.4c-0.4,0.6-0.8,1.2-1.2,1.8 + c-0.4,0.6-0.8,1.2-1.2,1.7c-4.3,6.2-9.3,11.9-14.8,17.1c-0.5,0.5-1,0.9-1.5,1.4c-0.5,0.5-1,0.9-1.5,1.4c-10.9,9.6-23.6,17-37.6,21.8 + c-3.5-6.3-6.2-13.1-8.1-20.3c12-3.9,23-10.3,32.2-18.6c0.5-0.4,1-0.9,1.4-1.3c0.5-0.4,1-0.9,1.4-1.4c5.2-5.1,9.8-10.9,13.6-17.1 + c0.4-0.6,0.7-1.2,1-1.7c0.4-0.6,0.7-1.2,1-1.8c7.1-12.9,11.2-27.6,11.2-43.3c0-6.4-0.7-12.6-2-18.6c-0.1-0.7-0.3-1.3-0.4-1.9 + c-0.2-0.6-0.3-1.3-0.5-1.9c-0.6,0.2-1.3,0.3-1.9,0.5c-0.6,0.2-1.3,0.4-1.9,0.6c-20.6,6.7-37.9,20.7-49,38.9 + c-7.2-2.2-14.7-3.8-22.4-4.6c13.2-25.5,35.8-45.3,63.3-54.6c0,0,0,0,0,0c-12.1-4.5-25.3-6.9-38.9-6.9C55.7-0.1,9.4,40.5,0.6,93.8 + c0.5-0.4,1-0.9,1.5-1.3c19.6-17.2,45.3-27.7,73.4-27.7c1.9,0,3.7,0,5.5,0.1c0.7,0,1.4,0.1,2.1,0.1c0.7,0.1,1.4,0.1,2.1,0.2 + c7.7,0.7,15.1,2.1,22.2,4.3c0.6,0.2,1.3,0.4,1.9,0.6c0.6,0.2,1.3,0.4,1.9,0.6c14,4.8,26.7,12.2,37.6,21.8c-3.8,6.3-8.3,12-13.5,17.1 + c-9.2-8.3-20.1-14.7-32.1-18.6c-0.6-0.2-1.2-0.4-1.9-0.6c-0.6-0.2-1.3-0.4-1.9-0.6c-6.9-1.9-14.2-3-21.6-3.2c-0.7,0-1.4,0-2.1,0 + h-0.3c-0.6,0-1.2,0-1.8,0c-22.3,0.4-42.7,9-58.1,23c-0.5,0.4-1,0.9-1.4,1.3c-0.5,0.4-1,0.9-1.4,1.4c0.4,0.4,0.9,0.9,1.4,1.4 + c0.5,0.5,1,0.9,1.5,1.3c15.5,13.9,35.8,22.5,58.1,23c1.7,7.5,4.2,14.8,7.3,21.7c-1.8,0.1-3.7,0.1-5.5,0.1 + c-28.1,0-53.8-10.5-73.4-27.7c-0.5-0.4-1-0.9-1.5-1.3c8.8,53.3,55.1,94,110.9,94c13.7,0,26.8-2.4,38.9-6.9 + c-27.5-9.4-50.1-29.2-63.3-54.7c-0.3-0.6-0.6-1.3-0.9-1.9c-0.3-0.6-0.6-1.3-0.9-1.9c-3.2-6.8-5.7-13.9-7.5-21.4 + c-0.2-0.6-0.3-1.3-0.4-2c-0.2-0.6-0.3-1.3-0.4-2c-1.4-7-2.1-14.3-2.1-21.7c0-7.4,0.7-14.7,2.1-21.7c7.5,0.1,14.7,1.2,21.6,3.1 + c-1.3,6-1.9,12.2-1.9,18.6s0.7,12.6,1.9,18.6c0.1,0.6,0.3,1.3,0.4,1.9c0.2,0.6,0.3,1.3,0.5,1.9c1.9,7.2,4.6,14,8,20.4 + c0.3,0.6,0.6,1.2,1,1.8c0.3,0.6,0.7,1.2,1,1.8c11.1,18.2,28.4,32.2,49,38.9c0.6,0.2,1.3,0.4,1.9,0.6c0.6,0.2,1.3,0.4,1.9,0.5 + c0.2-0.6,0.3-1.3,0.5-1.9c0.2-0.6,0.3-1.3,0.4-2c1.3-6,2-12.2,2-18.6c0-15.7-4.1-30.5-11.2-43.3c5.6-5.2,10.7-10.9,15.1-17.1 + c11.3,17.4,17.9,38.2,17.9,60.5c0,7.3-0.7,14.4-2.1,21.2c23.9-20.6,39-51.1,39-85.2C223.9,78.3,208.8,47.8,184.9,27.1z"/> +</svg> diff --git a/doc/man/kcatalogprint.8in b/doc/man/kcatalogprint.8in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..afab092 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/kcatalogprint.8in @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KCATALOGPRINT" "8" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +kcatalogprint \- Knot DNS catalog print utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkcatalogprint\fP [\fIconfig_option\fP \fIconfig_argument\fP] [\fIoption\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +The program prints zone catalog stored in a catalog database. +.SS Config options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-config\fP \fIfile\fP +Use a textual configuration file (default is \fB@config_dir@/knot.conf\fP). +.TP +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-confdb\fP \fIdirectory\fP +Use a binary configuration database directory (default is \fB@storage_dir@/confdb\fP). +The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default +configuration file. +.TP +\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-dir\fP \fIpath\fP +Use specified catalog database path and default configuration. +.UNINDENT +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-a\fP, \fB\-\-catalog\fP +Filter the output by catalog zone name. +.TP +\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-member\fP +Filter the output by member zone name. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBknotd(8)\fP, \fBknot.conf(5)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/kdig.1in b/doc/man/kdig.1in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..714eaf9 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/kdig.1in @@ -0,0 +1,460 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KDIG" "1" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +kdig \- Advanced DNS lookup utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkdig\fP [\fIcommon\-settings\fP] [\fIquery\fP [\fIsettings\fP]]... +.sp +\fBkdig\fP \fB\-h\fP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +This utility sends one or more DNS queries to a nameserver. Each query can have +individual \fIsettings\fP, or it can be specified globally via \fIcommon\-settings\fP, +which must precede \fIquery\fP specification. +.SS Parameters +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fIquery\fP +\fIname\fP | \fB\-q\fP \fIname\fP | \fB\-x\fP \fIaddress\fP | \fB\-G\fP \fItapfile\fP +.TP +\fIcommon\-settings\fP, \fIsettings\fP +[\fIquery_class\fP] [\fIquery_type\fP] [\fB@\fP\fIserver\fP]... [\fIoptions\fP] +.TP +\fIname\fP +Is a domain name that is to be looked up. +.TP +\fIserver\fP +Is a domain name or an IPv4 or IPv6 address of the nameserver to send a query +to. An additional port can be specified using address:port ([address]:port +for IPv6 address), address@port, or address#port notation. A value which begins +with \(aq/\(aq character is considered an absolute UNIX socket path. If no server is +specified, the servers from \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP are used. +.UNINDENT +.sp +If no arguments are provided, \fBkdig\fP sends NS query for the root +zone. +.SS Query classes +.sp +A \fIquery_class\fP can be either a DNS class name (IN, CH) or generic class +specification \fBCLASS\fP\fIXXXXX\fP where \fIXXXXX\fP is a corresponding decimal +class number. The default query class is IN. +.SS Query types +.sp +A \fIquery_type\fP can be either a DNS resource record type +(A, AAAA, NS, SOA, DNSKEY, ANY, etc.) or one of the following: +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fBTYPE\fP\fIXXXXX\fP +Generic query type specification where \fIXXXXX\fP is a corresponding decimal +type number. +.TP +\fBAXFR\fP +Full zone transfer request. +.TP +\fBIXFR=\fP\fIserial\fP +Incremental zone transfer request for specified SOA serial number +(i.e. all zone updates since the specified zone version are to be returned). +.TP +\fBNOTIFY=\fP\fIserial\fP +Notify message with a SOA serial hint specified. +.TP +\fBNOTIFY\fP +Notify message with a SOA serial hint unspecified. +.UNINDENT +.sp +The default query type is A. +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-4\fP +Use the IPv4 protocol only. +.TP +\fB\-6\fP +Use the IPv6 protocol only. +.TP +\fB\-b\fP \fIaddress\fP +Set the source IP address of the query to \fIaddress\fP\&. The address must be a +valid address for local interface or :: or 0.0.0.0. An optional port +can be specified in the same format as the \fIserver\fP value. +.TP +\fB\-c\fP \fIclass\fP +An explicit \fIquery_class\fP specification. See possible values above. +.TP +\fB\-d\fP +Enable debug messages. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-k\fP \fIkeyfile\fP +Use the TSIG key stored in a file \fIkeyfile\fP to authenticate the request. The +file must contain the key in the same format as accepted by the +\fB\-y\fP option. +.TP +\fB\-p\fP \fIport\fP +Set the nameserver port number or service name to send a query to. The default +port is 53. +.TP +\fB\-q\fP \fIname\fP +Set the query name. An explicit variant of \fIname\fP specification. If no \fIname\fP +is provided, empty question section is set. +.TP +\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP +An explicit \fIquery_type\fP specification. See possible values above. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.TP +\fB\-x\fP \fIaddress\fP +Send a reverse (PTR) query for IPv4 or IPv6 \fIaddress\fP\&. The correct name, class +and type is set automatically. +.TP +\fB\-y\fP [\fIalg\fP:]\fIname\fP:\fIkey\fP +Use the TSIG key named \fIname\fP to authenticate the request. The \fIalg\fP +part specifies the algorithm (the default is hmac\-sha256) and \fIkey\fP specifies +the shared secret encoded in Base64. +.TP +\fB\-E\fP \fItapfile\fP +Export a dnstap trace of the query and response messages received to the +file \fItapfile\fP\&. +.TP +\fB\-G\fP \fItapfile\fP +Generate message output from a previously saved dnstap file \fItapfile\fP\&. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBmultiline\fP +Wrap long records to more lines and improve human readability. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBshort\fP +Show record data only. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBgeneric\fP +Use the generic representation format when printing resource record types +and data. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBcrypto\fP +Display the DNSSEC keys and signatures values in base64, instead of omitting them. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBaaflag\fP +Set the AA flag. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtcflag\fP +Set the TC flag. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBrdflag\fP +Set the RD flag. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBrecurse\fP +Same as \fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBrdflag\fP +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBraflag\fP +Set the RA flag. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBzflag\fP +Set the zero flag bit. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBadflag\fP +Set the AD flag. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBcdflag\fP +Set the CD flag. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBdnssec\fP +Set the DO flag. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBall\fP +Show all packet sections. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBqr\fP +Show the query packet. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBheader\fP +Show the packet header. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBcomments\fP +Show commented section names. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBopt\fP +Show the EDNS pseudosection. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBopttext\fP +Try to show unknown EDNS options as text. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBquestion\fP +Show the question section. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBanswer\fP +Show the answer section. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBauthority\fP +Show the authority section. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBadditional\fP +Show the additional section. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtsig\fP +Show the TSIG pseudosection. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBstats\fP +Show trailing packet statistics. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBclass\fP +Show the DNS class. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBttl\fP +Show the TTL value. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtcp\fP +Use the TCP protocol (default is UDP for standard query and TCP for AXFR/IXFR). +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBfastopen\fP +Use TCP Fast Open. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBignore\fP +Don\(aqt use TCP automatically if a truncated reply is received. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBkeepopen\fP +Keep TCP connection open for the following query if it has the same connection +configuration. This applies to +tcp, +tls, and +https operations. The connection +is considered in the context of a single kdig call only. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\fP +Use TLS with the Opportunistic privacy profile (\fI\%RFC 7858#section\-4.1\fP). +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\-ca\fP[=\fIFILE\fP] +Use TLS with a certificate validation. Certification authority certificates +are loaded from the specified PEM file (default is system certificate storage +if no argument is provided). +Can be specified multiple times. If the +tls\-hostname option is not provided, +the name of the target server (if specified) is used for strict authentication. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\-pin\fP=\fIBASE64\fP +Use TLS with the Out\-of\-Band key\-pinned privacy profile (\fI\%RFC 7858#section\-4.2\fP). +The PIN must be a Base64 encoded SHA\-256 hash of the X.509 SubjectPublicKeyInfo. +Can be specified multiple times. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\-hostname\fP=\fISTR\fP +Use TLS with a remote server hostname check. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\-sni\fP=\fISTR\fP +Use TLS with a Server Name Indication. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\-keyfile\fP=\fIFILE\fP +Use TLS with a client keyfile. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\-certfile\fP=\fIFILE\fP +Use TLS with a client certfile. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtls\-ocsp\-stapling\fP[=\fIH\fP] +Use TLS with a valid stapled OCSP response for the server certificate +(%u or specify hours). OCSP responses older than the specified period are +considered invalid. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBhttps\fP[=\fIURL\fP] +Use HTTPS (DNS\-over\-HTTPS) in wire format (\fI\%RFC 1035#section\-4.2.1\fP). +It is also possible to specify URL=[authority][/path] where request +will be sent to. Any leading scheme and authority indicator (i.e. //) are ignored. +Authority might also be specified as the \fIserver\fP (using the parameter \fI@\fP). +If \fIpath\fP is specified and \fIauthority\fP is missing, then the \fIserver\fP +is used as authority together with the specified \fIpath\fP\&. +Library \fIlibnghttp2\fP is required. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBhttps\-get\fP +Use HTTPS with HTTP/GET method instead of the default HTTP/POST method. +Library \fIlibnghttp2\fP is required. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBquic\fP +Use QUIC (DNS\-over\-QUIC). +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBnsid\fP +Request the nameserver identifier (NSID). +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBbufsize\fP=\fIB\fP +Set EDNS buffer size in bytes (default is 4096 bytes). +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBpadding\fP[=\fIB\fP] +Use EDNS(0) padding option to pad queries, optionally to a specific +size. The default is to pad queries with a sensible amount when using ++tls, and not to pad at all when queries are sent without TLS. With +no argument (i.e., just +padding) pad every query with a sensible +amount regardless of the use of TLS. With +nopadding, never pad. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBalignment\fP[=\fIB\fP] +Align the query to B\-byte\-block message using the EDNS(0) padding option +(default is no or 128 if no argument is specified). +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBsubnet\fP=\fISUBN\fP +Set EDNS(0) client subnet SUBN=addr/prefix. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBedns\fP[=\fIN\fP] +Use EDNS version (default is 0). +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBtimeout\fP=\fIT\fP +Set the wait\-for\-reply interval in seconds (default is 5 seconds). This timeout +applies to each query attempt. Zero value or \fInotimeout\fP is interpreted as +infinity. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBretry\fP=\fIN\fP +Set the number (>=0) of UDP retries (default is 2). This doesn\(aqt apply to +AXFR/IXFR. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBexpire\fP +Sets the EXPIRE EDNS option. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBcookie\fP[=\fIHEX\fP] +Attach EDNS(0) cookie to the query. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBbadcookie\fP +Repeat a query with the correct cookie. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBednsopt\fP[=\fICODE\fP[:\fIHEX\fP]] +Send custom EDNS option. The \fICODE\fP is EDNS option code in decimal, \fIHEX\fP +is an optional hex encoded string to use as EDNS option value. This argument +can be used multiple times. +noednsopt clears all EDNS options specified by ++ednsopt. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBproxy\fP=\fISRC_ADDR\fP[#\fISRC_PORT\fP]\-\fIDST_ADDR\fP[#\fIDST_PORT\fP] +Add PROXYv2 header with the specified source and destination addresses to the query. +The default source port is 0 and destination port 53. +.TP +\fB+\fP[\fBno\fP]\fBjson\fP +Use JSON for output encoding (RFC 8427). +.TP +\fB+noidn\fP +Disable the IDN transformation to ASCII and vice versa. IDN support depends +on libidn availability during project building! If used in \fIcommon\-settings\fP, +all IDN transformations are disabled. If used in the individual query \fIsettings\fP, +transformation from ASCII is disabled on output for the particular query. Note +that IDN transformation does not preserve domain name letter case. +.UNINDENT +.SH NOTES +.sp +Options \fB\-k\fP and \fB\-y\fP can not be used simultaneously. +.sp +Dnssec\-keygen keyfile format is not supported. Use \fBkeymgr(8)\fP instead. +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP 1. 3 +Get A records for example.com: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ kdig example.com A +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 2. 3 +Perform AXFR for zone example.com from the server 192.0.2.1: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ kdig example.com \-t AXFR @192.0.2.1 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 3. 3 +Get A records for example.com from 192.0.2.1 and reverse lookup for address +2001:DB8::1 from 192.0.2.2. Both using the TCP protocol: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ kdig +tcp example.com \-t A @192.0.2.1 \-x 2001:DB8::1 @192.0.2.2 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 4. 3 +Get SOA record for example.com, use TLS, use system certificates, check +for specified hostname, check for certificate pin, and print additional +debug info: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ kdig \-d @185.49.141.38 +tls\-ca +tls\-host=getdnsapi.net \e + +tls\-pin=foxZRnIh9gZpWnl+zEiKa0EJ2rdCGroMWm02gaxSc9S= soa example.com +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 5. 3 +DNS over HTTPS examples (various DoH implementations): +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ kdig @1.1.1.1 +https example.com. +$ kdig @193.17.47.1 +https=/doh example.com. +$ kdig @8.8.4.4 +https +https\-get example.com. +$ kdig @8.8.8.8 +https +tls\-hostname=dns.google +fastopen example.com. +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 6. 3 +More queries share one DoT connection: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ kdig @1.1.1.1 +tls +keepopen abc.example.com A mail.example.com AAAA +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH FILES +.sp +\fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBkhost(1)\fP, \fBknsupdate(1)\fP, \fBkeymgr(8)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/keymgr.8in b/doc/man/keymgr.8in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..399ece8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/keymgr.8in @@ -0,0 +1,364 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KEYMGR" "8" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +keymgr \- Knot DNS key management utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkeymgr\fP [\fIconfig_option\fP \fIconfig_argument\fP] [\fIoption\fP\&...] \fIzone_name\fP \fIcommand\fP \fIargument\fP\&... +.sp +\fBkeymgr\fP [\fIconfig_option\fP \fIconfig_argument\fP] \fB\-l\fP +.sp +\fBkeymgr\fP \fB\-t\fP \fIparameter\fP\&... +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +The \fBkeymgr\fP utility serves for manual key management in Knot DNS server. +.sp +Functions for DNSSEC keys and KASP (Key And Signature Policy) +management are provided. +.sp +The DNSSEC and KASP configuration is stored in a so called KASP database. +The database is backed by LMDB. +.SS Config options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-config\fP \fIfile\fP +Use a textual configuration file (default is \fB@config_dir@/knot.conf\fP). +.TP +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-confdb\fP \fIdirectory\fP +Use a binary configuration database directory (default is \fB@storage_dir@/confdb\fP). +The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default +configuration file. +.TP +\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-dir\fP \fIpath\fP +Use specified KASP database path and default configuration. +.UNINDENT +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-tsig\fP \fItsig_name\fP [\fItsig_algorithm\fP [\fItsig_bits\fP]] +Generates a TSIG key. TSIG algorithm can be specified by string (default: hmac\-sha256), +bit length of the key by number (default: optimal length given by algorithm). The generated +TSIG key is only displayed on \fIstdout\fP: the command does not create a file, nor include the +key in a keystore. +.TP +\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-extended\fP +Extended output (listing of keys with full description). +.TP +\fB\-j\fP, \fB\-\-json\fP +Print the zones or keys in JSON format. +.TP +\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-list\fP +Print the list of zones that have at least one key stored in the configured KASP +database. +.TP +\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-mono\fP +Don\(aqt generate colorized output. +.TP +\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP +Force colorized output in the normal mode. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Keymgr runs with the same user privileges as configured for knotd\&. +For example, if keymgr is run as \fBroot\fP, but the configured user +is \fBknot\fP, it won\(aqt be able to read files (PEM files, KASP database, ...) readable +only by \fBroot\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS Commands +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fBlist\fP [\fItimestamp_format\fP] +Prints the list of key IDs and parameters of keys belonging to the zone. +.TP +\fBgenerate\fP [\fIarguments\fP\&...] +Generates new DNSSEC key and stores it in KASP database. Prints the key ID. +This action takes some number of arguments (see below). Values for unspecified arguments are taken +from corresponding policy (if \fI\-c\fP or \fI\-C\fP options used) or from Knot policy defaults. +.TP +\fBimport\-bind\fP \fIBIND_key_file\fP +Imports a BIND\-style key into KASP database (converting it to PEM format). +Takes one argument: path to BIND key file (private or public, but both MUST exist). +.TP +\fBimport\-pub\fP \fIBIND_pubkey_file\fP +Imports a public key into KASP database. This key won\(aqt be rolled over nor used for signing. +Takes one argument: path to BIND public key file. +.TP +\fBimport\-pem\fP \fIPEM_file\fP [\fIarguments\fP\&...] +Imports a DNSSEC key from PEM file. The key parameters (same as for the generate action) need to be +specified (mainly algorithm, timers...) because they are not contained in the PEM format. +.TP +\fBimport\-pkcs11\fP \fIkey_id\fP [\fIarguments\fP\&...] +Imports a DNSSEC key from PKCS #11 storage. The key parameters (same as for the generate action) need to be +specified (mainly algorithm, timers...) because they are not available. In fact, no key +data is imported, only KASP database metadata is created. +.TP +\fBnsec3\-salt\fP [\fInew_salt\fP] +Prints the current NSEC3 salt used for signing. If \fInew_salt\fP is specified, the salt is overwritten. +The salt is printed and expected in hexadecimal, or dash if empty. +.TP +\fBlocal\-serial\fP [\fInew_serial\fP] +Print SOA serial stored in KASP database when using on\-secondary DNSSEC signing. +If \fInew_serial\fP is specified, the serial is overwritten. After updating the serial, expire the zone +(\fBzone\-purge +expire +zonefile +journal\fP) if the server is running, or remove corresponding zone file +and journal contents if the server is stopped. +.TP +\fBmaster\-serial\fP [\fInew_serial\fP] +Print SOA serial of the remote master stored in KASP database when using on\-secondary DNSSEC signing. +If \fInew_serial\fP is specified, the serial is overwritten (not recommended). +.TP +\fBset\fP \fIkey_spec\fP [\fIarguments\fP\&...] +Changes a timing argument (or ksk/zsk) of an existing key to a new value. \fIKey_spec\fP is either the +key tag or a prefix of the key ID, with an optional \fI[id=|keytag=]\fP prefix; \fIarguments\fP +are like for \fBgenerate\fP, but just the related ones. +.TP +\fBds\fP [\fIkey_spec\fP] +Generate DS record (all digest algorithms together) for specified key. \fIKey_spec\fP +is like for \fBset\fP, if unspecified, all KSKs are used. +.TP +\fBdnskey\fP [\fIkey_spec\fP] +Generate DNSKEY record for specified key. \fIKey_spec\fP +is like for \fBds\fP, if unspecified, all KSKs are used. +.TP +\fBdelete\fP \fIkey_spec\fP +Remove the specified key from zone. If the key was not shared, it is also deleted from keystore. +.TP +\fBshare\fP \fIkey_ID\fP \fIzone_from\fP +Import a key (specified by full key ID) from another zone as shared. After this, the key is +owned by both zones equally. +.UNINDENT +.SS Commands related to Offline KSK feature +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fBpregenerate\fP [\fItimestamp\-from\fP] \fItimestamp\-to\fP +Pre\-generate ZSKs for use with offline KSK, for the specified period starting from now or specified time. +This function also applies to non\-offline KSK keys. +.TP +\fBshow\-offline\fP [\fItimestamp\-from\fP] [\fItimestamp\-to\fP] +Print pre\-generated offline key\-related records for specified time interval. If \fItimestamp_to\fP +is omitted, it will be to infinity. If \fItimestamp\-from\fP is omitted, it will start from the +beginning. +.TP +\fBdel\-offline\fP \fItimestamp\-from\fP \fItimestamp\-to\fP +Delete pre\-generated offline key\-related records in specified time interval. +.TP +\fBdel\-all\-old\fP +Delete old keys that are in state \(aqremoved\(aq. This function also applies to +non\-offline KSK keys. +.TP +\fBgenerate\-ksr\fP [\fItimestamp\-from\fP] \fItimestamp\-to\fP +Print to stdout KeySigningRequest based on pre\-generated ZSKs for specified time period. +If \fItimestamp\-from\fP is omitted, timestamp of the last offline records set is used +or now if no records available. +.TP +\fBsign\-ksr\fP \fIksr_file\fP +Read KeySigningRequest from a text file, sign it using local keyset and print SignedKeyResponse to stdout. +.TP +\fBvalidate\-skr\fP \fIskr_file\fP +Read SignedKeyResponse from a text file and validate the RRSIGs in it if not corrupt. +.TP +\fBimport\-skr\fP \fIskr_file\fP +Read SignedKeyResponse from a text file and import the signatures for later use in zone. If some +signatures have already been imported, they will be deleted for the period from beginning of the SKR +to infinity. +.UNINDENT +.SS Generate arguments +.sp +Arguments are separated by space, each of them is in format \(aqname=value\(aq. +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fBalgorithm\fP +Either an algorithm number (e.g. 14), or text name without dashes (e.g. ECDSAP384SHA384). +.TP +\fBsize\fP +Key length in bits. +.TP +\fBksk\fP +If set to \fByes\fP, the key will be used for signing DNSKEY rrset. The generated key will also +have the Secure Entry Point flag set to 1. +.TP +\fBzsk\fP +If set to \fByes\fP, the key will be used for signing zone (except DNSKEY rrset). This flag can +be set concurrently with the \fBksk\fP flag. +.TP +\fBsep\fP +Overrides the standard setting of the Secure Entry Point flag. +.UNINDENT +.sp +The following arguments are timestamps of key lifetime (see DNSSEC Key states): +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fBpre_active\fP +Key started to be used for signing, not published (only for algorithm rollover). +.TP +\fBpublish\fP +Key published. +.TP +\fBready\fP +Key is waiting for submission (only for KSK). +.TP +\fBactive\fP +Key used for signing. +.TP +\fBretire_active\fP +Key still used for signing, but another key is active (only for KSK or algorithm rollover). +.TP +\fBretire\fP +Key still published, but no longer used for signing. +.TP +\fBpost_active\fP +Key no longer published, but still used for signing (only for algorithm rollover). +.TP +\fBrevoke\fP +Key revoked according to \fI\%RFC 5011\fP trust anchor roll\-over. +.TP +\fBremove\fP +Key deleted. +.UNINDENT +.SS Timestamps +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +0 +Zero timestamp means infinite future. +.TP +\fIUNIX_time\fP +Positive number of seconds since 1970 UTC. +.TP +\fIYYYYMMDDHHMMSS\fP +Date and time in this format without any punctuation. +.TP +\fIrelative_timestamp\fP +A sign character (\fB+\fP, \fB\-\fP), a number, and an optional time unit +(\fBy\fP, \fBmo\fP, \fBd\fP, \fBh\fP, \fBmi\fP, \fBs\fP). The default unit is one second. +E.g. +1mi, \-2mo. +.UNINDENT +.SS Output timestamp formats +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +(none) +The timestamps are printed as UNIX timestamp. +.TP +\fBhuman\fP +The timestamps are printed relatively to now using time units (e.g. \-2y5mo, +1h13s). +.TP +\fBiso\fP +The timestamps are printed in the ISO8601 format (e.g. 2016\-12\-31T23:59:00). +.UNINDENT +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP 1. 3 +Generate new TSIG key: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ keymgr \-t my_name hmac\-sha384 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 2. 3 +Generate new DNSSEC key: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ keymgr example.com. generate algorithm=ECDSAP256SHA256 size=256 \e + ksk=true created=1488034625 publish=20170223205611 retire=+10mo remove=+1y +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 3. 3 +Import a DNSSEC key from BIND: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ keymgr example.com. import\-bind ~/bind/Kharbinge4d5.+007+63089.key +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 4. 3 +Configure key timing: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ keymgr example.com. set 4208 active=+2mi retire=+4mi remove=+5mi +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 5. 3 +Share a KSK from another zone: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ keymgr example.com. share e687cf927029e9db7184d2ece6d663f5d1e5b0e9 another\-zone.com. +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fI\%RFC 6781\fP \- DNSSEC Operational Practices. +\fI\%RFC 7583\fP \- DNSSEC Key Rollover Timing Considerations. +.sp +\fBknot.conf(5)\fP, +\fBknotc(8)\fP, +\fBknotd(8)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/khost.1in b/doc/man/khost.1in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0f0e7c --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/khost.1in @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KHOST" "1" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +khost \- Simple DNS lookup utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkhost\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIname\fP [\fIserver\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +This utility sends a DNS query for the \fIname\fP to the \fIserver\fP and prints a reply +in more user\-readable form. For more advanced DNS queries use kdig +instead. +.SS Parameters +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fIname\fP +Is a domain name that is to be looked up. If the \fIname\fP is IPv4 or IPv6 +address the PTR query type is used. +.TP +\fIserver\fP +Is a name or an address of the nameserver to send a query to. The address +can be specified using [address]:port notation. If no server is specified, +the servers from \fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP are used. +.UNINDENT +.sp +If no arguments are provided, \fBkhost\fP prints a short help. +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-4\fP +Use the IPv4 protocol only. +.TP +\fB\-6\fP +Use the IPv6 protocol only. +.TP +\fB\-a\fP +Send ANY query with verbose mode. +.TP +\fB\-d\fP +Enable debug messages. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-r\fP +Disable recursion. +.TP +\fB\-T\fP +Use the TCP protocol. +.TP +\fB\-v\fP +Enable verbose output. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.TP +\fB\-w\fP +Wait forever for the reply. +.TP +\fB\-c\fP \fIclass\fP +Set the query class (e.g. CH, CLASS4). The default class is IN. +.TP +\fB\-t\fP \fItype\fP +Set the query type (e.g. NS, IXFR=12345, TYPE65535). The default is to send 3 +queries (A, AAAA and MX). +.TP +\fB\-R\fP \fIretries\fP +The number (>=0) of UDP retries to query a nameserver. The default is 1. +.TP +\fB\-W\fP \fIwait\fP +The time to wait for a reply in seconds. This timeout applies to each query +try. The default is 2 seconds. +.UNINDENT +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP 1. 3 +Get the A, AAAA and MX records for example.com: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ khost example.com +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 2. 3 +Get the reverse record for address 192.0.2.1: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ khost 192.0.2.1 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.IP 3. 3 +Perform a verbose zone transfer for zone example.com: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ khost \-t AXFR \-v example.com +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH FILES +.sp +\fB/etc/resolv.conf\fP +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBkdig(1)\fP, \fBknsupdate(1)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/kjournalprint.8in b/doc/man/kjournalprint.8in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2ff78e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/kjournalprint.8in @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KJOURNALPRINT" "8" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +kjournalprint \- Knot DNS journal print utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkjournalprint\fP [\fIconfig_option\fP \fIconfig_argument\fP] [\fIoption\fP\&...] \fIzone_name\fP +.sp +\fBkjournalprint\fP [\fIconfig_option\fP \fIconfig_argument\fP] \fB\-z\fP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +The program prints zone history stored in a journal database. As default, +changes are colored for terminal. +.SS Config options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-config\fP \fIfile\fP +Use a textual configuration file (default is \fB@config_dir@/knot.conf\fP). +.TP +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-confdb\fP \fIdirectory\fP +Use a binary configuration database directory (default is \fB@storage_dir@/confdb\fP). +The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default +configuration file. +.TP +\fB\-D\fP, \fB\-\-dir\fP \fIpath\fP +Use specified journal database path and default configuration. +.UNINDENT +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-z\fP, \fB\-\-zone\-list\fP +Instead of reading the journal, display the list of zones in the DB. +.TP +\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-limit\fP \fIlimit\fP +Limits the number of displayed changes. +.TP +\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-serial\fP \fIsoa\fP +Start at a specific SOA serial. +.TP +\fB\-H\fP, \fB\-\-check\fP +Enable additional journal semantic checks during printing. +.TP +\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-debug\fP +Debug mode brief output. +.TP +\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-mono\fP +Don\(aqt generate colorized output. +.TP +\fB\-n\fP, \fB\-\-no\-color\fP +An alias for \fB\-x\fP\&. Use of this option is deprecated, it will be removed in the future. +.TP +\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP +Force colorized output. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.SS Parameters +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fIzone_name\fP +A name of the zone to print the history for. +.UNINDENT +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.sp +Last (most recent) 5 changes without colors: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ kjournalprint \-nl 5 /var/lib/knot/journal example.com. +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBknotd(8)\fP, \fBknot.conf(5)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/knot.conf.5in b/doc/man/knot.conf.5in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ed939d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/knot.conf.5in @@ -0,0 +1,2499 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KNOT.CONF" "5" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +knot.conf \- Knot DNS configuration file +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +Configuration files for Knot DNS use simplified YAML format. Simplified means +that not all of the features are supported. +.sp +For the description of configuration items, we have to declare a meaning of +the following symbols: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBINT\fP – Integer +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBSTR\fP – Textual string +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBHEXSTR\fP – Hexadecimal string (with \fB0x\fP prefix) +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBBOOL\fP – Boolean value (\fBon\fP/\fBoff\fP or \fBtrue\fP/\fBfalse\fP) +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBTIME\fP – Number of seconds, an integer with possible time multiplier suffix +(\fBs\fP ~ 1, \fBm\fP ~ 60, \fBh\fP ~ 3600 or \fBd\fP ~ 24 * 3600) +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBSIZE\fP – Number of bytes, an integer with possible size multiplier suffix +(\fBB\fP ~ 1, \fBK\fP ~ 1024, \fBM\fP ~ 1024^2 or \fBG\fP ~ 1024^3) +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBBASE64\fP – Base64 encoded string +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBADDR\fP – IPv4 or IPv6 address +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBDNAME\fP – Domain name +.IP \(bu 2 +\fB\&...\fP – Multi\-valued item, order of the values is preserved +.IP \(bu 2 +\fB[\fP \fB]\fP – Optional value +.IP \(bu 2 +\fB|\fP – Choice +.UNINDENT +.sp +The configuration consists of several fixed sections and optional module +sections. There are 16 fixed sections (\fBmodule\fP, \fBserver\fP, \fBxdp\fP, \fBcontrol\fP, +\fBlog\fP, \fBstatistics\fP, \fBdatabase\fP, \fBkeystore\fP, \fBkey\fP, \fBremote\fP, +\fBremotes\fP, \fBacl\fP, \fBsubmission\fP, \fBpolicy\fP, \fBtemplate\fP, \fBzone\fP). +Module sections are prefixed with the \fBmod\-\fP prefix (e.g. \fBmod\-stats\fP). +.sp +Most of the sections (e.g. \fBzone\fP) are sequences of settings blocks. Each +settings block begins with a unique identifier, which can be used as a reference +from other sections (such an identifier must be defined in advance). +.sp +A multi\-valued item can be specified either as a YAML sequence: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +address: [10.0.0.1, 10.0.0.2] +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +or as more single\-valued items each on an extra line: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +address: 10.0.0.1 +address: 10.0.0.2 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +If an item value contains spaces or other special characters, it is necessary +to enclose such a value within double quotes \fB"\fP \fB"\fP\&. +.SH COMMENTS +.sp +A comment begins with a \fB#\fP character and is ignored during processing. +Also each configuration section or sequence block allows a permanent +comment using the \fBcomment\fP item which is stored in the server beside the +configuration. +.SH INCLUDING CONFIGURATION +.sp +Another configuration file or files, matching a pattern, can be included at +the top level in the current file. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +include: STR +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS include +.sp +A path or a matching pattern specifying one or more files that are included +at the place of the include option position in the configuration. +If the path is not absolute, then it is considered to be relative to the +current file. The pattern can be an arbitrary string meeting POSIX \fIglob\fP +requirements, e.g. dir/*.conf. Matching files are processed in sorted order. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH MODULE SECTION +.sp +Dynamic modules loading configuration. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If configured with non\-empty \fB\(ga\-\-with\-moduledir=path\(ga\fP parameter, all +shared modules in this directory will be automatically loaded. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +module: + \- id: STR + file: STR +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A module identifier in the form of the \fBmod\-\fP prefix and module name suffix. +.SS file +.sp +A path to a shared library file with the module implementation. +.sp +\fBWARNING:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If the path is not absolute, the library is searched in the set of +system directories. See \fBman dlopen\fP for more details. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB${libdir}/knot/modules\-${version}\fP/module_name.so +(or \fB${path}\fP/module_name.so if configured with \fB\-\-with\-moduledir=path\fP) +.SH SERVER SECTION +.sp +General options related to the server. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +server: + identity: [STR] + version: [STR] + nsid: [STR|HEXSTR] + rundir: STR + user: STR[:STR] + pidfile: STR + udp\-workers: INT + tcp\-workers: INT + background\-workers: INT + async\-start: BOOL + tcp\-idle\-timeout: TIME + tcp\-io\-timeout: INT + tcp\-remote\-io\-timeout: INT + tcp\-max\-clients: INT + tcp\-reuseport: BOOL + tcp\-fastopen: BOOL + quic\-max\-clients: INT + quic\-outbuf\-max\-size: SIZE + quic\-idle\-close\-timeout: TIME + remote\-pool\-limit: INT + remote\-pool\-timeout: TIME + remote\-retry\-delay: TIME + socket\-affinity: BOOL + udp\-max\-payload: SIZE + udp\-max\-payload\-ipv4: SIZE + udp\-max\-payload\-ipv6: SIZE + key\-file: STR + cert\-file: STR + edns\-client\-subnet: BOOL + answer\-rotation: BOOL + automatic\-acl: BOOL + proxy\-allowlist: ADDR[/INT] | ADDR\-ADDR ... + dbus\-event: none | running | zone\-updated | ksk\-submission | dnssec\-invalid ... + dbus\-init\-delay: TIME + listen: ADDR[@INT] ... +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBCAUTION:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +When you change configuration parameters dynamically or via configuration file +reload, some parameters in the Server section require restarting the Knot server +so that the changes take effect. See below for the details. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS identity +.sp +An identity of the server returned in the response to the query for TXT +record \fBid.server.\fP or \fBhostname.bind.\fP in the CHAOS class (\fI\%RFC 4892\fP). +Set to an empty value to disable. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP FQDN hostname +.SS version +.sp +A version of the server software returned in the response to the query +for TXT record \fBversion.server.\fP or \fBversion.bind.\fP in the CHAOS +class (\fI\%RFC 4892\fP). Set to an empty value to disable. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP server version +.SS nsid +.sp +A DNS name server identifier (\fI\%RFC 5001\fP). Set to an empty value to disable. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP FQDN hostname at the moment of the daemon start +.SS rundir +.sp +A path for storing run\-time data (PID file, unix sockets, etc.). +.sp +Depending on the usage of this parameter, its change may require restart of the Knot +server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB${localstatedir}/run/knot\fP (configured with \fB\-\-with\-rundir=path\fP) +.SS user +.sp +A system user with an optional system group (\fBuser:group\fP) under which the +server is run after starting and binding to interfaces. Linux capabilities +are employed if supported. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBroot:root\fP +.SS pidfile +.sp +A PID file location. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%rundir\fP\fB/knot.pid\fP +.SS udp\-workers +.sp +A number of UDP workers (threads) used to process incoming queries +over UDP. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP equal to the number of online CPUs +.SS tcp\-workers +.sp +A number of TCP workers (threads) used to process incoming queries +over TCP. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP equal to the number of online CPUs, default value is at least 10 +.SS background\-workers +.sp +A number of workers (threads) used to execute background operations (zone +loading, zone updates, etc.). +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP equal to the number of online CPUs, default value is at most 10 +.SS async\-start +.sp +If enabled, server doesn\(aqt wait for the zones to be loaded and starts +responding immediately with SERVFAIL answers until the zone loads. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS tcp\-idle\-timeout +.sp +Maximum idle time (in seconds) between requests on an inbound TCP connection. +It means if there is no activity on an inbound TCP connection during this limit, +the connection is closed by the server. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB10\fP +.SS tcp\-io\-timeout +.sp +Maximum time (in milliseconds) to receive or send one DNS message over an inbound +TCP connection. It means this limit applies to normal DNS queries and replies, +incoming DDNS, and \fBoutgoing zone transfers\fP\&. The timeout is measured since some +data is already available for processing. +Set to 0 for infinity. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB500\fP (milliseconds) +.sp +\fBCAUTION:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +In order to reduce the risk of Slow Loris attacks, it\(aqs recommended setting +this limit as low as possible on public servers. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS tcp\-remote\-io\-timeout +.sp +Maximum time (in milliseconds) to receive or send one DNS message over an outbound +TCP connection which has already been established to a configured remote server. +It means this limit applies to incoming zone transfers, sending NOTIFY, +DDNS forwarding, and DS check or push. This timeout includes the time needed +for a network round\-trip and for a query processing by the remote. +Set to 0 for infinity. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB5000\fP (milliseconds) +.SS tcp\-reuseport +.sp +If enabled, each TCP worker listens on its own socket and the OS kernel +socket load balancing is employed using SO_REUSEPORT (or SO_REUSEPORT_LB +on FreeBSD). Due to the lack of one shared socket, the server can offer +higher response rate processing over TCP. However, in the case of +time\-consuming requests (e.g. zone transfers of a TLD zone), enabled reuseport +may result in delayed or not being responded client requests. So it is +advisable to use this option on secondary servers. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS tcp\-fastopen +.sp +If enabled, use TCP Fast Open for outbound TCP communication (client side): +incoming zone transfers, sending NOTIFY, and DDNS forwarding. This mode simplifies +TCP handshake and can result in better networking performance. TCP Fast Open +for inbound TCP communication (server side) isn\(aqt affected by this +configuration as it\(aqs enabled automatically if supported by OS. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +The TCP Fast Open support must also be enabled on the OS level: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +Linux/macOS: ensure kernel parameter \fBnet.ipv4.tcp_fastopen\fP is \fB2\fP or +\fB3\fP for server side, and \fB1\fP or \fB3\fP for client side. +.IP \(bu 2 +FreeBSD: ensure kernel parameter \fBnet.inet.tcp.fastopen.server_enable\fP +is \fB1\fP for server side, and \fBnet.inet.tcp.fastopen.client_enable\fP is +\fB1\fP for client side. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS quic\-max\-clients +.sp +A maximum number of QUIC clients connected in parallel. +.sp +See also \fI\%quic\fP\&. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB128\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB10000\fP (ten thousand) +.SS quic\-outbuf\-max\-size +.sp +Maximum cumulative size of memory used for buffers of unACKed +sent messages. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Set low if little memory is available (together with \fI\%quic\-max\-clients\fP +since QUIC connections are memory\-heavy). Set to high value if outgoing zone +transfers of big zone over QUIC are expected. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1M\fP (1 MiB) +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB100M\fP (100 MiB) +.SS quic\-idle\-close\-timeout +.sp +Time in seconds, after which any idle QUIC connection is gracefully closed. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB4\fP +.SS remote\-pool\-limit +.sp +If nonzero, the server will keep up to this number of outgoing TCP connections +open for later use. This is an optimization to avoid frequent opening of +TCP connections to the same remote. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP +.SS remote\-pool\-timeout +.sp +The timeout in seconds after which the unused kept\-open outgoing TCP connections +to remote servers are closed. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB5\fP +.SS remote\-retry\-delay +.sp +When a connection attempt times out to some remote address, this information will be +kept for this specified time (in milliseconds) and other connections to the same address won\(aqt +be attempted. This prevents repetitive waiting for timeout on an unreachable remote. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP +.SS socket\-affinity +.sp +If enabled and if SO_REUSEPORT is available on Linux, all configured network +sockets are bound to UDP and TCP workers in order to increase the networking performance. +This mode isn\(aqt recommended for setups where the number of network card queues +is lower than the number of UDP or TCP workers. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS tcp\-max\-clients +.sp +A maximum number of TCP clients connected in parallel, set this below the file +descriptor limit to avoid resource exhaustion. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +It is advisable to adjust the maximum number of open files per process in your +operating system configuration. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP one half of the file descriptor limit for the server process +.SS udp\-max\-payload +.sp +Maximum EDNS0 UDP payload size default for both IPv4 and IPv6. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1232\fP +.SS udp\-max\-payload\-ipv4 +.sp +Maximum EDNS0 UDP payload size for IPv4. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1232\fP +.SS udp\-max\-payload\-ipv6 +.sp +Maximum EDNS0 UDP payload size for IPv6. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1232\fP +.SS key\-file +.sp +Path to a server key PEM file which is used for DNS over QUIC communication. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP one\-time in\-memory key +.SS cert\-file +.sp +Path to a server certificate PEM file which is used for DNS over QUIC communication. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP one\-time in\-memory certificate +.SS edns\-client\-subnet +.sp +Enable or disable EDNS Client Subnet support. If enabled, responses to queries +containing the EDNS Client Subnet option +always contain a valid EDNS Client Subnet option according to \fI\%RFC 7871\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS answer\-rotation +.sp +Enable or disable sorted\-rrset rotation in the answer section of normal replies. +The rotation shift is simply determined by a query ID. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS automatic\-acl +.sp +If enabled, \fI\%automatic ACL\fP setting of +configured remotes is considered when evaluating authorized operations. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS proxy\-allowlist +.sp +An ordered list of IP addresses, network subnets, or network ranges +which are allowed as a source address of proxied DNS traffic over UDP. +The supported proxy protocol is +\fI\%haproxy PROXY v2\fP\&. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +TCP is not supported. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS dbus\-event +.sp +Specification of server or zone states which emit a D\-Bus signal on the system +bus. The bus name is \fBcz.nic.knotd\fP, the object path is \fB/cz/nic/knotd\fP, and +the interface name is \fBcz.nic.knotd.events\fP\&. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnone\fP – No signal is emitted. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBrunning\fP – The signal \fBstarted\fP is emitted when the server is fully operational +and the signal \fBstopped\fP is emitted at the beginning of the server shutdown. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBzone\-updated\fP – The signal \fBzone_updated\fP is emitted when a zone has been updated; +the signal parameters are \fIzone name\fP and \fIzone SOA serial\fP\&. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBksk\-submission\fP – The signal \fBzone_ksk_submission\fP is emitted if there is +a ready KSK present when the zone is signed; the signal parameters are +\fIzone name\fP, \fIKSK keytag\fP, and \fIKSK KASP id\fP\&. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBdnssec\-invalid\fP – The signal \fBzone_dnssec_invalid\fP is emitted when DNSSEC +validation fails; the signal parameter is \fIzone name\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This function requires systemd version at least 221. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBnone\fP +.SS dbus\-init\-delay +.sp +Time in seconds which the server waits upon D\-Bus initialization to ensure +the D\-Bus client is ready to receive signals. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB0\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1\fP +.SS listen +.sp +One or more IP addresses where the server listens for incoming queries. +Optional port specification (default is 53) can be appended to each address +using \fB@\fP separator. Use \fB0.0.0.0\fP for all configured IPv4 addresses or +\fB::\fP for all configured IPv6 addresses. Filesystem path can be specified +for listening on local unix SOCK_STREAM socket. Non\-local address binding +is automatically enabled if supported by the operating system. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH XDP SECTION +.sp +Various options related to XDP listening, especially TCP. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +xdp: + listen: STR[@INT] | ADDR[@INT] ... + udp: BOOL + tcp: BOOL + quic: BOOL + quic\-port: INT + quic\-log: BOOL + tcp\-max\-clients: INT + tcp\-inbuf\-max\-size: SIZE + tcp\-outbuf\-max\-size: SIZE + tcp\-idle\-close\-timeout: TIME + tcp\-idle\-reset\-timeout: TIME + tcp\-resend\-timeout: TIME + route\-check: BOOL +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBCAUTION:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +When you change configuration parameters dynamically or via configuration file +reload, some parameters in the XDP section require restarting the Knot server +so that the changes take effect. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS listen +.sp +One or more network device names (e.g. \fBens786f0\fP) on which the Mode XDP +is enabled. Alternatively, an IP address can be used instead of a device name, +but the server will still listen on all addresses belonging to the same interface! +Optional port specification (default is 53) can be appended to each device name +or address using \fB@\fP separator. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fBCAUTION:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If XDP workers only process regular DNS traffic over UDP, it is strongly +recommended to also \fI\%listen\fP on the addresses which are +intended to offer the DNS service, at least to fulfil the DNS requirement for +working TCP. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS udp +.sp +If enabled, DNS over UDP is processed with XDP workers. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBon\fP +.SS tcp +.sp +If enabled, DNS over TCP traffic is processed with XDP workers. +.sp +The TCP stack limitations: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +Congestion control is not implemented. +.IP \(bu 2 +Lost packets that do not contain TCP payload may not be resend. +.IP \(bu 2 +Not optimized for transfers of non\-trivial zones. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS quic +.sp +If enabled, DNS over QUIC is processed with XDP workers. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS quic\-port +.sp +DNS over QUIC will listen on the interfaces configured by \fI\%listen\fP, +but on different port, configured by this option. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB853\fP +.SS quic\-log +.sp +Triggers extensive logging of all QUIC protocol internals for every connection. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS tcp\-max\-clients +.sp +A maximum number of TCP clients connected in parallel. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1024\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1000000\fP (one million) +.SS tcp\-inbuf\-max\-size +.sp +Maximum cumulative size of memory used for buffers of incompletely +received messages. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1M\fP (1 MiB) +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB100M\fP (100 MiB) +.SS tcp\-outbuf\-max\-size +.sp +Maximum cumulative size of memory used for buffers of unACKed +sent messages. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1M\fP (1 MiB) +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB100M\fP (100 MiB) +.SS tcp\-idle\-close\-timeout +.sp +Time in seconds, after which any idle connection is gracefully closed. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB10\fP +.SS tcp\-idle\-reset\-timeout +.sp +Time in seconds, after which any idle connection is forcibly closed. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB20\fP +.SS tcp\-resend\-timeout +.sp +Resend outgoing data packets (with DNS response payload) if not ACKed +before this timeout. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB5\fP +.SS route\-check +.sp +If enabled, routing information from the operating system is considered +when processing every incoming DNS packet received over the XDP interface: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +If the outgoing interface of the corresponding DNS response differs from +the incoming one, the packet is processed normally by UDP/TCP workers +(XDP isn\(aqt used). +.IP \(bu 2 +If the destination address is blackholed, unreachable, or prohibited, +the DNS packet is dropped without any response. +.IP \(bu 2 +The destination MAC address and possible VLAN tag for the response are taken +from the routing system. +.UNINDENT +.sp +If disabled, symmetrical routing is applied. It means that the query source +MAC address is used as a response destination MAC address. Possible VLAN tag +is preserved. +.sp +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This mode requires forwarding enabled on the loopback interface +(\fBsysctl \-w net.ipv4.conf.lo.forwarding=1\fP and \fBsysctl \-w net.ipv6.conf.lo.forwarding=1\fP). +If forwarding is disabled, all incoming DNS packets are dropped! +.sp +Only VLAN 802.1Q is supported. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SH CONTROL SECTION +.sp +Configuration of the server control interface. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +control: + listen: STR + timeout: TIME +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS listen +.sp +A UNIX socket path where the server listens for control commands. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%rundir\fP\fB/knot.sock\fP +.SS timeout +.sp +Maximum time (in seconds) the control socket operations can take. +Set to 0 for infinity. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB5\fP +.SH LOG SECTION +.sp +Server can be configured to log to the standard output, standard error +output, syslog (or systemd journal if systemd is enabled) or into an arbitrary +file. +.sp +There are 6 logging severity levels: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBcritical\fP – Non\-recoverable error resulting in server shutdown. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBerror\fP – Recoverable error, action should be taken. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBwarning\fP – Warning that might require user action. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnotice\fP – Server notice or hint. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBinfo\fP – Informational message. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBdebug\fP – Debug or detailed message. +.UNINDENT +.sp +In the case of a missing log section, \fBwarning\fP or more serious messages +will be logged to both standard error output and syslog. The \fBinfo\fP and +\fBnotice\fP messages will be logged to standard output. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +log: + \- target: stdout | stderr | syslog | STR + server: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug + control: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug + zone: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug + any: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS target +.sp +A logging output. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBstdout\fP – Standard output. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBstderr\fP – Standard error output. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBsyslog\fP – Syslog or systemd journal. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fIfile_name\fP – A specific file. +.UNINDENT +.sp +With \fBsyslog\fP target, syslog service is used. However, if Knot DNS has been compiled +with systemd support and operating system has been booted with systemd, systemd journal +is used for logging instead of syslog. +.SS server +.sp +Minimum severity level for messages related to general operation of the server to be +logged. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS control +.sp +Minimum severity level for messages related to server control to be logged. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS zone +.sp +Minimum severity level for messages related to zones to be logged. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS any +.sp +Minimum severity level for all message types to be logged. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH STATS SECTION +.sp +Periodic server statistics dumping. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +statistics: + timer: TIME + file: STR + append: BOOL +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS timer +.sp +A period after which all available statistics metrics will by written to the +\fI\%file\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS file +.sp +A file path of statistics output in the YAML format. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%rundir\fP\fB/stats.yaml\fP +.SS append +.sp +If enabled, the output will be appended to the \fI\%file\fP +instead of file replacement. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SH DATABASE SECTION +.sp +Configuration of databases for zone contents, DNSSEC metadata, or event timers. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +database: + storage: STR + journal\-db: STR + journal\-db\-mode: robust | asynchronous + journal\-db\-max\-size: SIZE + kasp\-db: STR + kasp\-db\-max\-size: SIZE + timer\-db: STR + timer\-db\-max\-size: SIZE + catalog\-db: str + catalog\-db\-max\-size: SIZE +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS storage +.sp +A data directory for storing journal, KASP, and timer databases. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB${localstatedir}/lib/knot\fP (configured with \fB\-\-with\-storage=path\fP) +.SS journal\-db +.sp +An explicit specification of the persistent journal database directory. +Non\-absolute path (i.e. not starting with \fB/\fP) is relative to +\fI\%storage\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%storage\fP\fB/journal\fP +.SS journal\-db\-mode +.sp +Specifies journal LMDB backend configuration, which influences performance +and durability. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBrobust\fP – The journal database disk synchronization ensures database +durability but is generally slower. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBasynchronous\fP – The journal database disk synchronization is optimized for +better performance at the expense of lower database durability in the case of +a crash. This mode is recommended on secondary servers with many zones. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBrobust\fP +.SS journal\-db\-max\-size +.sp +The hard limit for the journal database maximum size. There is no cleanup logic +in journal to recover from reaching this limit. Journal simply starts refusing +changes across all zones. Decreasing this value has no effect if it is lower +than the actual database file size. +.sp +It is recommended to limit \fI\%journal\-max\-usage\fP +per\-zone instead of \fI\%journal\-db\-max\-size\fP +in most cases. Please keep this value larger than the sum of all zones\(aq +journal usage limits. See more details regarding +journal behaviour\&. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This value also influences server\(aqs usage of virtual memory. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB20G\fP (20 GiB), or \fB512M\fP (512 MiB) for 32\-bit +.SS kasp\-db +.sp +An explicit specification of the KASP database directory. +Non\-absolute path (i.e. not starting with \fB/\fP) is relative to +\fI\%storage\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%storage\fP\fB/keys\fP +.SS kasp\-db\-max\-size +.sp +The hard limit for the KASP database maximum size. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This value also influences server\(aqs usage of virtual memory. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB500M\fP (500 MiB) +.SS timer\-db +.sp +An explicit specification of the persistent timer database directory. +Non\-absolute path (i.e. not starting with \fB/\fP) is relative to +\fI\%storage\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%storage\fP\fB/timers\fP +.SS timer\-db\-max\-size +.sp +The hard limit for the timer database maximum size. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This value also influences server\(aqs usage of virtual memory. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB100M\fP (100 MiB) +.SS catalog\-db +.sp +An explicit specification of the zone catalog database directory. +Only useful if catalog\-zones are enabled. +Non\-absolute path (i.e. not starting with \fB/\fP) is relative to +\fI\%storage\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%storage\fP\fB/catalog\fP +.SS catalog\-db\-max\-size +.sp +The hard limit for the catalog database maximum size. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This value also influences server\(aqs usage of virtual memory. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB20G\fP (20 GiB), or \fB512M\fP (512 MiB) for 32\-bit +.SH KEYSTORE SECTION +.sp +DNSSEC keystore configuration. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +keystore: + \- id: STR + backend: pem | pkcs11 + config: STR + key\-label: BOOL +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A keystore identifier. +.SS backend +.sp +A key storage backend type. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBpem\fP – PEM files. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBpkcs11\fP – PKCS #11 storage. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBpem\fP +.SS config +.sp +A backend specific configuration. A directory with PEM files (the path can +be specified as a relative path to \fI\%kasp\-db\fP) or +a configuration string for PKCS #11 storage (\fI<pkcs11\-url> <module\-path>\fP). +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Example configuration string for PKCS #11: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +"pkcs11:token=knot;pin\-value=1234 /usr/lib64/pkcs11/libsofthsm2.so" +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%kasp\-db\fP\fB/keys\fP +.SS key\-label +.sp +If enabled in combination with the PKCS #11 \fI\%backend\fP, generated keys +are labeled in the form \fB<zone_name> KSK|ZSK\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SH KEY SECTION +.sp +Shared TSIG keys used to authenticate communication with the server. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +key: + \- id: DNAME + algorithm: hmac\-md5 | hmac\-sha1 | hmac\-sha224 | hmac\-sha256 | hmac\-sha384 | hmac\-sha512 + secret: BASE64 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A key name identifier. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This value MUST be exactly the same as the name of the TSIG key on the +opposite primary/secondary server(s). +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS algorithm +.sp +A TSIG key algorithm. See +\fI\%TSIG Algorithm Numbers\fP\&. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBhmac\-md5\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBhmac\-sha1\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBhmac\-sha224\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBhmac\-sha256\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBhmac\-sha384\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBhmac\-sha512\fP +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS secret +.sp +Shared key secret. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH REMOTE SECTION +.sp +Definitions of remote servers for outgoing connections (source of a zone +transfer, target for a notification, etc.). +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +remote: + \- id: STR + address: ADDR[@INT] ... + via: ADDR[@INT] ... + key: key_id + block\-notify\-after\-transfer: BOOL + no\-edns: BOOL + automatic\-acl: BOOL +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A remote identifier. +.SS address +.sp +An ordered list of destination IP addresses which are used for communication +with the remote server. The addresses are tried in sequence until the +remote is reached. Optional destination port (default is 53) +can be appended to the address using \fB@\fP separator. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If the remote is contacted and it refuses to perform requested action, +no more addresses will be tried for this remote. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS via +.sp +An ordered list of source IP addresses. The first address with the same family +as the destination address is used as a source address for communication with +the remote. This option can help if the server listens on more addresses. +Optional source port (default is random) can be appended +to the address using \fB@\fP separator. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS key +.sp +A \fI\%reference\fP to the TSIG key which is used to authenticate +the communication with the remote server. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS block\-notify\-after\-transfer +.sp +When incoming AXFR/IXFR from this remote (as a primary server), suppress +sending NOTIFY messages to all configured secondary servers. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS no\-edns +.sp +If enabled, no OPT record (EDNS) is inserted to outgoing requests to this +remote server. This mode is necessary for communication with some broken +implementations (e.g. Windows Server 2016). +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This option effectively disables zone expire timer +updates via EDNS EXPIRE option specified in \fI\%RFC 7314\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS automatic\-acl +.sp +If enabled, some authorized operations for the remote are automatically allowed +based on the context: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +Incoming NOTIFY is allowed from the remote if it\(aqs configured as a +\fI\%primary server\fP for the zone. +.IP \(bu 2 +Outgoing zone transfer is allowed to the remote if it\(aqs configured as a +\fI\%NOTIFY target\fP for the zone. +.UNINDENT +.sp +Automatic ACL rules are evaluated before explicit \fI\%zone ACL\fP configuration. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This functionality requires global activation via +\fI\%automatic\-acl\fP in the server section. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBon\fP +.SH REMOTES SECTION +.sp +Definitions of groups of remote servers. Remote grouping can simplify the +configuration. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +remotes: + \- id: STR + remote: remote_id ... +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A remote group identifier. +.SS remote +.sp +An ordered list of \fI\%references\fP to remote server definitions. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH ACL SECTION +.sp +Access control list rule definitions. An ACL rule is a description of one +or more authorized operations (zone transfer request, zone change notification, +and dynamic DNS update) which are allowed to be processed or denied. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +acl: + \- id: STR + address: ADDR[/INT] | ADDR\-ADDR ... + key: key_id ... + remote: remote_id | remotes_id ... + action: query | notify | transfer | update ... + deny: BOOL + update\-type: STR ... + update\-owner: key | zone | name + update\-owner\-match: sub\-or\-equal | equal | sub + update\-owner\-name: STR ... +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +An ACL rule identifier. +.SS address +.sp +An ordered list of IP addresses, network subnets, or network ranges. The query\(aqs +source address must match one of them. If this item is not set, address match is not +required. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS key +.sp +An ordered list of \fI\%reference\fPs to TSIG keys. The query must +match one of them. If this item is not set, transaction authentication is not used. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS remote +.sp +An ordered list of references \fI\%remote\fP and +\fI\%remotes\fP\&. The query must +match one of the remotes. Specifically, one of the remote\(aqs addresses and remote\(aqs +TSIG key if configured must match. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This option cannot be specified along with the \fI\%address\fP or +\fI\%key\fP option at one ACL item. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS action +.sp +An ordered list of allowed (or denied) actions. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBquery\fP – Allow regular DNS query. As normal queries are always allowed, +this action is only useful in combination with \fI\%TSIG key\fP\&. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnotify\fP – Allow incoming notify (NOTIFY). +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBtransfer\fP – Allow zone transfer (AXFR, IXFR). +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBupdate\fP – Allow zone updates (DDNS). +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBquery\fP +.SS deny +.sp +If enabled, instead of allowing, deny the specified \fI\%action\fP, +\fI\%address\fP, \fI\%key\fP, or combination if these +items. If no action is specified, deny all actions. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS update\-type +.sp +A list of allowed types of Resource Records in a zone update. Every record in an update +must match one of the specified types. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS update\-owner +.sp +This option restricts possible owners of Resource Records in a zone update by comparing +them to either the \fI\%TSIG key\fP identity, the current zone name, or to a list of +domain names given by the \fI\%update\-owner\-name\fP option. +The comparison method is given by the \fI\%update\-owner\-match\fP option. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBkey\fP — The owner of each updated RR must match the identity of the TSIG key if used. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBname\fP — The owner of each updated RR must match at least one name in the +\fI\%update\-owner\-name\fP list. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBzone\fP — The owner of each updated RR must match the current zone name. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS update\-owner\-match +.sp +This option defines how the owners of Resource Records in an update are matched to the domain name(s) +set by the \fI\%update\-owner\fP option. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBsub\-or\-equal\fP — The owner of each RR in an update must either be equal to +or be a subdomain of at least one domain name set by \fI\%update\-owner\fP\&. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBequal\fP — The owner of each updated RR must be equal to at least one domain +name set by \fI\%update\-owner\fP\&. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBsub\fP — The owner of each updated RR must be a subdomain of, but MUST NOT +be equal to at least one domain name set by \fI\%update\-owner\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBsub\-or\-equal\fP +.SS update\-owner\-name +.sp +A list of allowed owners of RRs in a zone update used with \fI\%update\-owner\fP +set to \fBname\fP\&. Every listed owner name which is not FQDN (i.e. it doesn\(aqt end +in a dot) is considered as if it was appended with the target zone name. +Such a relative owner name specification allows better ACL rule reusability across +multiple zones. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH SUBMISSION SECTION +.sp +Parameters of KSK submission checks. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +submission: + \- id: STR + parent: remote_id | remotes_id ... + check\-interval: TIME + timeout: TIME + parent\-delay: TIME +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A submission identifier. +.SS parent +.sp +A list of references \fI\%remote\fP and \fI\%remotes\fP +to parent\(aqs DNS servers to be checked for +presence of corresponding DS records in the case of KSK submission. All of them must +have a corresponding DS for the rollover to continue. If none is specified, the +rollover must be pushed forward manually. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.sp +\fBTIP:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +A DNSSEC\-validating resolver can be set as a parent. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS check\-interval +.sp +Interval for periodic checks of DS presence on parent\(aqs DNS servers, in the +case of the KSK submission. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1h\fP (1 hour) +.SS timeout +.sp +After this time period (in seconds) the KSK submission is automatically considered +successful, even if all the checks were negative or no parents are configured. +Set to 0 for infinity. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP +.SS parent\-delay +.sp +After successful parent DS check, wait for this period before continuing the next +key roll\-over step. This delay shall cover the propagation delay of update in the +parent zone. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP +.SH POLICY SECTION +.sp +DNSSEC policy configuration. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +policy: + \- id: STR + keystore: keystore_id + manual: BOOL + single\-type\-signing: BOOL + algorithm: rsasha1 | rsasha1\-nsec3\-sha1 | rsasha256 | rsasha512 | ecdsap256sha256 | ecdsap384sha384 | ed25519 | ed448 + ksk\-size: SIZE + zsk\-size: SIZE + ksk\-shared: BOOL + dnskey\-ttl: TIME + zone\-max\-ttl: TIME + ksk\-lifetime: TIME + zsk\-lifetime: TIME + delete\-delay: TIME + propagation\-delay: TIME + rrsig\-lifetime: TIME + rrsig\-refresh: TIME + rrsig\-pre\-refresh: TIME + reproducible\-signing: BOOL + nsec3: BOOL + nsec3\-iterations: INT + nsec3\-opt\-out: BOOL + nsec3\-salt\-length: INT + nsec3\-salt\-lifetime: TIME + signing\-threads: INT + ksk\-submission: submission_id + ds\-push: remote_id | remotes_id ... + cds\-cdnskey\-publish: none | delete\-dnssec | rollover | always | double\-ds + cds\-digest\-type: sha256 | sha384 + dnskey\-management: full | incremental + offline\-ksk: BOOL + unsafe\-operation: none | no\-check\-keyset | no\-update\-dnskey | no\-update\-nsec | no\-update\-expired ... +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A policy identifier. +.SS keystore +.sp +A \fI\%reference\fP to a keystore holding private key material +for zones. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP an imaginary keystore with all default values +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +A configured keystore called "default" won\(aqt be used unless explicitly referenced. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS manual +.sp +If enabled, automatic key management is not used. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS single\-type\-signing +.sp +If enabled, Single\-Type Signing Scheme is used in the automatic key management +mode. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP (module onlinesign has default \fBon\fP) +.SS algorithm +.sp +An algorithm of signing keys and issued signatures. See +\fI\%DNSSEC Algorithm Numbers\fP\&. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBrsasha1\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBrsasha1\-nsec3\-sha1\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBrsasha256\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBrsasha512\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBecdsap256sha256\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBecdsap384sha384\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBed25519\fP +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBed448\fP +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Ed25519 algorithm is only available if compiled with GnuTLS 3.6.0+. +.sp +Ed448 algorithm is only available if compiled with GnuTLS 3.6.12+ and Nettle 3.6+. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBecdsap256sha256\fP +.SS ksk\-size +.sp +A length of newly generated KSK or +CSK keys. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB2048\fP (rsa*), \fB256\fP (ecdsap256), \fB384\fP (ecdsap384), \fB256\fP (ed25519), +\fB456\fP (ed448) +.SS zsk\-size +.sp +A length of newly generated ZSK keys. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP see default for \fI\%ksk\-size\fP +.SS ksk\-shared +.sp +If enabled, all zones with this policy assigned will share one or more KSKs. +More KSKs can be shared during a KSK rollover. +.sp +\fBWARNING:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +As the shared KSK set is bound to the policy \fI\%id\fP, renaming the +policy breaks this connection and new shared KSK set is initiated when +a new KSK is needed. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS dnskey\-ttl +.sp +A TTL value for DNSKEY records added into zone apex. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Has influence over ZSK key lifetime. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBWARNING:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Ensure all DNSKEYs with updated TTL are propagated before any subsequent +DNSKEY rollover starts. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP zone SOA TTL +.SS zone\-max\-ttl +.sp +Declare (override) maximal TTL value among all the records in zone. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +It\(aqs generally recommended to override the maximal TTL computation by setting this +explicitly whenever possible. It\(aqs required for DNSSEC Offline KSK and +really reasonable when records are generated dynamically +(e.g. by a module). +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP computed after zone is loaded +.SS ksk\-lifetime +.sp +A period between KSK activation and the next rollover initiation. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +KSK key lifetime is also influenced by propagation\-delay, dnskey\-ttl, +and KSK submission delay. +.sp +Zero (aka infinity) value causes no KSK rollover as a result. +.sp +This applies for CSK lifetime if single\-type\-signing is enabled. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP +.SS zsk\-lifetime +.sp +A period between ZSK activation and the next rollover initiation. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +More exactly, this period is measured since a ZSK is activated, +and after this, a new ZSK is generated to replace it within +following roll\-over. +.sp +ZSK key lifetime is also influenced by propagation\-delay and dnskey\-ttl +.sp +Zero (aka infinity) value causes no ZSK rollover as a result. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB30d\fP (30 days) +.SS delete\-delay +.sp +Once a key (KSK or ZSK) is rolled\-over and removed from the zone, +keep it in the KASP database for at least this period before deleting it completely. +This might be useful in some troubleshooting cases when resurrection +is needed. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP +.SS propagation\-delay +.sp +An extra delay added for each key rollover step. This value should be high +enough to cover propagation of data from the primary server to all +secondary servers, as well as the duration of signing routine itself and +possible outages in signing and propagation infrastructure. In other words, +this delay should ensure that within this period of time after planned +change of the key set, all public\-facing secondaries will already serve +new DNSKEY RRSet for sure. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Has influence over ZSK key lifetime. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1h\fP (1 hour) +.SS rrsig\-lifetime +.sp +A validity period of newly issued signatures. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +The RRSIG\(aqs signature inception time is set to 90 minutes in the past. This +time period is not counted to the signature lifetime. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB14d\fP (14 days) +.SS rrsig\-refresh +.sp +A period how long at least before a signature expiration the signature will be refreshed, +in order to prevent expired RRSIGs on secondary servers or resolvers\(aq caches. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%propagation\-delay\fP + \fI\%zone\-max\-ttl\fP +.SS rrsig\-pre\-refresh +.sp +A period how long at most before a signature refresh time the signature might be refreshed, +in order to refresh RRSIGs in bigger batches on a frequently updated zone +(avoid re\-sign event too often). +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1h\fP (1 hour) +.SS reproducible\-signing +.sp +For ECDSA algorithms, generate RRSIG signatures deterministically (\fI\%RFC 6979\fP). +Besides better theoretical cryptographic security, this mode allows significant +speed\-up of loading signed (by the same method) zones. However, the zone signing +is a bit slower. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS nsec3 +.sp +Specifies if NSEC3 will be used instead of NSEC. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS nsec3\-iterations +.sp +A number of additional times the hashing is performed. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP +.SS nsec3\-opt\-out +.sp +If set, NSEC3 records won\(aqt be created for insecure delegations. +This speeds up the zone signing and reduces overall zone size. +.sp +\fBWARNING:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +NSEC3 with the Opt\-Out bit set no longer works as a proof of non\-existence +in this zone. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS nsec3\-salt\-length +.sp +A length of a salt field in octets, which is appended to the original owner +name before hashing. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB8\fP +.SS nsec3\-salt\-lifetime +.sp +A validity period of newly issued salt field. +.sp +Zero value means infinity. +.sp +Special value \fI\-1\fP triggers re\-salt every time when active ZSK changes. +This optimizes the number of big changes to the zone. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB30d\fP (30 days) +.SS signing\-threads +.sp +When signing zone or update, use this number of threads for parallel signing. +.sp +Those are extra threads independent of \fI\%Background workers\fP\&. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Some steps of the DNSSEC signing operation are not parallelized. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1\fP (no extra threads) +.SS ksk\-submission +.sp +A reference to \fI\%submission\fP section holding parameters of +KSK submission checks. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS ds\-push +.sp +Optional references \fI\%remote\fP and \fI\%remotes\fP +to authoritative DNS server of the +parent\(aqs zone. The remote server must be configured to accept DS record +updates via DDNS. Whenever a CDS record in the local zone is changed, the +corresponding DS record is sent as a dynamic update (DDNS) to the parent +DNS server. All previous DS records are deleted within the DDNS message. +It\(aqs possible to manage both child and parent zones by the same Knot DNS server. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This feature requires \fI\%cds\-cdnskey\-publish\fP +not to be set to \fBnone\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +The mentioned change to CDS record usually means that a KSK roll\-over is running +and the new key being rolled\-in is in "ready" state already for the period of +\fI\%propagation\-delay\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Module Onlinesign doesn\(aqt support DS push. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS cds\-cdnskey\-publish +.sp +Controls if and how shall the CDS and CDNSKEY be published in the zone. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnone\fP – Never publish any CDS or CDNSKEY records in the zone. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBdelete\-dnssec\fP – Publish special CDS and CDNSKEY records indicating turning off DNSSEC. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBrollover\fP – Publish CDS and CDNSKEY records for ready and not yet active KSK (submission phase of KSK rollover). +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBalways\fP – Always publish one CDS and one CDNSKEY records for the current KSK. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBdouble\-ds\fP – Always publish up to two CDS and two CDNSKEY records for ready and/or active KSKs. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If the zone keys are managed manually, the CDS and CDNSKEY rrsets may contain +more records depending on the keys available. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBWARNING:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +The \fBdouble\-ds\fP value does not trigger double\-DS roll\-over method. That method is +only supported when performed manually, with unset \fI\%ksk\-submission\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBrollover\fP +.SS cds\-digest\-type +.sp +Specify digest type for published CDS records. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBsha256\fP +.SS dnskey\-management +.sp +Specify how the DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS RRSets at the zone apex are handled +when (re\-)signing the zone. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBfull\fP – Upon every zone (re\-)sign, delete all unknown DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS +records and keep just those that are related to the zone keys stored in the KASP database. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBincremental\fP – Keep unknown DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS records in the zone, and +modify server\-managed records incrementally by employing changes in the KASP database. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Prerequisites for \fIincremental\fP: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +The Offline KSK isn\(aqt supported. +.IP \(bu 2 +The \fI\%delete\-delay\fP is long enough to cover possible daemon +shutdown (e.g. due to server maintenance). +.IP \(bu 2 +Avoided manual deletion of keys with keymgr\&. +.UNINDENT +.sp +Otherwise there might remain some DNSKEY records in the zone, belonging to +deleted keys. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBfull\fP +.SS offline\-ksk +.sp +Specifies if Offline KSK feature is enabled. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS unsafe\-operation +.sp +Turn off some DNSSEC safety features. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnone\fP – Nothing disabled. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBno\-check\-keyset\fP – Don\(aqt check active keys in present algorithms. This may +lead to violation of \fI\%RFC 4035#section\-2.2\fP\&. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBno\-update\-dnskey\fP – Don\(aqt maintain/update DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS records +in the zone apex according to KASP database. Juste leave them as they are in the zone. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBno\-update\-nsec\fP – Don\(aqt maintain/update NSEC/NSEC3 chain. Leave all the records +as they are in the zone. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBno\-update\-expired\fP – Don\(aqt update expired RRSIGs. +.UNINDENT +.sp +Multiple values may be specified. +.sp +\fBWARNING:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This mode is intended for DNSSEC experts who understand the corresponding consequences. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBnone\fP +.SH TEMPLATE SECTION +.sp +A template is shareable zone settings, which can simplify configuration by +reducing duplicates. A special default template (with the \fIdefault\fP identifier) +can be used for global zone configuration or as an implicit configuration +if a zone doesn\(aqt have another template specified. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +template: + \- id: STR + global\-module: STR/STR ... + # All zone options (excluding \(aqtemplate\(aq item) +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If an item is explicitly specified both in the referenced template and +the zone, the template item value is overridden by the zone item value. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS id +.sp +A template identifier. +.SS global\-module +.sp +An ordered list of references to query modules in the form of \fImodule_name\fP or +\fImodule_name/module_id\fP\&. These modules apply to all queries. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This option is only available in the \fIdefault\fP template. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH ZONE SECTION +.sp +Definition of zones served by the server. +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +zone: + \- domain: DNAME + template: template_id + storage: STR + file: STR + master: remote_id | remotes_id ... + ddns\-master: remote_id + notify: remote_id | remotes_id ... + acl: acl_id ... + provide\-ixfr: BOOL + semantic\-checks: BOOL | soft + zonefile\-sync: TIME + zonefile\-load: none | difference | difference\-no\-serial | whole + journal\-content: none | changes | all + journal\-max\-usage: SIZE + journal\-max\-depth: INT + zone\-max\-size : SIZE + adjust\-threads: INT + dnssec\-signing: BOOL + dnssec\-validation: BOOL + dnssec\-policy: policy_id + ds\-push: remote_id | remotes_id ... + zonemd\-verify: BOOL + zonemd\-generate: none | zonemd\-sha384 | zonemd\-sha512 | remove + serial\-policy: increment | unixtime | dateserial + refresh\-min\-interval: TIME + refresh\-max\-interval: TIME + retry\-min\-interval: TIME + retry\-max\-interval: TIME + expire\-min\-interval: TIME + expire\-max\-interval: TIME + catalog\-role: none | interpret | generate | member + catalog\-template: template_id ... + catalog\-zone: DNAME + catalog\-group: STR + module: STR/STR ... +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS domain +.sp +A zone name identifier. +.SS template +.sp +A \fI\%reference\fP to a configuration template. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set or \fBdefault\fP (if the template exists) +.SS storage +.sp +A data directory for storing zone files. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB${localstatedir}/lib/knot\fP (configured with \fB\-\-with\-storage=path\fP) +.SS file +.sp +A path to the zone file. Non\-absolute path (i.e. not starting with \fB/\fP) is +relative to \fI\%storage\fP\&. +It is also possible to use the following formatters: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fB%c[\fP\fIN\fP\fB]\fP or \fB%c[\fP\fIN\fP\fB\-\fP\fIM\fP\fB]\fP – Means the \fIN\fPth +character or a sequence of characters beginning from the \fIN\fPth and ending +with the \fIM\fPth character of the textual zone name (see \fB%s\fP). The +indexes are counted from 0 from the left. All dots (including the terminal +one) are considered. If the character is not available, the formatter has no effect. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fB%l[\fP\fIN\fP\fB]\fP – Means the \fIN\fPth label of the textual zone name +(see \fB%s\fP). The index is counted from 0 from the right (0 ~ TLD). +If the label is not available, the formatter has no effect. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fB%s\fP – Means the current zone name in the textual representation. +The zone name doesn\(aqt include the terminating dot (the result for the root +zone is the empty string!). +.IP \(bu 2 +\fB%%\fP – Means the \fB%\fP character. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBWARNING:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Beware of special characters which are escaped or encoded in the \eDDD form +where DDD is corresponding decimal ASCII code. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fI\%storage\fP\fB/%s.zone\fP +.SS master +.sp +An ordered list of references \fI\%remote\fP and +\fI\%remotes\fP to zone primary servers +(formerly known as master servers). +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS ddns\-master +.sp +A \fI\%reference\fP to zone primary master. If not specified, +the first \fI\%master\fP server is used. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS notify +.sp +An ordered list of references \fI\%remote\fP and +\fI\%remotes\fP to secondary servers to which notify +message is sent if the zone changes. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS acl +.sp +An ordered list of \fI\%references\fP to ACL rules which can allow +or disallow zone transfers, updates or incoming notifies. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS provide\-ixfr +.sp +If disabled, the server is forced to respond with AXFR to IXFR queries. +If enabled, IXFR requests are responded normally. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBon\fP +.SS semantic\-checks +.sp +Selects if extra zone semantic checks are used or impacts of the mandatory checks. +.sp +There are several mandatory checks which are always enabled and cannot be turned +off. An error in a mandatory check causes the zone not to be loaded. Most of +the mandatory checks can be weakened by setting \fBsoft\fP, which allows the zone to +be loaded even if the check fails. +.sp +If enabled, extra checks are used. These checks don\(aqt prevent the zone from loading. +.sp +The mandatory checks are applied to zone files, zone transfers, and updates via +control interface. The extra checks are applied to zone files only! +.sp +Mandatory checks: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +Missing SOA record at the zone apex (\fI\%RFC 1034\fP) (*) +.IP \(bu 2 +An extra record exists together with a CNAME record except for RRSIG and NSEC (\fI\%RFC 1034\fP) +.IP \(bu 2 +Multiple CNAME records with the same owner exist (\fI\%RFC 1034\fP) +.IP \(bu 2 +DNAME record having a record under it (\fI\%RFC 6672\fP) +.IP \(bu 2 +Multiple DNAME records with the same owner exist (\fI\%RFC 6672\fP) +.IP \(bu 2 +NS record exists together with a DNAME record (\fI\%RFC 6672\fP) +.UNINDENT +.sp +(*) The marked check can\(aqt be weakened by the soft mode. All other mandatory checks +are subject to the optional soft mode. +.sp +Extra checks: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +Missing NS record at the zone apex +.IP \(bu 2 +Missing glue A or AAAA record +.IP \(bu 2 +Invalid DS or NSEC3PARAM record +.IP \(bu 2 +CDS or CDNSKEY inconsistency +.IP \(bu 2 +All other DNSSEC checks executed during \fI\%dnssec\-validation\fP +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +The soft mode allows the refresh event to ignore a CNAME response to a SOA +query (malformed message) and triggers a zone bootstrap instead. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS zonefile\-sync +.sp +The time after which the current zone in memory will be synced with a zone file +on the disk (see \fI\%file\fP). The server will serve the latest +zone even after a restart using zone journal, but the zone file on the disk will +only be synced after \fBzonefile\-sync\fP time has expired (or after manual zone +flush). This is applicable when the zone is updated via IXFR, DDNS or automatic +DNSSEC signing. In order to completely disable automatic zone file synchronization, +set the value to \-1. In that case, it is still possible to force a manual zone flush +using the \fB\-f\fP option. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If you are serving large zones with frequent updates where +the immediate sync with a zone file is not desirable, increase the value. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB0\fP (immediate) +.SS zonefile\-load +.sp +Selects how the zone file contents are applied during zone load. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnone\fP – The zone file is not used at all. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBdifference\fP – If the zone contents are already available during server start or reload, +the difference is computed between them and the contents of the zone file. This difference +is then checked for semantic errors and applied to the current zone contents. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBdifference\-no\-serial\fP – Same as \fBdifference\fP, but the SOA serial in the zone file is +ignored, the server takes care of incrementing the serial automatically. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBwhole\fP – Zone contents are loaded from the zone file. +.UNINDENT +.sp +When \fBdifference\fP is configured and there are no zone contents yet (cold start +and no zone contents in the journal), it behaves the same way as \fBwhole\fP\&. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBwhole\fP +.SS journal\-content +.sp +Selects how the journal shall be used to store zone and its changes. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnone\fP – The journal is not used at all. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBchanges\fP – Zone changes history is stored in journal. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBall\fP – Zone contents and history is stored in journal. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBchanges\fP +.SS journal\-max\-usage +.sp +Policy how much space in journal DB will the zone\(aqs journal occupy. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Journal DB may grow far above the sum of journal\-max\-usage across +all zones, because of DB free space fragmentation. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB100M\fP (100 MiB) +.SS journal\-max\-depth +.sp +Maximum history length of the journal. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Zone\-in\-journal changeset isn\(aqt counted to the limit. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB2\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB20\fP +.SS zone\-max\-size +.sp +Maximum size of the zone. The size is measured as size of the zone records +in wire format without compression. The limit is enforced for incoming zone +transfers and dynamic updates. +.sp +For incremental transfers (IXFR), the effective limit for the total size of +the records in the transfer is twice the configured value. However the final +size of the zone must satisfy the configured value. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP unlimited +.SS adjust\-threads +.sp +Parallelize internal zone adjusting procedures by using specified number of +threads. This is useful with huge zones with NSEC3. Speedup observable at +server startup and while processing NSEC3 re\-salt. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1\fP (no extra threads) +.SS dnssec\-signing +.sp +If enabled, automatic DNSSEC signing for the zone is turned on. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS dnssec\-validation +.sp +If enabled, the zone contents are validated for being correctly signed +(including NSEC/NSEC3 chain) with DNSSEC signatures every time the zone +is loaded or changed (including AXFR/IXFR). +.sp +When the validation fails, the zone being loaded or update being applied +is cancelled with an error, and either none or previous zone state is published. +.sp +List of DNSSEC checks: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +Every zone RRSet is correctly signed by at least one present DNSKEY. +.IP \(bu 2 +DNSKEY RRSet is signed by KSK. +.IP \(bu 2 +NSEC(3) RR exists for each name (unless opt\-out) with correct bitmap. +.IP \(bu 2 +Every NSEC(3) RR is linked to the lexicographically next one. +.UNINDENT +.sp +The validation is not affected by \fI\%dnssec\-policy\fP configuration, +except for \fI\%signing\-threads\fP option, which specifies the number +of threads for parallel validation. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Redundant or garbage NSEC3 records are ignored. +.sp +This mode is not compatible with \fI\%dnssec\-signing\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS dnssec\-policy +.sp +A \fI\%reference\fP to DNSSEC signing policy. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP an imaginary policy with all default values +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +A configured policy called "default" won\(aqt be used unless explicitly referenced. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS ds\-push +.sp +Per zone configuration of \fI\%ds\-push\fP\&. This option overrides possible +per policy option. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS zonemd\-verify +.sp +On each zone load/update, verify that ZONEMD is present in the zone and valid. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +Zone digest calculation may take much time and CPU on large zones. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBoff\fP +.SS zonemd\-generate +.sp +On each zone update, calculate ZONEMD and put it into the zone. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnone\fP – No action regarding ZONEMD. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBzonemd\-sha384\fP – Generate ZONEMD using SHA384 algorithm. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBzonemd\-sha512\fP – Generate ZONEMD using SHA512 algorithm. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBremove\fP – Remove any ZONEMD from the zone apex. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBnone\fP +.SS serial\-policy +.sp +Specifies how the zone serial is updated after a dynamic update or +automatic DNSSEC signing. If the serial is changed by the dynamic update, +no change is made. +.sp +Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBincrement\fP – The serial is incremented according to serial number arithmetic. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBunixtime\fP – The serial is set to the current unix time. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBdateserial\fP – The 10\-digit serial (YYYYMMDDnn) is incremented, the first +8 digits match the current iso\-date. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +If the resulting serial for \fBunixtime\fP or \fBdateserial\fP is lower than or +equal to the current serial (this happens e.g. when migrating from other policy or +frequent updates), the serial is incremented instead. +.sp +To avoid user confusion, use \fBdateserial\fP only if you expect at most +100 updates per day per zone and \fBunixtime\fP only if you expect at most +one update per second per zone. +.sp +Generated catalog zones use \fBunixtime\fP only. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBincrement\fP (\fBunixtime\fP for generated catalog zones) +.SS refresh\-min\-interval +.sp +Forced minimum zone refresh interval (in seconds) to avoid flooding primary server. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB2\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB2\fP +.SS refresh\-max\-interval +.sp +Forced maximum zone refresh interval (in seconds). +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS retry\-min\-interval +.sp +Forced minimum zone retry interval (in seconds) to avoid flooding primary server. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB1\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB1\fP +.SS retry\-max\-interval +.sp +Forced maximum zone retry interval (in seconds). +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS expire\-min\-interval +.sp +Forced minimum zone expire interval (in seconds) to avoid flooding primary server. +.sp +\fIMinimum:\fP \fB3\fP +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fB3\fP +.SS expire\-max\-interval +.sp +Forced maximum zone expire interval (in seconds). +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS catalog\-role +.sp +Trigger zone catalog feature. Possible values: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBnone\fP – Not a catalog zone. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBinterpret\fP – A catalog zone which is loaded from a zone file or XFR, +and member zones shall be configured based on its contents. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBgenerate\fP – A catalog zone whose contents are generated according to +assigned member zones. +.IP \(bu 2 +\fBmember\fP – A member zone that is assigned to one generated catalog zone. +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP \fBnone\fP +.SS catalog\-template +.sp +For the catalog member zones, the specified configuration template will be applied. +.sp +Multiple catalog templates may be defined. The first one is used unless the member zone +has the \fIgroup\fP property defined, matching another catalog template. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This option must be set if and only if \fI\%catalog\-role\fP is \fIinterpret\fP\&. +.sp +Nested catalog zones aren\(aqt supported. Therefore catalog templates can\(aqt use +\fI\%catalog\-template\fP, \fI\%catalog\-role\fP, \fI\%catalog\-zone\fP, +and \fI\%catalog\-group\fP options. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS catalog\-zone +.sp +Assign this member zone to specified generated catalog zone. +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This option must be set if and only if \fI\%catalog\-role\fP is \fImember\fP\&. +.sp +The referenced catalog zone must exist and have \fI\%catalog\-role\fP set to \fIgenerate\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS catalog\-group +.sp +Assign this member zone to specified catalog group (configuration template). +.sp +\fBNOTE:\fP +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +This option has effect if and only if \fI\%catalog\-role\fP is \fImember\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SS module +.sp +An ordered list of references to query modules in the form of \fImodule_name\fP or +\fImodule_name/module_id\fP\&. These modules apply only to the current zone queries. +.sp +\fIDefault:\fP not set +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/knotc.8in b/doc/man/knotc.8in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a88274 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/knotc.8in @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KNOTC" "8" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +knotc \- Knot DNS control utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBknotc\fP [\fIparameters\fP] \fIaction\fP [\fIaction_args\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +This program controls a running \fIknotd\fP process using a socket. +.sp +If an \fIaction\fP is specified, it is performed and \fIknotc\fP exits, otherwise the program +is executed in the interactive mode. +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-config\fP \fIfile\fP +Use a textual configuration file (default is \fB@config_dir@/knot.conf\fP). +.TP +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-confdb\fP \fIdirectory\fP +Use a binary configuration database directory (default is \fB@storage_dir@/confdb\fP). +The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default +configuration file. +.TP +\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-max\-conf\-size\fP \fIMiB\fP +Set maximum size of the configuration database +(default is @conf_mapsize@ MiB, maximum 10000 MiB). +.TP +\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-socket\fP \fIpath\fP +Use a control UNIX socket path (default is \fB@run_dir@/knot.sock\fP). +.TP +\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-timeout\fP \fIseconds\fP +Use a control timeout in seconds. Set to 0 for infinity (default is 60). +The control socket operations are also subject to the timeout +parameter set on the server side in server\(aqs Control configuration section. +.TP +\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-blocking\fP +Zone event trigger commands wait until the event is finished. Control timeout +is set to infinity if not forced by explicit timeout specification. +.TP +\fB\-e\fP, \fB\-\-extended\fP +Show extended output (even empty items in zone status). +.TP +\fB\-f\fP, \fB\-\-force\fP +Forced operation. Overrides some checks. +.TP +\fB\-x\fP, \fB\-\-mono\fP +Don\(aqt generate colorized output. +.TP +\fB\-X\fP, \fB\-\-color\fP +Force colorized output in extended output or to a pipe. +.TP +\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP +Enable debug output. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.SS Actions +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fBstatus\fP [\fIdetail\fP] +Check if the server is running. Details are \fBversion\fP for the running +server version, \fBworkers\fP for the numbers of worker threads, +or \fBconfigure\fP for the configure summary. +.TP +\fBstop\fP +Stop the server if running. +.TP +\fBreload\fP +Reload the server configuration and modified zone files. All open zone +transactions will be aborted! +.TP +\fBstats\fP [\fImodule\fP[\fB\&.\fP\fIcounter\fP]] +Show global statistics counter(s). To print also counters with value 0, use +force option. +.TP +\fBzone\-check\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Test if the server can load the zone. Semantic checks are executed if enabled +in the configuration. If invoked with the force option, an error is returned +when semantic check warning appears. (*) +.TP +\fBzone\-status\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] [\fIfilter\fP] +Show the zone status. Filters are \fB+role\fP, \fB+serial\fP, \fB+transaction\fP, +\fB+events\fP, \fB+freeze\fP, and \fB+catalog\fP\&. Empty zone parameters are omitted, +unless the \fB\-\-extended\fP option is used. A single dash in the output represents +an unset value. Automatic colorization can be overruled using the \fB\-\-mono\fP and +\fB\-\-color\fP options. +.sp +The color code is: +\fIgreen\fP \- zone acts as a master / \fIred\fP \- zone acts as a slave, +\fIbold font (highlited)\fP \- zone is active / \fInormal\fP \- zone is empty, +\fIunderscored\fP \- zone is an interpreted catalog member. +.TP +\fBzone\-reload\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger a zone reload from a disk without checking its modification time. For +secondary zone, the refresh event from primary server(s) is scheduled; +for primary zone, the notify event to secondary server(s) is scheduled. An open +zone transaction will be aborted! If invoked with the force option, also zone +modules will be re\-loaded, but blocking mode might not work reliably. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-refresh\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger a check for the zone serial on the zone\(aqs primary server. If +the primary server has a newer zone, a transfer is scheduled. This command is +valid for secondary zones. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-retransfer\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger a zone transfer from the zone\(aqs primary server. The server +doesn\(aqt check the serial of the primary server\(aqs zone. This command is valid +for secondary zones. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-notify\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger a NOTIFY message to all configured remotes. This can help in cases +when previous NOTIFY had been lost or the secondary servers have been +offline. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-flush\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] [\fB+outdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP] +Trigger a zone journal flush to the configured zone file. If an output +directory is specified, the current zone is immediately dumped (in the +blocking mode) to a zone file in the specified directory. See +\fI\%Notes\fP below about the directory permissions. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-backup\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] \fB+backupdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP [\fIfilter\fP\&...] +Trigger a zone data and metadata backup to a specified directory. +Available filters are \fB+zonefile\fP, \fB+journal\fP, \fB+timers\fP, \fB+kaspdb\fP, +\fB+catalog\fP, and their negative counterparts \fB+nozonefile\fP, \fB+nojournal\fP, +\fB+notimers\fP, \fB+nokaspdb\fP, and \fB+nocatalog\fP\&. With these filters set, +zone contents, zone\(aqs journal, zone related timers, zone related data in the +KASP database together with keys, and zone\(aqs catalog, respectively, are backed up, +or omitted from the backup. By default, filters \fB+zonefile\fP, \fB+timers\fP, +\fB+kaspdb\fP, \fB+catalog\fP, and \fB+nojournal\fP are set. Setting a filter +for an item doesn\(aqt change default settings for other items. If zone flushing +is disabled, original zone file is backed up instead of writing out zone +contents to a file. See \fI\%Notes\fP below about the directory +permissions. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-restore\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] \fB+backupdir\fP \fIdirectory\fP [\fIfilter\fP\&...] +Trigger a zone data and metadata restore from a specified backup directory. +Optional filters are equivalent to the same filters of \fBzone\-backup\fP\&. +Restore from backups created by Knot DNS releases prior to 3.1 is possible +with the force option. See \fI\%Notes\fP below about the directory +permissions. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-sign\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger a DNSSEC re\-sign of the zone. Existing signatures will be dropped. +This command is valid for zones with DNSSEC signing enabled. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-keys\-load\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger a load of DNSSEC keys and other signing material from KASP database +(which might have been altered manually). If suitable, re\-sign the zone +afterwards (keeping valid signatures intact). (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-key\-rollover\fP \fIzone\fP \fIkey_type\fP +Trigger immediate key rollover. Publish new key and start a key rollover, +even when the key has a lifetime to go. Key type can be \fBksk\fP (also for CSK) +or \fBzsk\fP\&. This command is valid for zones with DNSSEC signing and automatic +key management enabled. Note that complete key rollover consists of several steps +and the blocking mode relates to the initial one only! (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-ksk\-submitted\fP \fIzone\fP\&... +Use when the zone\(aqs KSK rollover is in submission phase. By calling this command +the user confirms manually that the parent zone contains DS record for the new +KSK in submission phase and the old KSK can be retired. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-freeze\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger a zone freeze. All running events will be finished and all new and pending +(planned) zone\-changing events (load, refresh, update, flush, and DNSSEC signing) +will be held up until the zone is thawed. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-thaw\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Trigger dismissal of zone freeze. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-xfr\-freeze\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Temporarily disable outgoing AXFR/IXFR for the zone(s). (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-xfr\-thaw\fP [\fIzone\fP\&...] +Dismiss outgoing XFR freeze. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-read\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIowner\fP [\fItype\fP]] +Get zone data that are currently being presented. +.TP +\fBzone\-begin\fP \fIzone\fP\&... +Begin a zone transaction. +.TP +\fBzone\-commit\fP \fIzone\fP\&... +Commit the zone transaction. All changes are applied to the zone. +.TP +\fBzone\-abort\fP \fIzone\fP\&... +Abort the zone transaction. All changes are discarded. +.TP +\fBzone\-diff\fP \fIzone\fP +Get zone changes within the transaction. +.TP +\fBzone\-get\fP \fIzone\fP [\fIowner\fP [\fItype\fP]] +Get zone data within the transaction. +.TP +\fBzone\-set\fP \fIzone\fP \fIowner\fP [\fIttl\fP] \fItype\fP \fIrdata\fP +Add zone record within the transaction. The first record in a rrset +requires a ttl value specified. +.TP +\fBzone\-unset\fP \fIzone\fP \fIowner\fP [\fItype\fP [\fIrdata\fP]] +Remove zone data within the transaction. +.TP +\fBzone\-purge\fP \fIzone\fP\&... [\fB+orphan\fP] [\fIfilter\fP\&...] +Purge zone data, zone file, journal, timers, and/or KASP data of specified zones. +Available filters are \fB+expire\fP, \fB+zonefile\fP, \fB+journal\fP, \fB+timers\fP, +\fB+kaspdb\fP, and \fB+catalog\fP\&. If no filter is specified, all filters are enabled. +If the zone is no longer configured, add \fB+orphan\fP parameter (zone file cannot +be purged in this case). When purging orphans, always check the server log for +possible errors. This command always requires the force option. (#) +.TP +\fBzone\-stats\fP \fIzone\fP [\fImodule\fP[\fB\&.\fP\fIcounter\fP]] +Show zone statistics counter(s). To print also counters with value 0, use +force option. +.TP +\fBconf\-init\fP +Initialize the configuration database. If the database doesn\(aqt exist yet, +execute this command as an intended user to ensure the server is permitted +to access the database (e.g. \fIsudo \-u knot knotc conf\-init\fP). (*) +.TP +\fBconf\-check\fP +Check the server configuration. (*) +.TP +\fBconf\-import\fP \fIfilename\fP +Import a configuration file into the configuration database. If the database +doesn\(aqt exist yet, execute this command as an intended user to ensure the server +is permitted to access the database (e.g. \fIsudo \-u knot knotc conf\-import ...\fP). +Also ensure the server is not using the configuration database at the same time! (*) +.TP +\fBconf\-export\fP [\fIfilename\fP] +Export the configuration database into a config file or stdout. (*) +.TP +\fBconf\-list\fP [\fIitem\fP] +List the configuration database sections or section items. +.TP +\fBconf\-read\fP [\fIitem\fP] +Read the item from the active configuration database. +.TP +\fBconf\-begin\fP +Begin a writing configuration database transaction. Only one transaction +can be opened at a time. +.TP +\fBconf\-commit\fP +Commit the configuration database transaction. +.TP +\fBconf\-abort\fP +Rollback the configuration database transaction. +.TP +\fBconf\-diff\fP [\fIitem\fP] +Get the item difference in the transaction. +.TP +\fBconf\-get\fP [\fIitem\fP] +Get the item data from the transaction. +.TP +\fBconf\-set\fP \fIitem\fP [\fIdata\fP\&...] +Set the item data in the transaction. +.TP +\fBconf\-unset\fP [\fIitem\fP] [\fIdata\fP\&...] +Unset the item data in the transaction. +.UNINDENT +.SS Notes +.sp +Empty or \fB\-\-\fP \fIzone\fP parameter means all zones or all zones with a transaction. +.sp +Use \fB@\fP \fIowner\fP to denote the zone name. +.sp +Type \fIitem\fP parameter in the form of \fIsection\fP[\fB[\fP\fIid\fP\fB]\fP][\fB\&.\fP\fIname\fP]. +.sp +(*) indicates a local operation which requires a configuration. +.sp +(#) indicates an optionally blocking operation. +.sp +The \fB\-b\fP and \fB\-f\fP options can be placed right after the command name. +.sp +Responses returned by \fIknotc\fP commands depend on the mode: +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP \(bu 2 +In the blocking mode, \fIknotc\fP reports if an error occurred during processing +of the command by the server. If an error is reported, a more detailed information +about the failure can usually be found in the server log. +.IP \(bu 2 +In the non\-blocking (default) mode, \fIknotc\fP doesn\(aqt report processing errors. +The \fIOK\fP response to triggering commands means that the command has been successfully +sent to the server. To verify if the operation succeeded, it\(aqs necessary to +check the server log. +.UNINDENT +.sp +Actions \fBzone\-flush\fP, \fBzone\-backup\fP, and \fBzone\-restore\fP are carried out by +the \fIknotd\fP process. The directory specified must be accessible to the user account +that \fIknotd\fP runs under and if the directory already exists, its permissions must be +appropriate for that user account. +.SS Interactive mode +.sp +The utility provides interactive mode with basic line editing functionality, +command completion, and command history. +.sp +Interactive mode behavior can be customized in \fI~/.editrc\fP\&. Refer to +\fBeditrc(5)\fP for details. +.sp +Command history is saved in \fI~/.knotc_history\fP\&. +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.SS Reload the whole server configuration +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knotc reload +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS Flush the example.com and example.org zones +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knotc zone\-flush example.com example.org +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS Get the current server configuration +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knotc conf\-read server +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS Get the list of the current zones +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knotc conf\-read zone.domain +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS Get the primary servers for the example.com zone +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knotc conf\-read \(aqzone[example.com].master\(aq +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS Add example.org zone with a zonefile location +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knotc conf\-begin +$ knotc conf\-set \(aqzone[example.org]\(aq +$ knotc conf\-set \(aqzone[example.org].file\(aq \(aq/var/zones/example.org.zone\(aq +$ knotc conf\-commit +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SS Get the SOA record for each configured zone +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knotc zone\-read \-\- @ SOA +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBknotd(8)\fP, \fBknot.conf(5)\fP, \fBeditrc(5)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/knotd.8in b/doc/man/knotd.8in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d4d18a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/knotd.8in @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KNOTD" "8" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +knotd \- Knot DNS server daemon +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBknotd\fP [\fIparameters\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +Knot DNS is a high\-performance authoritative DNS server. The \fIknotd\fP program is +the DNS server daemon. +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-config\fP \fIfile\fP +Use a textual configuration file (default is \fB@config_dir@/knot.conf\fP). +.TP +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-confdb\fP \fIdirectory\fP +Use a binary configuration database directory (default is \fB@storage_dir@/confdb\fP). +The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default +configuration file. +.TP +\fB\-m\fP, \fB\-\-max\-conf\-size\fP \fIMiB\fP +Set maximum size of the configuration database +(default is @conf_mapsize@ MiB, maximum 10000 MiB). +.TP +\fB\-s\fP, \fB\-\-socket\fP \fIpath\fP +Use a remote control UNIX socket path (default is \fB@run_dir@/knot.sock\fP). +.TP +\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-daemonize\fP [\fIdirectory\fP] +Run the server as a daemon. New root directory may be specified +(default is \fB/\fP). +.TP +\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP +Enable debug output. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.SS Signals +.sp +If the \fIknotd\fP process receives a SIGHUP signal, it reloads its configuration and +reopens the log files, if they are configured. When \fIknotd\fP receives a SIGUSR1 +signal, it reloads all configured zones. Upon receiving a SIGINT signal, \fIknotd\fP +exits. +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBknot.conf(5)\fP, \fBknotc(8)\fP, \fBkeymgr(8)\fP, +\fBkjournalprint(8)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/knsec3hash.1in b/doc/man/knsec3hash.1in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..624f99d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/knsec3hash.1in @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KNSEC3HASH" "1" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +knsec3hash \- Simple utility to compute NSEC3 hash +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBknsec3hash\fP \fIsalt\fP \fIalgorithm\fP \fIiterations\fP \fIname\fP +.sp +\fBknsec3hash\fP \fIalgorithm\fP \fIflags\fP \fIiterations\fP \fIsalt\fP \fIname\fP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +This utility generates a NSEC3 hash for a given domain name and parameters of NSEC3 hash. +.SS Parameters +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fIsalt\fP +Specifies a binary salt encoded as a hexadecimal string. +.TP +\fIalgorithm\fP +Specifies a hashing algorithm by number. Currently, the only supported algorithm is SHA\-1 (number 1). +.TP +\fIiterations\fP +Specifies the number of additional iterations of the hashing algorithm. +.TP +\fIname\fP +Specifies the domain name to be hashed. +.UNINDENT +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knsec3hash 1 0 10 c01dcafe knot\-dns.cz +7PTVGE7QV67EM61ROS9238P5RAKR2DM7 (salt=c01dcafe, hash=1, iterations=10) +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knsec3hash \- 1 0 net +A1RT98BS5QGC9NFI51S9HCI47ULJG6JH (salt=\-, hash=1, iterations=0) +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fI\%RFC 5155\fP – DNS Security (DNSSEC) Hashed Authenticated Denial of Existence. +.sp +\fBknotc(8)\fP, \fBknotd(8)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/knsupdate.1in b/doc/man/knsupdate.1in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..49438ad --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/knsupdate.1in @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KNSUPDATE" "1" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +knsupdate \- Dynamic DNS update utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBknsupdate\fP [\fIoptions\fP] [\fIfilename\fP] +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +This utility sends Dynamic DNS update messages to a DNS server. Update content +is read from a file (if the parameter \fIfilename\fP is given) or from the standard +input. +.sp +The format of updates is textual and is made up of commands. Every command is +placed on the separate line of the input. Lines starting with a semicolon are +comments and are not processed. +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-d\fP +Enable debug messages. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-k\fP \fIkeyfile\fP +Use the TSIG key stored in a file \fIkeyfile\fP to authenticate the request. The +file should contain the key in the same format, which is accepted by the +\fB\-y\fP option. +.TP +\fB\-p\fP \fIport\fP +Set the port to use for connections to the server (if not explicitly specified +in the update). The default is 53. +.TP +\fB\-r\fP \fIretries\fP +The number of retries for UDP requests. The default is 3. +.TP +\fB\-t\fP \fItimeout\fP +The total timeout (for all UDP update tries) of the update request in seconds. +The default is 12. If set to zero, the timeout is infinite. +.TP +\fB\-v\fP +Use a TCP connection. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.TP +\fB\-y\fP [\fIalg\fP:]\fIname\fP:\fIkey\fP +Use the TSIG key with a name \fIname\fP to authenticate the request. The \fIalg\fP +part specifies the algorithm (the default is hmac\-sha256) and \fIkey\fP specifies +the shared secret encoded in Base64. +.UNINDENT +.SS Commands +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fBserver\fP \fIname\fP [\fIport\fP] +Specifies a receiving server of the dynamic update message. The \fIname\fP parameter +can be either a host name or an IP address. If the \fIport\fP is not specified, +the default port is used. The default port value can be controlled using +the \fB\-p\fP program option. +.TP +\fBlocal\fP \fIaddress\fP [\fIport\fP] +Specifies outgoing \fIaddress\fP and \fIport\fP\&. If no local is specified, the +address and port are set by the system automatically. The default port number +is 0. +.TP +\fBzone\fP \fIname\fP +Specifies that all updates are done within a zone \fIname\fP\&. The zone name doesn\(aqt +have a default and must be set explicitly. +.TP +\fBorigin\fP \fIname\fP +Specifies fully qualified domain name suffix which is appended to non\-fqd +owners in update commands. The default is the terminal label (\fB\&.\fP). +.TP +\fBclass\fP \fIname\fP +Sets \fIname\fP as the default class for all updates. If not used, the default +class is IN. +.TP +\fBttl\fP \fIvalue\fP +Sets \fIvalue\fP as the default TTL (in seconds). If not used, the default value +is 3600. +.TP +\fBkey\fP [\fIalg\fP:]\fIname\fP \fIkey\fP +Specifies the TSIG \fIkey\fP named \fIname\fP to authenticate the request. An optional +\fIalg\fP algorithm can be specified. This command has the same effect as +the program option \fB\-y\fP\&. +.TP +[\fBprereq\fP] \fBnxdomain\fP \fIname\fP +Adds a prerequisite for a non\-existing record owned by \fIname\fP\&. +.TP +[\fBprereq\fP] \fByxdomain\fP \fIname\fP +Adds a prerequisite for an existing record owned by \fIname\fP\&. +.TP +[\fBprereq\fP] \fBnxrrset\fP \fIname\fP [\fIclass\fP] \fItype\fP +Adds a prerequisite for a non\-existing record of the \fItype\fP owned by \fIname\fP\&. +Internet \fIclass\fP is expected. +.TP +[\fBprereq\fP] \fByxrrset\fP \fIname\fP [\fIclass\fP] \fItype\fP [\fIdata\fP] +Adds a prerequisite for an existing record of the \fItype\fP owned by \fIname\fP +with optional \fIdata\fP\&. Internet \fIclass\fP is expected. +.TP +[\fBupdate\fP] \fBadd\fP \fIname\fP [\fIttl\fP] [\fIclass\fP] \fItype\fP \fIdata\fP +Adds a request to add a new resource record into the zone. +Please note that if the \fIname\fP is not fully qualified domain name, the +current origin name is appended to it. +.TP +[\fBupdate\fP] \fBdel\fP[\fBete\fP] \fIname\fP [\fIttl\fP] [\fIclass\fP] [\fItype\fP] [\fIdata\fP] +Adds a request to remove all (or matching \fIclass\fP, \fItype\fP or \fIdata\fP) +resource records from the zone. There is the same requirement for the \fIname\fP +parameter as in \fBupdate add\fP command. The \fIttl\fP item is ignored. +.TP +\fBshow\fP +Displays current content of the update message. +.TP +\fBsend\fP +Sends the current update message and cleans the list of updates. +.TP +\fBanswer\fP +Displays the last answer from the server. +.TP +\fBdebug\fP +Enable debugging. This command has the same meaning as the \fB\-d\fP program option. +.TP +\fBexit\fP +End the program. +.UNINDENT +.SH NOTES +.sp +Options \fB\-k\fP and \fB\-y\fP can not be used simultaneously. +.sp +Dnssec\-keygen keyfile format is not supported. Use \fBkeymgr(8)\fP instead. +.sp +Zone name/server guessing is not supported if the zone name/server is not specified. +.sp +Empty line doesn\(aqt send the update. +.SS Interactive mode +.sp +The utility provides interactive mode with basic line editing functionality, +command completion, and command history. +.sp +Interactive mode behavior can be customized in \fI~/.editrc\fP\&. Refer to +\fBeditrc(5)\fP for details. +.sp +Command history is saved in \fI~/.knsupdate_history\fP\&. +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.INDENT 0.0 +.IP 1. 3 +Send one update of the zone example.com to the server 192.168.1.1. The update +contains two new records: +.INDENT 3.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +$ knsupdate +knsupdate> server 192.168.1.1 +knsupdate> zone example.com. +knsupdate> origin example.com. +knsupdate> ttl 3600 +knsupdate> add test1.example.com. 7200 A 192.168.2.2 +knsupdate> add test2 TXT "hello" +knsupdate> show +knsupdate> send +knsupdate> answer +knsupdate> exit +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBkdig(1)\fP, \fBkhost(1)\fP, \fBkeymgr(8)\fP, \fBeditrc(5)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/kxdpgun.8in b/doc/man/kxdpgun.8in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3304838 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/kxdpgun.8in @@ -0,0 +1,241 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KXDPGUN" "8" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +kxdpgun \- XDP-powered DNS benchmarking tool +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkxdpgun\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fB\-i\fP \fIfilename\fP \fItargetIP\fP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +Powerful generator of DNS traffic, sending and receiving packets through XDP. +.sp +Queries are generated according to a textual file which is read sequentially +in a loop until a configured duration elapses. The order of queries is not +guaranteed. Responses are received (unless disabled) and counted, but not +checked against queries. +.sp +The number of parallel threads is autodetected according to the number of queues +configured for the network interface. +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-duration\fP \fIseconds\fP +Duration of traffic generation, specified as a decimal number in seconds +(default is 5.0). +.TP +\fB\-T\fP, \fB\-\-tcp\fP[\fB=\fP\fIdebug_mode\fP] +Send queries over TCP. See the list of optional debug modes below. +.TP +\fB\-U\fP, \fB\-\-quic\fP[\fB=\fP\fIdebug_mode\fP] +Send queries over QUIC. See the list of optional debug modes below. +.TP +\fB\-Q\fP, \fB\-\-qps\fP \fIqueries\fP +Number of queries\-per\-second (approximately) to be sent (default is 1000). +The program is not optimized for low speeds at which it may lose +communication packets. The recommended minimum speed is 2 packets per thread +(Rx/Tx queue). +.TP +\fB\-b\fP, \fB\-\-batch\fP \fIsize\fP +Send more queries in a batch. Improves QPS but may affect the counterpart\(aqs +packet loss (default is 10 for UDP and 1 for TCP/QUIC). +.TP +\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-drop\fP +Drop incoming responses. Improves QPS, but disables response statistics. +.TP +\fB\-p\fP, \fB\-\-port\fP \fInumber\fP +Remote destination port (default is 53 for UDP/TCP, 853 for QUIC). +.TP +\fB\-F\fP, \fB\-\-affinity\fP \fIcpu_spec\fP +CPU affinity for all threads specified in the format [<cpu_start>][s<cpu_step>], +where <cpu_start> is the CPU ID for the first thread and <cpu_step> is the +CPU ID increment for next thread (default is 0s1). +.TP +\fB\-i\fP, \fB\-\-infile\fP \fIfilename\fP +Path to a file with query templates. +.TP +\fB\-I\fP, \fB\-\-interface\fP \fIinterface\fP +Network interface for outgoing communication. This can be useful in situations +when the interfaces are in a bond for example. +.TP +\fB\-l\fP, \fB\-\-local\fP \fIlocalIP\fP[\fB/\fP\fIprefix\fP] +Override the auto\-detected source IP address. If an address range is specified +instead, various IPs from the range will be used for different queries uniformly +(address range not supported in the QUIC mode). +.TP +\fItargetIP\fP +The IPv4 or IPv6 address of remote destination. +.TP +\fB\-L\fP, \fB\-\-mac\-local\fP +Override auto\-detected local MAC address. +.TP +\fB\-R\fP, \fB\-\-mac\-remote\fP +Override auto\-detected remote MAC address. +.TP +\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-vlan\fP \fIid\fP +Add VLAN 802.1Q header with the given id. VLAN offloading should be disabled. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.SS Queries file format +.sp +Each line describes a query in the form: +.sp +\fIquery_name\fP \fIquery_type\fP [\fIflags\fP] +.sp +Where \fIquery_name\fP is a domain name to be queried, \fIquery_type\fP is a record type +name, and \fIflags\fP is a single character: +.sp +\fBE\fP Send query with EDNS. +.sp +\fBD\fP Request DNSSEC (EDNS + DO flag). +.SS TCP/QUIC debug modes +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB0\fP +Perform full handshake for all connections (QUIC only). +.TP +\fB1\fP +Just send SYN (Initial) and receive SYN\-ACK (Handshake). +.TP +\fB2\fP +Perform TCP/QUIC handshake and don\(aqt send anything, allow close initiated by counterpart. +.TP +\fB3\fP +Perform TCP/QUIC handshake and don\(aqt react further. +.TP +\fB5\fP +Send incomplete query (N\-1 bytes) and don\(aqt react further. +.TP +\fB7\fP +Send query and don\(aqt ACK the response or anything further. +.TP +\fB8\fP +Don\(aqt close the connection and ignore close by counterpart (TCP only). +.TP +\fB9\fP +Operate normally except for not ACKing the final FIN+ACK (TCP only). +.UNINDENT +.SS Signals +.sp +Sending USR1 signal to a running process triggers current statistics dump +to the standard output. +.SH NOTES +.sp +Linux kernel 4.18+ is required. +.sp +The utility has to be executed under root or with these capabilities: +CAP_NET_RAW, CAP_NET_ADMIN, CAP_SYS_ADMIN, CAP_IPC_LOCK, and CAP_SYS_RESOURCE +(Linux < 5.11). +.sp +The utility allocates source UDP/TCP ports from the range 2000\-65535. +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH EXAMPLES +.sp +Manually created queries file: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +abc6.example.com. AAAA +nxdomain.example.com. A +notzone. A +a.example.com. NS E +ab.example.com. A D +abcd.example.com. DS D +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +Queries file generated from a zone file (Knot DNS format): +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +cat ZONE_FILE | awk "{print \e$1,\e$3}" | grep \-E "(NS|DS|A|AAAA|PTR|MX|SOA)$" | sort \-u \-R > queries.txt +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +Basic usage: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +# kxdpgun \-i ~/queries.txt 2001:DB8::1 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIUsing UDP with increased batch size\fP: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +# kxdpgun \-t 20 \-Q 1000000 \-i ~/queries.txt \-b 20 \-p 8853 192.0.2.1 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.sp +\fIUsing TCP\fP: +.INDENT 0.0 +.INDENT 3.5 +.sp +.nf +.ft C +# kxdpgun \-t 20 \-Q 100000 \-i ~/queries.txt \-T \-p 8853 192.0.2.1 +.ft P +.fi +.UNINDENT +.UNINDENT +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBkdig(1)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/kzonecheck.1in b/doc/man/kzonecheck.1in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f8a834 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/kzonecheck.1in @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KZONECHECK" "1" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +kzonecheck \- Knot DNS zone check tool +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkzonecheck\fP [\fIoptions\fP] \fIfilename\fP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +The utility checks zone file syntax and runs semantic checks on the zone +content. The executed checks are the same as the checks run by the Knot +DNS server. +.sp +Please, refer to the \fBsemantic\-checks\fP configuration option in +\fBknot.conf(5)\fP for the full list of available semantic checks. +.SS Parameters +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fIfilename\fP +Path to the zone file to be checked. For reading from \fBstdin\fP use \fB/dev/stdin\fP +or just \fB\-\fP\&. +.UNINDENT +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-origin\fP \fIorigin\fP +Zone origin. If not specified, the origin is determined from the file name +(possibly removing the \fB\&.zone\fP suffix). +.TP +\fB\-d\fP, \fB\-\-dnssec\fP \fBon\fP|\fBoff\fP +Also check DNSSEC\-related records. The default is to decide based on the +existence of a RRSIG for SOA. +.TP +\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP \fItime\fP +Current time specification. Use UNIX timestamp, YYYYMMDDHHmmSS +format, or [+/\-]\fItime\fP[unit] format, where unit can be \fBY\fP, \fBM\fP, +\fBD\fP, \fBh\fP, \fBm\fP, or \fBs\fP\&. Default is current UNIX timestamp. +.TP +\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verbose\fP +Enable debug output. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBknotd(8)\fP, \fBknot.conf(5)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man/kzonesign.1in b/doc/man/kzonesign.1in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..32a2095 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man/kzonesign.1in @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ +.\" Man page generated from reStructuredText. +. +. +.nr rst2man-indent-level 0 +. +.de1 rstReportMargin +\\$1 \\n[an-margin] +level \\n[rst2man-indent-level] +level margin: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +- +\\n[rst2man-indent0] +\\n[rst2man-indent1] +\\n[rst2man-indent2] +.. +.de1 INDENT +.\" .rstReportMargin pre: +. RS \\$1 +. nr rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level] \\n[an-margin] +. nr rst2man-indent-level +1 +.\" .rstReportMargin post: +.. +.de UNINDENT +. RE +.\" indent \\n[an-margin] +.\" old: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.nr rst2man-indent-level -1 +.\" new: \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]] +.in \\n[rst2man-indent\\n[rst2man-indent-level]]u +.. +.TH "KZONESIGN" "1" "@RELEASE_DATE@" "@VERSION@" "Knot DNS" +.SH NAME +kzonesign \- DNSSEC signing utility +.SH SYNOPSIS +.sp +\fBkzonesign\fP [\fIconfig_option\fP \fIconfig_argument\fP] [\fIoptions\fP] \fIzone_name\fP +.SH DESCRIPTION +.sp +This utility reads the zone\(aqs zone file, signs the zone according to given +configuration, and writes the signed zone file back. An alternative mode +is DNSSEC validation of the given zone. The signing or validation +can run in parallel if enabled in the configuration (see policy.signing\-threads +and zone.adjust\-threads). +.SS Config options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-c\fP, \fB\-\-config\fP \fIfile\fP +Use a textual configuration file (default is \fB@config_dir@/knot.conf\fP). +.TP +\fB\-C\fP, \fB\-\-confdb\fP \fIdirectory\fP +Use a binary configuration database directory (default is \fB@storage_dir@/confdb\fP). +The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default +configuration file. +.UNINDENT +.SS Options +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fB\-o\fP, \fB\-\-outdir\fP \fIdir_name\fP +Write the output zone file to the specified directory instead of the configured one. +.TP +\fB\-r\fP, \fB\-\-rollover\fP +Allow key roll\-overs and NSEC3 re\-salt. In order to finish possible KSK submission, +set the KSK\(aqs \fBactive\fP timestamp to now (\fB+0\fP) using keymgr\&. +.TP +\fB\-v\fP, \fB\-\-verify\fP +Instead of (re\-)signing the zone, just verify that the zone is correctly signed. +.TP +\fB\-t\fP, \fB\-\-time\fP \fItimestamp\fP +Sign/verify the zone (and roll the keys if necessary) as if it was at the time +specified by timestamp. +.TP +\fB\-h\fP, \fB\-\-help\fP +Print the program help. +.TP +\fB\-V\fP, \fB\-\-version\fP +Print the program version. +.UNINDENT +.SS Parameters +.INDENT 0.0 +.TP +\fIzone_name\fP +A name of the zone to be signed. +.UNINDENT +.SH EXIT VALUES +.sp +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. +.SH SEE ALSO +.sp +\fBknot.conf(5)\fP, \fBkeymgr(8)\fP\&. +.SH AUTHOR +CZ.NIC Labs <https://www.knot-dns.cz> +.SH COPYRIGHT +Copyright 2010–2023, CZ.NIC, z.s.p.o. +.\" Generated by docutils manpage writer. +. diff --git a/doc/man_kcatalogprint.rst b/doc/man_kcatalogprint.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fb5088 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_kcatalogprint.rst @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +kcatalogprint – Knot DNS catalog print utility +============================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`kcatalogprint` [*config_option* *config_argument*] [*option*] + +Description +----------- + +The program prints zone catalog stored in a catalog database. + +Config options +.............. + +**-c**, **--config** *file* + Use a textual configuration file (default is :file:`@config_dir@/knot.conf`). + +**-C**, **--confdb** *directory* + Use a binary configuration database directory (default is :file:`@storage_dir@/confdb`). + The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default + configuration file. + +**-D**, **--dir** *path* + Use specified catalog database path and default configuration. + +Options +....... + +**-a**, **--catalog** + Filter the output by catalog zone name. + +**-m**, **--member** + Filter the output by member zone name. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`knotd(8)`, :manpage:`knot.conf(5)`. diff --git a/doc/man_kdig.rst b/doc/man_kdig.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..122fefa --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_kdig.rst @@ -0,0 +1,392 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``kdig`` – Advanced DNS lookup utility +====================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`kdig` [*common-settings*] [*query* [*settings*]]... + +:program:`kdig` **-h** + +Description +----------- + +This utility sends one or more DNS queries to a nameserver. Each query can have +individual *settings*, or it can be specified globally via *common-settings*, +which must precede *query* specification. + +Parameters +.......... + +*query* + *name* | **-q** *name* | **-x** *address* | **-G** *tapfile* + +*common-settings*, *settings* + [*query_class*] [*query_type*] [**@**\ *server*]... [*options*] + +*name* + Is a domain name that is to be looked up. + +*server* + Is a domain name or an IPv4 or IPv6 address of the nameserver to send a query + to. An additional port can be specified using address:port ([address]:port + for IPv6 address), address@port, or address#port notation. A value which begins + with '/' character is considered an absolute UNIX socket path. If no server is + specified, the servers from :file:`/etc/resolv.conf` are used. + +If no arguments are provided, :program:`kdig` sends NS query for the root +zone. + +Query classes +............. + +A *query_class* can be either a DNS class name (IN, CH) or generic class +specification **CLASS**\ *XXXXX* where *XXXXX* is a corresponding decimal +class number. The default query class is IN. + +Query types +........... + +A *query_type* can be either a DNS resource record type +(A, AAAA, NS, SOA, DNSKEY, ANY, etc.) or one of the following: + +**TYPE**\ *XXXXX* + Generic query type specification where *XXXXX* is a corresponding decimal + type number. + +**AXFR** + Full zone transfer request. + +**IXFR=**\ *serial* + Incremental zone transfer request for specified SOA serial number + (i.e. all zone updates since the specified zone version are to be returned). + +**NOTIFY=**\ *serial* + Notify message with a SOA serial hint specified. + +**NOTIFY** + Notify message with a SOA serial hint unspecified. + +The default query type is A. + +Options +....... + +**-4** + Use the IPv4 protocol only. + +**-6** + Use the IPv6 protocol only. + +**-b** *address* + Set the source IP address of the query to *address*. The address must be a + valid address for local interface or :: or 0.0.0.0. An optional port + can be specified in the same format as the *server* value. + +**-c** *class* + An explicit *query_class* specification. See possible values above. + +**-d** + Enable debug messages. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-k** *keyfile* + Use the TSIG key stored in a file *keyfile* to authenticate the request. The + file must contain the key in the same format as accepted by the + **-y** option. + +**-p** *port* + Set the nameserver port number or service name to send a query to. The default + port is 53. + +**-q** *name* + Set the query name. An explicit variant of *name* specification. If no *name* + is provided, empty question section is set. + +**-t** *type* + An explicit *query_type* specification. See possible values above. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +**-x** *address* + Send a reverse (PTR) query for IPv4 or IPv6 *address*. The correct name, class + and type is set automatically. + +**-y** [*alg*:]\ *name*:*key* + Use the TSIG key named *name* to authenticate the request. The *alg* + part specifies the algorithm (the default is hmac-sha256) and *key* specifies + the shared secret encoded in Base64. + +**-E** *tapfile* + Export a dnstap trace of the query and response messages received to the + file *tapfile*. + +**-G** *tapfile* + Generate message output from a previously saved dnstap file *tapfile*. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **multiline** + Wrap long records to more lines and improve human readability. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **short** + Show record data only. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **generic** + Use the generic representation format when printing resource record types + and data. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **crypto** + Display the DNSSEC keys and signatures values in base64, instead of omitting them. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **aaflag** + Set the AA flag. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tcflag** + Set the TC flag. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **rdflag** + Set the RD flag. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **recurse** + Same as **+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **rdflag** + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **raflag** + Set the RA flag. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **zflag** + Set the zero flag bit. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **adflag** + Set the AD flag. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **cdflag** + Set the CD flag. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **dnssec** + Set the DO flag. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **all** + Show all packet sections. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **qr** + Show the query packet. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **header** + Show the packet header. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **comments** + Show commented section names. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **opt** + Show the EDNS pseudosection. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **opttext** + Try to show unknown EDNS options as text. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **question** + Show the question section. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **answer** + Show the answer section. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **authority** + Show the authority section. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **additional** + Show the additional section. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tsig** + Show the TSIG pseudosection. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **stats** + Show trailing packet statistics. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **class** + Show the DNS class. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **ttl** + Show the TTL value. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tcp** + Use the TCP protocol (default is UDP for standard query and TCP for AXFR/IXFR). + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **fastopen** + Use TCP Fast Open. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **ignore** + Don't use TCP automatically if a truncated reply is received. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **keepopen** + Keep TCP connection open for the following query if it has the same connection + configuration. This applies to +tcp, +tls, and +https operations. The connection + is considered in the context of a single kdig call only. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls** + Use TLS with the Opportunistic privacy profile (:rfc:`7858#section-4.1`). + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls-ca**\[\ =\ *FILE*\] + Use TLS with a certificate validation. Certification authority certificates + are loaded from the specified PEM file (default is system certificate storage + if no argument is provided). + Can be specified multiple times. If the +tls-hostname option is not provided, + the name of the target server (if specified) is used for strict authentication. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls-pin**\ =\ *BASE64* + Use TLS with the Out-of-Band key-pinned privacy profile (:rfc:`7858#section-4.2`). + The PIN must be a Base64 encoded SHA-256 hash of the X.509 SubjectPublicKeyInfo. + Can be specified multiple times. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls-hostname**\ =\ *STR* + Use TLS with a remote server hostname check. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls-sni**\ =\ *STR* + Use TLS with a Server Name Indication. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls-keyfile**\ =\ *FILE* + Use TLS with a client keyfile. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls-certfile**\ =\ *FILE* + Use TLS with a client certfile. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **tls-ocsp-stapling**\[\ =\ *H*\] + Use TLS with a valid stapled OCSP response for the server certificate + (%u or specify hours). OCSP responses older than the specified period are + considered invalid. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **https**\[\ =\ *URL*\] + Use HTTPS (DNS-over-HTTPS) in wire format (:rfc:`1035#section-4.2.1`). + It is also possible to specify URL=\[authority\]\[/path\] where request + will be sent to. Any leading scheme and authority indicator (i.e. //) are ignored. + Authority might also be specified as the *server* (using the parameter `@`). + If *path* is specified and *authority* is missing, then the *server* + is used as authority together with the specified *path*. + Library *libnghttp2* is required. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **https-get** + Use HTTPS with HTTP/GET method instead of the default HTTP/POST method. + Library *libnghttp2* is required. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **quic** + Use QUIC (DNS-over-QUIC). + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **nsid** + Request the nameserver identifier (NSID). + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **bufsize**\ =\ *B* + Set EDNS buffer size in bytes (default is 4096 bytes). + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **padding**\[\ =\ *B*\] + Use EDNS(0) padding option to pad queries, optionally to a specific + size. The default is to pad queries with a sensible amount when using + +tls, and not to pad at all when queries are sent without TLS. With + no argument (i.e., just +padding) pad every query with a sensible + amount regardless of the use of TLS. With +nopadding, never pad. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **alignment**\[\ =\ *B*\] + Align the query to B\-byte-block message using the EDNS(0) padding option + (default is no or 128 if no argument is specified). + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **subnet**\ =\ *SUBN* + Set EDNS(0) client subnet SUBN=addr/prefix. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **edns**\[\ =\ *N*\] + Use EDNS version (default is 0). + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **timeout**\ =\ *T* + Set the wait-for-reply interval in seconds (default is 5 seconds). This timeout + applies to each query attempt. Zero value or *notimeout* is interpreted as + infinity. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **retry**\ =\ *N* + Set the number (>=0) of UDP retries (default is 2). This doesn't apply to + AXFR/IXFR. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **expire** + Sets the EXPIRE EDNS option. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **cookie**\[\ =\ *HEX*\] + Attach EDNS(0) cookie to the query. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **badcookie** + Repeat a query with the correct cookie. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **ednsopt**\[\ =\ *CODE*\[:*HEX*\]\] + Send custom EDNS option. The *CODE* is EDNS option code in decimal, *HEX* + is an optional hex encoded string to use as EDNS option value. This argument + can be used multiple times. +noednsopt clears all EDNS options specified by + +ednsopt. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **proxy**\ =\ *SRC_ADDR*\[#\ *SRC_PORT*\]-*DST_ADDR*\[#\ *DST_PORT*\] + Add PROXYv2 header with the specified source and destination addresses to the query. + The default source port is 0 and destination port 53. + +**+**\ [\ **no**\ ]\ **json** + Use JSON for output encoding (RFC 8427). + +**+noidn** + Disable the IDN transformation to ASCII and vice versa. IDN support depends + on libidn availability during project building! If used in *common-settings*, + all IDN transformations are disabled. If used in the individual query *settings*, + transformation from ASCII is disabled on output for the particular query. Note + that IDN transformation does not preserve domain name letter case. + +Notes +----- + +Options **-k** and **-y** can not be used simultaneously. + +Dnssec-keygen keyfile format is not supported. Use :manpage:`keymgr(8)` instead. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +1. Get A records for example.com:: + + $ kdig example.com A + +2. Perform AXFR for zone example.com from the server 192.0.2.1:: + + $ kdig example.com -t AXFR @192.0.2.1 + +3. Get A records for example.com from 192.0.2.1 and reverse lookup for address + 2001:DB8::1 from 192.0.2.2. Both using the TCP protocol:: + + $ kdig +tcp example.com -t A @192.0.2.1 -x 2001:DB8::1 @192.0.2.2 + +4. Get SOA record for example.com, use TLS, use system certificates, check + for specified hostname, check for certificate pin, and print additional + debug info:: + + $ kdig -d @185.49.141.38 +tls-ca +tls-host=getdnsapi.net \ + +tls-pin=foxZRnIh9gZpWnl+zEiKa0EJ2rdCGroMWm02gaxSc9S= soa example.com + +5. DNS over HTTPS examples (various DoH implementations):: + + $ kdig @1.1.1.1 +https example.com. + $ kdig @193.17.47.1 +https=/doh example.com. + $ kdig @8.8.4.4 +https +https-get example.com. + $ kdig @8.8.8.8 +https +tls-hostname=dns.google +fastopen example.com. + +6. More queries share one DoT connection:: + + $ kdig @1.1.1.1 +tls +keepopen abc.example.com A mail.example.com AAAA + +Files +----- + +:file:`/etc/resolv.conf` + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`khost(1)`, :manpage:`knsupdate(1)`, :manpage:`keymgr(8)`. diff --git a/doc/man_keymgr.rst b/doc/man_keymgr.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..77f8e1a --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_keymgr.rst @@ -0,0 +1,292 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``keymgr`` – Key management utility +=================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`keymgr` [*config_option* *config_argument*] [*option*...] *zone_name* *command* *argument*... + +:program:`keymgr` [*config_option* *config_argument*] **-l** + +:program:`keymgr` **-t** *parameter*... + +Description +----------- + +The :program:`keymgr` utility serves for manual key management in Knot DNS server. + +Functions for DNSSEC keys and KASP (Key And Signature Policy) +management are provided. + +The DNSSEC and KASP configuration is stored in a so called KASP database. +The database is backed by LMDB. + +Config options +.............. + +**-c**, **--config** *file* + Use a textual configuration file (default is :file:`@config_dir@/knot.conf`). + +**-C**, **--confdb** *directory* + Use a binary configuration database directory (default is :file:`@storage_dir@/confdb`). + The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default + configuration file. + +**-D**, **--dir** *path* + Use specified KASP database path and default configuration. + +Options +....... + +**-t**, **--tsig** *tsig_name* [*tsig_algorithm* [*tsig_bits*]] + Generates a TSIG key. TSIG algorithm can be specified by string (default: hmac-sha256), + bit length of the key by number (default: optimal length given by algorithm). The generated + TSIG key is only displayed on `stdout`: the command does not create a file, nor include the + key in a keystore. + +**-e**, **--extended** + Extended output (listing of keys with full description). + +**-j**, **--json** + Print the zones or keys in JSON format. + +**-l**, **--list** + Print the list of zones that have at least one key stored in the configured KASP + database. + +**-x**, **--mono** + Don't generate colorized output. + +**-X**, **--color** + Force colorized output in the normal mode. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +.. NOTE:: + Keymgr runs with the same user privileges as configured for :doc:`knotd<man_knotd>`. + For example, if keymgr is run as ``root``, but the configured :ref:`user<server_user>` + is ``knot``, it won't be able to read files (PEM files, KASP database, ...) readable + only by ``root``. + +Commands +........ + +**list** [*timestamp_format*] + Prints the list of key IDs and parameters of keys belonging to the zone. + +**generate** [*arguments*...] + Generates new DNSSEC key and stores it in KASP database. Prints the key ID. + This action takes some number of arguments (see below). Values for unspecified arguments are taken + from corresponding policy (if *-c* or *-C* options used) or from Knot policy defaults. + +**import-bind** *BIND_key_file* + Imports a BIND-style key into KASP database (converting it to PEM format). + Takes one argument: path to BIND key file (private or public, but both MUST exist). + +**import-pub** *BIND_pubkey_file* + Imports a public key into KASP database. This key won't be rolled over nor used for signing. + Takes one argument: path to BIND public key file. + +**import-pem** *PEM_file* [*arguments*...] + Imports a DNSSEC key from PEM file. The key parameters (same as for the generate action) need to be + specified (mainly algorithm, timers...) because they are not contained in the PEM format. + +**import-pkcs11** *key_id* [*arguments*...] + Imports a DNSSEC key from PKCS #11 storage. The key parameters (same as for the generate action) need to be + specified (mainly algorithm, timers...) because they are not available. In fact, no key + data is imported, only KASP database metadata is created. + +**nsec3-salt** [*new_salt*] + Prints the current NSEC3 salt used for signing. If *new_salt* is specified, the salt is overwritten. + The salt is printed and expected in hexadecimal, or dash if empty. + +**local-serial** [*new_serial*] + Print SOA serial stored in KASP database when using on-secondary DNSSEC signing. + If *new_serial* is specified, the serial is overwritten. After updating the serial, expire the zone + (**zone-purge +expire +zonefile +journal**) if the server is running, or remove corresponding zone file + and journal contents if the server is stopped. + +**master-serial** [*new_serial*] + Print SOA serial of the remote master stored in KASP database when using on-secondary DNSSEC signing. + If *new_serial* is specified, the serial is overwritten (not recommended). + +**set** *key_spec* [*arguments*...] + Changes a timing argument (or ksk/zsk) of an existing key to a new value. *Key_spec* is either the + key tag or a prefix of the key ID, with an optional *[id=|keytag=]* prefix; *arguments* + are like for **generate**, but just the related ones. + +**ds** [*key_spec*] + Generate DS record (all digest algorithms together) for specified key. *Key_spec* + is like for **set**, if unspecified, all KSKs are used. + +**dnskey** [*key_spec*] + Generate DNSKEY record for specified key. *Key_spec* + is like for **ds**, if unspecified, all KSKs are used. + +**delete** *key_spec* + Remove the specified key from zone. If the key was not shared, it is also deleted from keystore. + +**share** *key_ID* *zone_from* + Import a key (specified by full key ID) from another zone as shared. After this, the key is + owned by both zones equally. + +Commands related to Offline KSK feature +....................................... + +**pregenerate** [*timestamp-from*] *timestamp-to* + Pre-generate ZSKs for use with offline KSK, for the specified period starting from now or specified time. + This function also applies to non-offline KSK keys. + +**show-offline** [*timestamp-from*] [*timestamp-to*] + Print pre-generated offline key-related records for specified time interval. If *timestamp_to* + is omitted, it will be to infinity. If *timestamp-from* is omitted, it will start from the + beginning. + +**del-offline** *timestamp-from* *timestamp-to* + Delete pre-generated offline key-related records in specified time interval. + +**del-all-old** + Delete old keys that are in state 'removed'. This function also applies to + non-offline KSK keys. + +**generate-ksr** [*timestamp-from*] *timestamp-to* + Print to stdout KeySigningRequest based on pre-generated ZSKs for specified time period. + If *timestamp-from* is omitted, timestamp of the last offline records set is used + or now if no records available. + +**sign-ksr** *ksr_file* + Read KeySigningRequest from a text file, sign it using local keyset and print SignedKeyResponse to stdout. + +**validate-skr** *skr_file* + Read SignedKeyResponse from a text file and validate the RRSIGs in it if not corrupt. + +**import-skr** *skr_file* + Read SignedKeyResponse from a text file and import the signatures for later use in zone. If some + signatures have already been imported, they will be deleted for the period from beginning of the SKR + to infinity. + +Generate arguments +.................. + +Arguments are separated by space, each of them is in format 'name=value'. + +**algorithm** + Either an algorithm number (e.g. 14), or text name without dashes (e.g. ECDSAP384SHA384). + +**size** + Key length in bits. + +**ksk** + If set to **yes**, the key will be used for signing DNSKEY rrset. The generated key will also + have the Secure Entry Point flag set to 1. + +**zsk** + If set to **yes**, the key will be used for signing zone (except DNSKEY rrset). This flag can + be set concurrently with the **ksk** flag. + +**sep** + Overrides the standard setting of the Secure Entry Point flag. + +The following arguments are timestamps of key lifetime (see :ref:`DNSSEC Key states`): + +**pre_active** + Key started to be used for signing, not published (only for algorithm rollover). + +**publish** + Key published. + +**ready** + Key is waiting for submission (only for KSK). + +**active** + Key used for signing. + +**retire_active** + Key still used for signing, but another key is active (only for KSK or algorithm rollover). + +**retire** + Key still published, but no longer used for signing. + +**post_active** + Key no longer published, but still used for signing (only for algorithm rollover). + +**revoke** + Key revoked according to :rfc:`5011` trust anchor roll-over. + +**remove** + Key deleted. + +Timestamps +.......... + +0 + Zero timestamp means infinite future. + +*UNIX_time* + Positive number of seconds since 1970 UTC. + +*YYYYMMDDHHMMSS* + Date and time in this format without any punctuation. + +*relative_timestamp* + A sign character (**+**, **-**), a number, and an optional time unit + (**y**, **mo**, **d**, **h**, **mi**, **s**). The default unit is one second. + E.g. +1mi, -2mo. + +Output timestamp formats +........................ + +(none) + The timestamps are printed as UNIX timestamp. + +**human** + The timestamps are printed relatively to now using time units (e.g. -2y5mo, +1h13s). + +**iso** + The timestamps are printed in the ISO8601 format (e.g. 2016-12-31T23:59:00). + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +1. Generate new TSIG key:: + + $ keymgr -t my_name hmac-sha384 + +2. Generate new DNSSEC key:: + + $ keymgr example.com. generate algorithm=ECDSAP256SHA256 size=256 \ + ksk=true created=1488034625 publish=20170223205611 retire=+10mo remove=+1y + +3. Import a DNSSEC key from BIND:: + + $ keymgr example.com. import-bind ~/bind/Kharbinge4d5.+007+63089.key + +4. Configure key timing:: + + $ keymgr example.com. set 4208 active=+2mi retire=+4mi remove=+5mi + +5. Share a KSK from another zone:: + + $ keymgr example.com. share e687cf927029e9db7184d2ece6d663f5d1e5b0e9 another-zone.com. + +See Also +-------- + +:rfc:`6781` - DNSSEC Operational Practices. +:rfc:`7583` - DNSSEC Key Rollover Timing Considerations. + +:manpage:`knot.conf(5)`, +:manpage:`knotc(8)`, +:manpage:`knotd(8)`. diff --git a/doc/man_khost.rst b/doc/man_khost.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..76fa9c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_khost.rst @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``khost`` – Simple DNS lookup utility +===================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`khost` [*options*] *name* [*server*] + +Description +----------- + +This utility sends a DNS query for the *name* to the *server* and prints a reply +in more user-readable form. For more advanced DNS queries use :doc:`kdig<man_kdig>` +instead. + +Parameters +.......... + +*name* + Is a domain name that is to be looked up. If the *name* is IPv4 or IPv6 + address the PTR query type is used. + +*server* + Is a name or an address of the nameserver to send a query to. The address + can be specified using [address]:port notation. If no server is specified, + the servers from :file:`/etc/resolv.conf` are used. + +If no arguments are provided, :program:`khost` prints a short help. + +Options +....... + +**-4** + Use the IPv4 protocol only. + +**-6** + Use the IPv6 protocol only. + +**-a** + Send ANY query with verbose mode. + +**-d** + Enable debug messages. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-r** + Disable recursion. + +**-T** + Use the TCP protocol. + +**-v** + Enable verbose output. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +**-w** + Wait forever for the reply. + +**-c** *class* + Set the query class (e.g. CH, CLASS4). The default class is IN. + +**-t** *type* + Set the query type (e.g. NS, IXFR=12345, TYPE65535). The default is to send 3 + queries (A, AAAA and MX). + +**-R** *retries* + The number (>=0) of UDP retries to query a nameserver. The default is 1. + +**-W** *wait* + The time to wait for a reply in seconds. This timeout applies to each query + try. The default is 2 seconds. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +1. Get the A, AAAA and MX records for example.com:: + + $ khost example.com + +2. Get the reverse record for address 192.0.2.1:: + + $ khost 192.0.2.1 + +3. Perform a verbose zone transfer for zone example.com:: + + $ khost -t AXFR -v example.com + +Files +----- + +:file:`/etc/resolv.conf` + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`kdig(1)`, :manpage:`knsupdate(1)`. diff --git a/doc/man_kjournalprint.rst b/doc/man_kjournalprint.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0753ae3 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_kjournalprint.rst @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``kjournalprint`` – Knot DNS journal print utility +================================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`kjournalprint` [*config_option* *config_argument*] [*option*...] *zone_name* + +:program:`kjournalprint` [*config_option* *config_argument*] **-z** + +Description +----------- + +The program prints zone history stored in a journal database. As default, +changes are colored for terminal. + +Config options +.............. + +**-c**, **--config** *file* + Use a textual configuration file (default is :file:`@config_dir@/knot.conf`). + +**-C**, **--confdb** *directory* + Use a binary configuration database directory (default is :file:`@storage_dir@/confdb`). + The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default + configuration file. + +**-D**, **--dir** *path* + Use specified journal database path and default configuration. + +Options +....... + +**-z**, **--zone-list** + Instead of reading the journal, display the list of zones in the DB. + +**-l**, **--limit** *limit* + Limits the number of displayed changes. + +**-s**, **--serial** *soa* + Start at a specific SOA serial. + +**-H**, **--check** + Enable additional journal semantic checks during printing. + +**-d**, **--debug** + Debug mode brief output. + +**-x**, **--mono** + Don't generate colorized output. + +**-n**, **--no-color** + An alias for **-x**. Use of this option is deprecated, it will be removed in the future. + +**-X**, **--color** + Force colorized output. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +Parameters +.......... + +*zone_name* + A name of the zone to print the history for. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +Last (most recent) 5 changes without colors:: + + $ kjournalprint -nl 5 /var/lib/knot/journal example.com. + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`knotd(8)`, :manpage:`knot.conf(5)`. diff --git a/doc/man_knotc.rst b/doc/man_knotc.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b7d95e --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_knotc.rst @@ -0,0 +1,377 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``knotc`` – Knot DNS control utility +==================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`knotc` [*parameters*] *action* [*action_args*] + +Description +----------- + +This program controls a running `knotd` process using a socket. + +If an *action* is specified, it is performed and `knotc` exits, otherwise the program +is executed in the interactive mode. + +Options +....... + +**-c**, **--config** *file* + Use a textual configuration file (default is :file:`@config_dir@/knot.conf`). + +**-C**, **--confdb** *directory* + Use a binary configuration database directory (default is :file:`@storage_dir@/confdb`). + The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default + configuration file. + +**-m**, **--max-conf-size** *MiB* + Set maximum size of the configuration database + (default is @conf_mapsize@ MiB, maximum 10000 MiB). + +**-s**, **--socket** *path* + Use a control UNIX socket path (default is :file:`@run_dir@/knot.sock`). + +**-t**, **--timeout** *seconds* + Use a control timeout in seconds. Set to 0 for infinity (default is 60). + The control socket operations are also subject to the :ref:`timeout<control_timeout>` + parameter set on the server side in server's Control configuration section. + +**-b**, **--blocking** + Zone event trigger commands wait until the event is finished. Control timeout + is set to infinity if not forced by explicit timeout specification. + +**-e**, **--extended** + Show extended output (even empty items in zone status). + +**-f**, **--force** + Forced operation. Overrides some checks. + +**-x**, **--mono** + Don't generate colorized output. + +**-X**, **--color** + Force colorized output in extended output or to a pipe. + +**-v**, **--verbose** + Enable debug output. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +Actions +....... + +**status** [*detail*] + Check if the server is running. Details are **version** for the running + server version, **workers** for the numbers of worker threads, + or **configure** for the configure summary. + +**stop** + Stop the server if running. + +**reload** + Reload the server configuration and modified zone files. All open zone + transactions will be aborted! + +**stats** [*module*\ [\ **.**\ *counter*\ ]] + Show global statistics counter(s). To print also counters with value 0, use + force option. + +**zone-check** [*zone*...] + Test if the server can load the zone. Semantic checks are executed if enabled + in the configuration. If invoked with the force option, an error is returned + when semantic check warning appears. (*) + +**zone-status** [*zone*...] [*filter*] + Show the zone status. Filters are **+role**, **+serial**, **+transaction**, + **+events**, **+freeze**, and **+catalog**. Empty zone parameters are omitted, + unless the **--extended** option is used. A single dash in the output represents + an unset value. Automatic colorization can be overruled using the **--mono** and + **--color** options. + + The color code is: + *green* - zone acts as a master / *red* - zone acts as a slave, + *bold font (highlited)* - zone is active / *normal* - zone is empty, + *underscored* - zone is an interpreted catalog member. + +**zone-reload** [*zone*...] + Trigger a zone reload from a disk without checking its modification time. For + secondary zone, the refresh event from primary server(s) is scheduled; + for primary zone, the notify event to secondary server(s) is scheduled. An open + zone transaction will be aborted! If invoked with the force option, also zone + modules will be re-loaded, but blocking mode might not work reliably. (#) + +**zone-refresh** [*zone*...] + Trigger a check for the zone serial on the zone's primary server. If + the primary server has a newer zone, a transfer is scheduled. This command is + valid for secondary zones. (#) + +**zone-retransfer** [*zone*...] + Trigger a zone transfer from the zone's primary server. The server + doesn't check the serial of the primary server's zone. This command is valid + for secondary zones. (#) + +**zone-notify** [*zone*...] + Trigger a NOTIFY message to all configured remotes. This can help in cases + when previous NOTIFY had been lost or the secondary servers have been + offline. (#) + +**zone-flush** [*zone*...] [**+outdir** *directory*] + Trigger a zone journal flush to the configured zone file. If an output + directory is specified, the current zone is immediately dumped (in the + blocking mode) to a zone file in the specified directory. See + :ref:`Notes<notes>` below about the directory permissions. (#) + +**zone-backup** [*zone*...] **+backupdir** *directory* [*filter*...] + Trigger a zone data and metadata backup to a specified directory. + Available filters are **+zonefile**, **+journal**, **+timers**, **+kaspdb**, + **+catalog**, and their negative counterparts **+nozonefile**, **+nojournal**, + **+notimers**, **+nokaspdb**, and **+nocatalog**. With these filters set, + zone contents, zone's journal, zone related timers, zone related data in the + KASP database together with keys, and zone's catalog, respectively, are backed up, + or omitted from the backup. By default, filters **+zonefile**, **+timers**, + **+kaspdb**, **+catalog**, and **+nojournal** are set. Setting a filter + for an item doesn't change default settings for other items. If zone flushing + is disabled, original zone file is backed up instead of writing out zone + contents to a file. See :ref:`Notes<notes>` below about the directory + permissions. (#) + +**zone-restore** [*zone*...] **+backupdir** *directory* [*filter*...] + Trigger a zone data and metadata restore from a specified backup directory. + Optional filters are equivalent to the same filters of **zone-backup**. + Restore from backups created by Knot DNS releases prior to 3.1 is possible + with the force option. See :ref:`Notes<notes>` below about the directory + permissions. (#) + +**zone-sign** [*zone*...] + Trigger a DNSSEC re-sign of the zone. Existing signatures will be dropped. + This command is valid for zones with DNSSEC signing enabled. (#) + +**zone-keys-load** [*zone*...] + Trigger a load of DNSSEC keys and other signing material from KASP database + (which might have been altered manually). If suitable, re-sign the zone + afterwards (keeping valid signatures intact). (#) + +**zone-key-rollover** *zone* *key_type* + Trigger immediate key rollover. Publish new key and start a key rollover, + even when the key has a lifetime to go. Key type can be **ksk** (also for CSK) + or **zsk**. This command is valid for zones with DNSSEC signing and automatic + key management enabled. Note that complete key rollover consists of several steps + and the blocking mode relates to the initial one only! (#) + +**zone-ksk-submitted** *zone*... + Use when the zone's KSK rollover is in submission phase. By calling this command + the user confirms manually that the parent zone contains DS record for the new + KSK in submission phase and the old KSK can be retired. (#) + +**zone-freeze** [*zone*...] + Trigger a zone freeze. All running events will be finished and all new and pending + (planned) zone-changing events (load, refresh, update, flush, and DNSSEC signing) + will be held up until the zone is thawed. (#) + +**zone-thaw** [*zone*...] + Trigger dismissal of zone freeze. (#) + +**zone-xfr-freeze** [*zone*...] + Temporarily disable outgoing AXFR/IXFR for the zone(s). (#) + +**zone-xfr-thaw** [*zone*...] + Dismiss outgoing XFR freeze. (#) + +**zone-read** *zone* [*owner* [*type*]] + Get zone data that are currently being presented. + +**zone-begin** *zone*... + Begin a zone transaction. + +**zone-commit** *zone*... + Commit the zone transaction. All changes are applied to the zone. + +**zone-abort** *zone*... + Abort the zone transaction. All changes are discarded. + +**zone-diff** *zone* + Get zone changes within the transaction. + +**zone-get** *zone* [*owner* [*type*]] + Get zone data within the transaction. + +**zone-set** *zone* *owner* [*ttl*] *type* *rdata* + Add zone record within the transaction. The first record in a rrset + requires a ttl value specified. + +**zone-unset** *zone* *owner* [*type* [*rdata*]] + Remove zone data within the transaction. + +**zone-purge** *zone*... [**+orphan**] [*filter*...] + Purge zone data, zone file, journal, timers, and/or KASP data of specified zones. + Available filters are **+expire**, **+zonefile**, **+journal**, **+timers**, + **+kaspdb**, and **+catalog**. If no filter is specified, all filters are enabled. + If the zone is no longer configured, add **+orphan** parameter (zone file cannot + be purged in this case). When purging orphans, always check the server log for + possible errors. This command always requires the force option. (#) + +**zone-stats** *zone* [*module*\ [\ **.**\ *counter*\ ]] + Show zone statistics counter(s). To print also counters with value 0, use + force option. + +**conf-init** + Initialize the configuration database. If the database doesn't exist yet, + execute this command as an intended user to ensure the server is permitted + to access the database (e.g. *sudo -u knot knotc conf-init*). (*) + +**conf-check** + Check the server configuration. (*) + +**conf-import** *filename* + Import a configuration file into the configuration database. If the database + doesn't exist yet, execute this command as an intended user to ensure the server + is permitted to access the database (e.g. *sudo -u knot knotc conf-import ...*). + Also ensure the server is not using the configuration database at the same time! (*) + +**conf-export** [*filename*] + Export the configuration database into a config file or stdout. (*) + +**conf-list** [*item*] + List the configuration database sections or section items. + +**conf-read** [*item*] + Read the item from the active configuration database. + +**conf-begin** + Begin a writing configuration database transaction. Only one transaction + can be opened at a time. + +**conf-commit** + Commit the configuration database transaction. + +**conf-abort** + Rollback the configuration database transaction. + +**conf-diff** [*item*] + Get the item difference in the transaction. + +**conf-get** [*item*] + Get the item data from the transaction. + +**conf-set** *item* [*data*...] + Set the item data in the transaction. + +**conf-unset** [*item*] [*data*...] + Unset the item data in the transaction. + +.. _notes: + +Notes +..... + +Empty or **--** *zone* parameter means all zones or all zones with a transaction. + +Use **@** *owner* to denote the zone name. + +Type *item* parameter in the form of *section*\ [**[**\ *id*\ **]**\ ][**.**\ *name*]. + +(*) indicates a local operation which requires a configuration. + +(\#) indicates an optionally blocking operation. + +The **-b** and **-f** options can be placed right after the command name. + +Responses returned by `knotc` commands depend on the mode: + +- In the blocking mode, `knotc` reports if an error occurred during processing + of the command by the server. If an error is reported, a more detailed information + about the failure can usually be found in the server log. + +- In the non-blocking (default) mode, `knotc` doesn't report processing errors. + The `OK` response to triggering commands means that the command has been successfully + sent to the server. To verify if the operation succeeded, it's necessary to + check the server log. + +Actions **zone-flush**, **zone-backup**, and **zone-restore** are carried out by +the `knotd` process. The directory specified must be accessible to the user account +that `knotd` runs under and if the directory already exists, its permissions must be +appropriate for that user account. + +Interactive mode +................ + +The utility provides interactive mode with basic line editing functionality, +command completion, and command history. + +Interactive mode behavior can be customized in `~/.editrc`. Refer to +:manpage:`editrc(5)` for details. + +Command history is saved in `~/.knotc_history`. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +Reload the whole server configuration +..................................... + +:: + + $ knotc reload + +Flush the example.com and example.org zones +........................................... + +:: + + $ knotc zone-flush example.com example.org + +Get the current server configuration +.................................... + +:: + + $ knotc conf-read server + +Get the list of the current zones +................................. + +:: + + $ knotc conf-read zone.domain + +Get the primary servers for the example.com zone +................................................ + +:: + + $ knotc conf-read 'zone[example.com].master' + +Add example.org zone with a zonefile location +............................................. + +:: + + $ knotc conf-begin + $ knotc conf-set 'zone[example.org]' + $ knotc conf-set 'zone[example.org].file' '/var/zones/example.org.zone' + $ knotc conf-commit + +Get the SOA record for each configured zone +........................................... + +:: + + $ knotc zone-read -- @ SOA + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`knotd(8)`, :manpage:`knot.conf(5)`, :manpage:`editrc(5)`. diff --git a/doc/man_knotd.rst b/doc/man_knotd.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0dd5a66 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_knotd.rst @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``knotd`` – Knot DNS server daemon +================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`knotd` [*parameters*] + +Description +----------- + +Knot DNS is a high-performance authoritative DNS server. The `knotd` program is +the DNS server daemon. + +Options +....... + +**-c**, **--config** *file* + Use a textual configuration file (default is :file:`@config_dir@/knot.conf`). + +**-C**, **--confdb** *directory* + Use a binary configuration database directory (default is :file:`@storage_dir@/confdb`). + The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default + configuration file. + +**-m**, **--max-conf-size** *MiB* + Set maximum size of the configuration database + (default is @conf_mapsize@ MiB, maximum 10000 MiB). + +**-s**, **--socket** *path* + Use a remote control UNIX socket path (default is :file:`@run_dir@/knot.sock`). + +**-d**, **--daemonize** [*directory*] + Run the server as a daemon. New root directory may be specified + (default is :file:`/`). + +**-v**, **--verbose** + Enable debug output. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +Signals +....... + +If the `knotd` process receives a SIGHUP signal, it reloads its configuration and +reopens the log files, if they are configured. When `knotd` receives a SIGUSR1 +signal, it reloads all configured zones. Upon receiving a SIGINT signal, `knotd` +exits. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`knot.conf(5)`, :manpage:`knotc(8)`, :manpage:`keymgr(8)`, +:manpage:`kjournalprint(8)`. diff --git a/doc/man_knsec3hash.rst b/doc/man_knsec3hash.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7684e90 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_knsec3hash.rst @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``knsec3hash`` – NSEC hash computation utility +============================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`knsec3hash` *salt* *algorithm* *iterations* *name* + +:program:`knsec3hash` *algorithm* *flags* *iterations* *salt* *name* + +Description +----------- + +This utility generates a NSEC3 hash for a given domain name and parameters of NSEC3 hash. + +Parameters +.......... + +*salt* + Specifies a binary salt encoded as a hexadecimal string. + +*algorithm* + Specifies a hashing algorithm by number. Currently, the only supported algorithm is SHA-1 (number 1). + +*iterations* + Specifies the number of additional iterations of the hashing algorithm. + +*name* + Specifies the domain name to be hashed. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +:: + + $ knsec3hash 1 0 10 c01dcafe knot-dns.cz + 7PTVGE7QV67EM61ROS9238P5RAKR2DM7 (salt=c01dcafe, hash=1, iterations=10) + +:: + + $ knsec3hash - 1 0 net + A1RT98BS5QGC9NFI51S9HCI47ULJG6JH (salt=-, hash=1, iterations=0) + +See Also +-------- + +:rfc:`5155` – DNS Security (DNSSEC) Hashed Authenticated Denial of Existence. + +:manpage:`knotc(8)`, :manpage:`knotd(8)`. diff --git a/doc/man_knsupdate.rst b/doc/man_knsupdate.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..552a00c --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_knsupdate.rst @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``knsupdate`` – Dynamic DNS update utility +========================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`knsupdate` [*options*] [*filename*] + +Description +----------- + +This utility sends Dynamic DNS update messages to a DNS server. Update content +is read from a file (if the parameter *filename* is given) or from the standard +input. + +The format of updates is textual and is made up of commands. Every command is +placed on the separate line of the input. Lines starting with a semicolon are +comments and are not processed. + +Options +....... + +**-d** + Enable debug messages. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-k** *keyfile* + Use the TSIG key stored in a file *keyfile* to authenticate the request. The + file should contain the key in the same format, which is accepted by the + **-y** option. + +**-p** *port* + Set the port to use for connections to the server (if not explicitly specified + in the update). The default is 53. + +**-r** *retries* + The number of retries for UDP requests. The default is 3. + +**-t** *timeout* + The total timeout (for all UDP update tries) of the update request in seconds. + The default is 12. If set to zero, the timeout is infinite. + +**-v** + Use a TCP connection. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +**-y** [*alg*:]\ *name*:*key* + Use the TSIG key with a name *name* to authenticate the request. The *alg* + part specifies the algorithm (the default is hmac-sha256) and *key* specifies + the shared secret encoded in Base64. + +Commands +........ + +**server** *name* [*port*] + Specifies a receiving server of the dynamic update message. The *name* parameter + can be either a host name or an IP address. If the *port* is not specified, + the default port is used. The default port value can be controlled using + the **-p** program option. + +**local** *address* [*port*] + Specifies outgoing *address* and *port*. If no local is specified, the + address and port are set by the system automatically. The default port number + is 0. + +**zone** *name* + Specifies that all updates are done within a zone *name*. The zone name doesn't + have a default and must be set explicitly. + +**origin** *name* + Specifies fully qualified domain name suffix which is appended to non-fqd + owners in update commands. The default is the terminal label (**.**). + +**class** *name* + Sets *name* as the default class for all updates. If not used, the default + class is IN. + +**ttl** *value* + Sets *value* as the default TTL (in seconds). If not used, the default value + is 3600. + +**key** [*alg*:]\ *name* *key* + Specifies the TSIG *key* named *name* to authenticate the request. An optional + *alg* algorithm can be specified. This command has the same effect as + the program option **-y**. + +[**prereq**] **nxdomain** *name* + Adds a prerequisite for a non-existing record owned by *name*. + +[**prereq**] **yxdomain** *name* + Adds a prerequisite for an existing record owned by *name*. + +[**prereq**] **nxrrset** *name* [*class*] *type* + Adds a prerequisite for a non-existing record of the *type* owned by *name*. + Internet *class* is expected. + +[**prereq**] **yxrrset** *name* [*class*] *type* [*data*] + Adds a prerequisite for an existing record of the *type* owned by *name* + with optional *data*. Internet *class* is expected. + +[**update**] **add** *name* [*ttl*] [*class*] *type* *data* + Adds a request to add a new resource record into the zone. + Please note that if the *name* is not fully qualified domain name, the + current origin name is appended to it. + +[**update**] **del**\[**ete**] *name* [*ttl*] [*class*] [*type*] [*data*] + Adds a request to remove all (or matching *class*, *type* or *data*) + resource records from the zone. There is the same requirement for the *name* + parameter as in **update add** command. The *ttl* item is ignored. + +**show** + Displays current content of the update message. + +**send** + Sends the current update message and cleans the list of updates. + +**answer** + Displays the last answer from the server. + +**debug** + Enable debugging. This command has the same meaning as the **-d** program option. + +**exit** + End the program. + +Notes +----- + +Options **-k** and **-y** can not be used simultaneously. + +Dnssec-keygen keyfile format is not supported. Use :manpage:`keymgr(8)` instead. + +Zone name/server guessing is not supported if the zone name/server is not specified. + +Empty line doesn't send the update. + +Interactive mode +................ + +The utility provides interactive mode with basic line editing functionality, +command completion, and command history. + +Interactive mode behavior can be customized in `~/.editrc`. Refer to +:manpage:`editrc(5)` for details. + +Command history is saved in `~/.knsupdate_history`. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +1. Send one update of the zone example.com to the server 192.168.1.1. The update + contains two new records:: + + $ knsupdate + knsupdate> server 192.168.1.1 + knsupdate> zone example.com. + knsupdate> origin example.com. + knsupdate> ttl 3600 + knsupdate> add test1.example.com. 7200 A 192.168.2.2 + knsupdate> add test2 TXT "hello" + knsupdate> show + knsupdate> send + knsupdate> answer + knsupdate> exit + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`kdig(1)`, :manpage:`khost(1)`, :manpage:`keymgr(8)`, :manpage:`editrc(5)`. diff --git a/doc/man_kxdpgun.rst b/doc/man_kxdpgun.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bb6c917 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_kxdpgun.rst @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``kxdpgun`` – DNS benchmarking tool +=================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`kxdpgun` [*options*] **-i** *filename* *targetIP* + +Description +----------- + +Powerful generator of DNS traffic, sending and receiving packets through XDP. + +Queries are generated according to a textual file which is read sequentially +in a loop until a configured duration elapses. The order of queries is not +guaranteed. Responses are received (unless disabled) and counted, but not +checked against queries. + +The number of parallel threads is autodetected according to the number of queues +configured for the network interface. + +Options +....... + +**-t**, **--duration** *seconds* + Duration of traffic generation, specified as a decimal number in seconds + (default is 5.0). + +**-T**, **--tcp**\[\ **=**\ *debug_mode*\] + Send queries over TCP. See the list of optional debug modes below. + +**-U**, **--quic**\[\ **=**\ *debug_mode*\] + Send queries over QUIC. See the list of optional debug modes below. + +**-Q**, **--qps** *queries* + Number of queries-per-second (approximately) to be sent (default is 1000). + The program is not optimized for low speeds at which it may lose + communication packets. The recommended minimum speed is 2 packets per thread + (Rx/Tx queue). + +**-b**, **--batch** *size* + Send more queries in a batch. Improves QPS but may affect the counterpart's + packet loss (default is 10 for UDP and 1 for TCP/QUIC). + +**-r**, **--drop** + Drop incoming responses. Improves QPS, but disables response statistics. + +**-p**, **--port** *number* + Remote destination port (default is 53 for UDP/TCP, 853 for QUIC). + +**-F**, **--affinity** *cpu_spec* + CPU affinity for all threads specified in the format [<cpu_start>][s<cpu_step>], + where <cpu_start> is the CPU ID for the first thread and <cpu_step> is the + CPU ID increment for next thread (default is 0s1). + +**-i**, **--infile** *filename* + Path to a file with query templates. + +**-I**, **--interface** *interface* + Network interface for outgoing communication. This can be useful in situations + when the interfaces are in a bond for example. + +**-l**, **--local** *localIP*\ [**/**\ *prefix*] + Override the auto-detected source IP address. If an address range is specified + instead, various IPs from the range will be used for different queries uniformly + (address range not supported in the QUIC mode). + +*targetIP* + The IPv4 or IPv6 address of remote destination. + +**-L**, **--mac-local** + Override auto-detected local MAC address. + +**-R**, **--mac-remote** + Override auto-detected remote MAC address. + +**-v**, **--vlan** *id* + Add VLAN 802.1Q header with the given id. VLAN offloading should be disabled. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +Queries file format +................... + +Each line describes a query in the form: + +*query_name* *query_type* [*flags*] + +Where *query_name* is a domain name to be queried, *query_type* is a record type +name, and *flags* is a single character: + +**E** Send query with EDNS. + +**D** Request DNSSEC (EDNS + DO flag). + +TCP/QUIC debug modes +.................... + +**0** + Perform full handshake for all connections (QUIC only). + +**1** + Just send SYN (Initial) and receive SYN-ACK (Handshake). + +**2** + Perform TCP/QUIC handshake and don't send anything, allow close initiated by counterpart. + +**3** + Perform TCP/QUIC handshake and don't react further. + +**5** + Send incomplete query (N-1 bytes) and don't react further. + +**7** + Send query and don't ACK the response or anything further. + +**8** + Don't close the connection and ignore close by counterpart (TCP only). + +**9** + Operate normally except for not ACKing the final FIN+ACK (TCP only). + +Signals +....... + +Sending USR1 signal to a running process triggers current statistics dump +to the standard output. + +Notes +----- + +Linux kernel 4.18+ is required. + +The utility has to be executed under root or with these capabilities: +CAP_NET_RAW, CAP_NET_ADMIN, CAP_SYS_ADMIN, CAP_IPC_LOCK, and CAP_SYS_RESOURCE +(Linux < 5.11). + +The utility allocates source UDP/TCP ports from the range 2000-65535. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +Examples +-------- + +Manually created queries file:: + + abc6.example.com. AAAA + nxdomain.example.com. A + notzone. A + a.example.com. NS E + ab.example.com. A D + abcd.example.com. DS D + +Queries file generated from a zone file (Knot DNS format):: + + cat ZONE_FILE | awk "{print \$1,\$3}" | grep -E "(NS|DS|A|AAAA|PTR|MX|SOA)$" | sort -u -R > queries.txt + +Basic usage:: + + # kxdpgun -i ~/queries.txt 2001:DB8::1 + +*Using UDP with increased batch size*:: + + # kxdpgun -t 20 -Q 1000000 -i ~/queries.txt -b 20 -p 8853 192.0.2.1 + +*Using TCP*:: + + # kxdpgun -t 20 -Q 100000 -i ~/queries.txt -T -p 8853 192.0.2.1 + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`kdig(1)`. diff --git a/doc/man_kzonecheck.rst b/doc/man_kzonecheck.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b81bcd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_kzonecheck.rst @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``kzonecheck`` – Knot DNS zone file checking tool +================================================= + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`kzonecheck` [*options*] *filename* + +Description +----------- + +The utility checks zone file syntax and runs semantic checks on the zone +content. The executed checks are the same as the checks run by the Knot +DNS server. + +Please, refer to the ``semantic-checks`` configuration option in +:manpage:`knot.conf(5)` for the full list of available semantic checks. + +Parameters +.......... + +*filename* + Path to the zone file to be checked. For reading from **stdin** use **/dev/stdin** + or just **-**. + +Options +....... + +**-o**, **--origin** *origin* + Zone origin. If not specified, the origin is determined from the file name + (possibly removing the ``.zone`` suffix). + +**-d**, **--dnssec** **on**\|\ **off** + Also check DNSSEC-related records. The default is to decide based on the + existence of a RRSIG for SOA. + +**-t**, **--time** *time* + Current time specification. Use UNIX timestamp, YYYYMMDDHHmmSS + format, or [+/-]\ *time*\ [unit] format, where unit can be **Y**, **M**, + **D**, **h**, **m**, or **s**. Default is current UNIX timestamp. + +**-v**, **--verbose** + Enable debug output. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`knotd(8)`, :manpage:`knot.conf(5)`. diff --git a/doc/man_kzonesign.rst b/doc/man_kzonesign.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9143f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/man_kzonesign.rst @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +.. highlight:: console + +``kzonesign`` – DNSSEC signing utility +====================================== + +Synopsis +-------- + +:program:`kzonesign` [*config_option* *config_argument*] [*options*] *zone_name* + +Description +----------- + +This utility reads the zone's zone file, signs the zone according to given +configuration, and writes the signed zone file back. An alternative mode +is DNSSEC validation of the given zone. The signing or validation +can run in parallel if enabled in the configuration (see policy.signing-threads +and zone.adjust-threads). + +Config options +.............. + +**-c**, **--config** *file* + Use a textual configuration file (default is :file:`@config_dir@/knot.conf`). + +**-C**, **--confdb** *directory* + Use a binary configuration database directory (default is :file:`@storage_dir@/confdb`). + The default configuration database, if exists, has a preference to the default + configuration file. + +Options +....... + +**-o**, **--outdir** *dir_name* + Write the output zone file to the specified directory instead of the configured one. + +**-r**, **--rollover** + Allow key roll-overs and NSEC3 re-salt. In order to finish possible KSK submission, + set the KSK's **active** timestamp to now (**+0**) using :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>`. + +**-v**, **--verify** + Instead of (re-)signing the zone, just verify that the zone is correctly signed. + +**-t**, **--time** *timestamp* + Sign/verify the zone (and roll the keys if necessary) as if it was at the time + specified by timestamp. + +**-h**, **--help** + Print the program help. + +**-V**, **--version** + Print the program version. + +Parameters +.......... + +*zone_name* + A name of the zone to be signed. + +Exit values +----------- + +Exit status of 0 means successful operation. Any other exit status indicates +an error. + +See Also +-------- + +:manpage:`knot.conf(5)`, :manpage:`keymgr(8)`. diff --git a/doc/migration.rst b/doc/migration.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e9ec1d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/migration.rst @@ -0,0 +1,380 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Migration: + +********* +Migration +********* + +.. _Upgrade 2.4.x to 2.5.x: + +Upgrade 2.4.x to 2.5.x +====================== + +This chapter describes some steps necessary after upgrading Knot DNS from +version 2.4.x to 2.5.x. + +.. _Building changes: + +Building changes +---------------- + +The ``--enable-dnstap`` configure option now enables the dnstap support in +:doc:`kdig<man_kdig>` only! To build the dnstap query module, ``--with-module-dnstap`` +have to be used. + +Since Knot DNS version 2.5.0 each query module can be configured to be: + +- disabled: ``--with-module-``\ MODULE_NAME\ ``=no`` +- embedded: ``--with-module-``\ MODULE_NAME\ ``=yes`` +- external: ``--with-module-``\ MODULE_NAME\ ``=shared`` (excluding + ``dnsproxy`` and ``onlinesign``) + +The ``--with-timer-mapsize`` configure option was replaced with the runtime +``template.max-timer-db-size`` configuration option. + +.. _KASP DB migration: + +KASP DB migration +----------------- + +Knot DNS version 2.4.x and earlier uses JSON files to store DNSSEC keys metadata, +one for each zone. 2.5.x versions store those in binary format in a LMDB, all zones +together. The migration is possible with the +`pykeymgr <https://gitlab.nic.cz/knot/knot-dns/blob/2.6/src/utils/pykeymgr/pykeymgr.in>`_ +script:: + + $ pykeymgr -i path/to/keydir + +The path to KASP DB directory is configuration-dependent, usually it is the ``keys`` +subdirectory in the zone storage. + +In rare installations, the JSON files might be spread across more directories. In such +case, it is necessary to put them together into one directory and migrate at once. + +.. _Configuration changes 2.5: + +Configuration changes +--------------------- + +It is no longer possible to configure KASP DB per zone or in a non-default +template. Ensure just one common KASP DB configuration in the default +template. + +As Knot DNS version 2.5.0 brings dynamically loaded modules, some modules +were renamed for technical reasons. So it is necessary to rename all +occurrences (module section names and references from zones or templates) +of the following module names in the configuration:: + + mod-online-sign -> mod-onlinesign + + mod-synth-record -> mod-synthrecord + +.. _Upgrade 2.5.x to 2.6.x: + +Upgrade 2.5.x to 2.6.x +====================== + +Upgrading from Knot DNS version 2.5.x to 2.6.x is almost seamless. + +.. _Configuration changes 2.6: + +Configuration changes +--------------------- + +The ``dsa`` and ``dsa-nsec3-sha1`` algorithm values are no longer supported +by the :ref:`policy_algorithm` option. + +The ``ixfr-from-differences`` zone/template option was deprecated in favor of +the :ref:`zone_zonefile-load` option. + +.. _Upgrade 2.6.x to 2.7.x: + +Upgrade 2.6.x to 2.7.x +====================== + +Upgrading from Knot DNS version 2.6.x to 2.7.x is seamless if no obsolete +configuration or module rosedb is used. + +.. _Upgrade 2.7.x to 2.8.x: + +Upgrade 2.7.x to 2.8.x +====================== + +Upgrading from Knot DNS version 2.7.x to 2.8.x is seamless. + +However, if the previous version was migrated (possibly indirectly) +from version 2.5.x, the format of the keys stored in +Keys And Signature Policy Database +is no longer compatible and needs to be updated. + +The easiest ways to update how keys are stored in KASP DB is to modify +with Keymgr version 2.7.x +some of each key's parameters in an undamaging way, e.g.:: + + $ keymgr example.com. list + $ keymgr example.com. set <keyTag> created=1 + $ keymgr example.com. set <keyTag2> created=1 + ... + +.. _Upgrade 2.8.x to 2.9.x: + +Upgrade 2.8.x to 2.9.x +====================== + +Upgrading from Knot DNS version 2.8.x to 2.9.x is almost seamless but check +the following changes first. + +Configuration changes +--------------------- + +- Imperfect runtime reconfiguration of :ref:`server_udp-workers`, + :ref:`server_tcp-workers`, and :ref:`server_listen` + is no longer supported. + +- Replaced options (with backward compatibility): + + .. csv-table:: + :header: Old section, Old item name, New section, New item name + :widths: 35, 60, 35, 60 + + :ref:`server<Server section>` , ``tcp-reply-timeout`` [s] , :ref:`server<Server section>` , :ref:`server_tcp-remote-io-timeout` [ms] + :ref:`server<Server section>` , ``max-tcp-clients`` , :ref:`server<Server section>` , :ref:`server_tcp-max-clients` + :ref:`server<Server section>` , ``max-udp-payload`` , :ref:`server<Server section>` , :ref:`server_udp-max-payload` + :ref:`server<Server section>` , ``max-ipv4-udp-payload`` , :ref:`server<Server section>` , :ref:`server_udp-max-payload-ipv4` + :ref:`server<Server section>` , ``max-ipv6-udp-payload`` , :ref:`server<Server section>` , :ref:`server_udp-max-payload-ipv6` + :ref:`template<Template section>` , ``journal-db`` , :ref:`database<Database section>` , :ref:`database_journal-db` + :ref:`template<Template section>` , ``journal-db-mode`` , :ref:`database<Database section>` , :ref:`database_journal-db-mode` + :ref:`template<Template section>` , ``max-journal-db-size`` , :ref:`database<Database section>` , :ref:`database_journal-db-max-size` + :ref:`template<Template section>` , ``kasp-db`` , :ref:`database<Database section>` , :ref:`database_kasp-db` + :ref:`template<Template section>` , ``max-kasp-db-size`` , :ref:`database<Database section>` , :ref:`database_kasp-db-max-size` + :ref:`template<Template section>` , ``timer-db`` , :ref:`database<Database section>` , :ref:`database_timer-db` + :ref:`template<Template section>` , ``max-timer-db-size`` , :ref:`database<Database section>` , :ref:`database_timer-db-max-size` + :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , ``max-journal-usage`` , :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , :ref:`zone_journal-max-usage` + :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , ``max-journal-depth`` , :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , :ref:`zone_journal-max-depth` + :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , ``max-zone-size`` , :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , :ref:`zone_zone-max-size` + :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , ``max-refresh-interval`` , :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , :ref:`zone_refresh-max-interval` + :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , ``min-refresh-interval`` , :ref:`zone<Zone section>` , :ref:`zone_refresh-min-interval` + +- Removed options (no backward compatibility): + + - ``server.tcp-handshake-timeout`` + - ``zone.request-edns-option`` + +- New default values for: + + - :ref:`server_tcp-workers` + - :ref:`server_tcp-max-clients` + - :ref:`server_udp-max-payload` + - :ref:`server_udp-max-payload-ipv4` + - :ref:`server_udp-max-payload-ipv6` + +- New DNSSEC policy option :ref:`policy_rrsig-pre-refresh` may affect + configuration validity, which is ``rrsig-refresh + rrsig-pre-refresh < rrsig-lifetime`` + +Miscellaneous changes +--------------------- + +- Memory use estimation via ``knotc zone-memstats`` was removed +- Based on `<https://tools.ietf.org/html/draft-ietf-dnsop-server-cookies>`_ + the module :ref:`DNS Cookies<mod-cookies>` was updated to be interoperable +- Number of open files limit is set to 1048576 in upstream packages + +.. _Upgrade 2.9.x to 3.0.x: + +Upgrade 2.9.x to 3.0.x +====================== + +Knot DNS version 3.0.x is functionally compatible with 2.9.x with the following +exceptions. + +ACL +--- + +Configuration option :ref:`acl_update-owner-name` is newly FQDN-sensitive. +It means that values ``a.example.com`` and ``a.example.com.`` are not equivalent. + +Module synthrecord +------------------ + +:ref:`Reverse IPv6 address shortening<mod-synthrecord_reverse-short>` is enabled by default. +For example, the module generates:: + + dynamic-2620-0-b61-100--1.test. 400 IN AAAA 2620:0:b61:100::1 + +instead of:: + + dynamic-2620-0000-0b61-0100-0000-0000-0000-0001.test. 400 IN AAAA 2620:0:b61:100::1 + +Query module API change +----------------------- + +The following functions require additional parameter (thread id – ``qdata->params->thread_id``) +on the second position:: + + knotd_mod_stats_incr() + knotd_mod_stats_decr() + knotd_mod_stats_store() + +Building notes +-------------- + +- The embedded library *LMDB* is no longer part of the source code. Almost every + modern operating system has a sufficient version of this library. +- DoH support in kdig requires optional library *libnghttp2*. +- XDP support on Linux requires optional library *libbpf >= 0.0.6*. If not available, + an embedded library can be used via ``--enable-xdp=yes`` configure option. + +.. _Upgrade 3.0.x to 3.1.x: + +Upgrade 3.0.x to 3.1.x +====================== + +Knot DNS version 3.1.x is functionally compatible with 3.0.x with the following +exceptions. + +Configuration changes +--------------------- + +- Automatic SOA serial incrementation (``zonefile-load: difference-no-serial``) + requires having full zone stored in the journal (``journal-content: all``). + This change is necessary for reliable operation. + +- Replaced options (with backward compatibility): + + .. csv-table:: + :header: Old section, Old item name, New section, New item name + :widths: 40, 60, 40, 60 + + :ref:`server<Server section>`, ``listen-xdp``, :ref:`xdp<XDP section>`, :ref:`xdp_listen` + +- Ignored obsolete options (with a notice log): + + - ``server.max-zone-size`` + - ``server.max-journal-depth`` + - ``server.max-journal-usage`` + - ``server.max-refresh-interval`` + - ``server.min-refresh-interval`` + - ``server.max-ipv4-udp-payload`` + - ``server.max-ipv6-udp-payload`` + - ``server.max-udp-payload`` + - ``server.max-tcp-clients`` + - ``server.tcp-reply-timeout`` + - ``template.journal-db`` + - ``template.kasp-db`` + - ``template.timer-db`` + - ``template.max-journal-db-size`` + - ``template.max-timer-db-size`` + - ``template.max-kasp-db-size`` + - ``template.journal-db-mode`` + +- Silently ignored obsolete options: + + - ``server.tcp-handshake-timeout`` + - ``zone.disable-any`` + +Zone backup and restore +----------------------- + +The online backup format has changed slightly since 3.0 version. For zone-restore +from backups in the previous format, it's necessary to set the *-f* option. +Offline restore procedure of zone files from online backups is different than +what it was before. The details are described in :ref:`Data and metadata backup`. + +Building notes +-------------- + +- The configure option ``--enable-xdp=yes`` has slightly changed its semantics. + It first tries to find an external library *libbpf*. If it's not detected, + the embedded one is used instead. +- The kxdpgun tool also depends on library *libmnl*. + +Packaging +--------- + +Users who use module :ref:`geoip<mod-geoip>` or :ref:`dnstap<mod-dnstap>` might +need installing an additional package with the module. + +.. _Upgrade 3.1.x to 3.2.x: + +Upgrade 3.1.x to 3.2.x +====================== + +Knot DNS version 3.2.x is functionally compatible with 3.1.x with the following +exceptions. + +Configuration changes +--------------------- + +- Ignored obsolete option (with a notice log): + + - ``server.listen-xdp`` + +Utilities: +---------- + +- :doc:`knotc<man_knotc>` prints simplified zones status by default. Use ``-e`` + for full output. +- :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>` uses the brief key listing mode by default. Use ``-e`` + for full output. +- :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>` parameter ``-d`` was renamed to ``-D``. +- :doc:`kjournalprint<man_kjournalprint>` parameter ``-c`` was renamed to ``-H``. + +Packaging +--------- + +- Linux distributions Debian 9 and Ubuntu 16.04 are no longer supported. + +- Packages for CentOS 7 are stored in a separate COPR repository + ``cznic/knot-dns-latest-centos7``. + +- Utilities :doc:`kzonecheck<man_kzonecheck>`, :doc:`kzonesign<man_kzonesign>`, + and :doc:`knsec3hash<man_knsec3hash>` are located in a new ``knot-dnssecutils`` + package. + +Python +------ + +- Compatibility with Python 2 was removed. + +.. _Knot DNS for BIND users: + +Knot DNS for BIND users +======================= + +.. _Automatic DNSSEC signing: + +Automatic DNSSEC signing +------------------------ + +Migrating automatically signed zones from BIND to Knot DNS requires copying +up-to-date zone files from BIND, importing existing private keys, and updating +server configuration: + +1. To obtain current content of the zone which is being migrated, + request BIND to flush the zone into the zone file: ``rndc sync + example.com``. + + .. NOTE:: + If dynamic updates (DDNS) are enabled for the given zone, you + might need to freeze the zone before flushing it. That can be done + similarly:: + + $ rndc freeze example.com + +2. Copy the fresh zone file into the zones :ref:`storage<zone_storage>` + directory of Knot DNS. + +3. Import all existing zone keys into the KASP database. Make sure that all + the keys were imported correctly:: + + $ keymgr example.com. import-bind path/to/Kexample.com.+013+11111 + $ keymgr example.com. import-bind path/to/Kexample.com.+013+22222 + $ ... + $ keymgr example.com. list + + .. NOTE:: + If the server configuration file or database is not at the default location, + add a configuration parameter (-c or -C). See :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>` + for more info about required access rights to the key files. + +4. Follow :ref:`Automatic DNSSEC signing` steps to configure DNSSEC signing. diff --git a/doc/modules.rst.in b/doc/modules.rst.in new file mode 100644 index 0000000..727e9e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/modules.rst.in @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Modules: + +******* +Modules +******* + +@DOC_MODULES@ diff --git a/doc/operation.rst b/doc/operation.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d27642d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/operation.rst @@ -0,0 +1,1200 @@ +.. highlight:: console +.. _Operation: + +********* +Operation +********* + +The Knot DNS server part :doc:`knotd<man_knotd>` can run either in the foreground, +or in the background using the ``-d`` option. When run in the foreground, it +doesn't create a PID file. Other than that, there are no differences and you +can control both the same way. + +The tool :doc:`knotc<man_knotc>` is designed as a user front-end, making it easier +to control a running server daemon. If you want to control the daemon directly, +use ``SIGINT`` to quit the process or ``SIGHUP`` to reload the configuration. + +If you pass neither configuration file (``-c`` parameter) nor configuration +database (``-C`` parameter), the server will first attempt to use the default +configuration database stored in ``/var/lib/knot/confdb`` or the +default configuration file stored in ``/etc/knot/knot.conf``. Both the +default paths can be reconfigured with ``--with-storage=path`` or +``--with-configdir=path`` respectively. + +Example of server start as a daemon:: + + $ knotd -d -c knot.conf + +Example of server shutdown:: + + $ knotc -c knot.conf stop + +For a complete list of actions refer to the program help (``-h`` parameter) +or to the corresponding manual page. + +Also, the server needs to create :ref:`server_rundir` and :ref:`zone_storage` +directories in order to run properly. + +.. _Configuration database: + +Configuration database +====================== + +In the case of a huge configuration file, the configuration can be stored +in a binary database. Such a database can be simply initialized:: + + $ knotc conf-init + +or preloaded from a file:: + + $ knotc conf-import input.conf + +Also the configuration database can be exported into a textual file:: + + $ knotc conf-export output.conf + +.. WARNING:: + The import and export commands access the configuration database + directly, without any interaction with the server. Therefore, any data + not yet committed to the database won't be exported. And the server won't + reflect imported configuration correctly. So it is strictly recommended to + import new configuration when the server is not running. + +.. _Dynamic configuration: + +Dynamic configuration +===================== + +The configuration database can be accessed using the server control interface +while the server is running. To get the full power of the dynamic configuration, +the server must be started with a specified configuration database location +or with the default database initialized. Otherwise all the changes to the +configuration will be temporary (until the server is stopped). + +.. NOTE:: + The database can be :ref:`imported<Configuration database>` in advance. + +Most of the commands get an item name and value parameters. The item name is +in the form of ``section[identifier].name``. If the item is multivalued, +more values can be specified as individual (command line) arguments. + +.. CAUTION:: + Beware of the possibility of pathname expansion by the shell. For this reason, + it is advisable to escape (with backslash) square brackets or to quote command parameters if + not executed in the interactive mode. + +To get the list of configuration sections or to get the list of section items:: + + $ knotc conf-list + $ knotc conf-list 'server' + +To get the whole configuration or to get the whole configuration section or +to get all section identifiers or to get a specific configuration item:: + + $ knotc conf-read + $ knotc conf-read 'remote' + $ knotc conf-read 'zone.domain' + $ knotc conf-read 'zone[example.com].master' + +.. WARNING:: + The following operations don't work on OpenBSD! + +Modifying operations require an active configuration database transaction. +Just one transaction can be active at a time. Such a transaction then can +be aborted or committed. A semantic check is executed automatically before +every commit:: + + $ knotc conf-begin + $ knotc conf-abort + $ knotc conf-commit + +To set a configuration item value or to add more values or to add a new +section identifier or to add a value to all identified sections:: + + $ knotc conf-set 'server.identity' 'Knot DNS' + $ knotc conf-set 'server.listen' '0.0.0.0@53' '::@53' + $ knotc conf-set 'zone[example.com]' + $ knotc conf-set 'zone.slave' 'slave2' + +.. NOTE:: + Also the include operation can be performed. A non-absolute file + location is relative to the server binary path, not to the control binary + path! + + :: + + $ knotc conf-set 'include' '/tmp/new_zones.conf' + +To unset the whole configuration or to unset the whole configuration section +or to unset an identified section or to unset an item or to unset a specific +item value:: + + $ knotc conf-unset + $ knotc conf-unset 'zone' + $ knotc conf-unset 'zone[example.com]' + $ knotc conf-unset 'zone[example.com].master' + $ knotc conf-unset 'zone[example.com].master' 'remote2' 'remote5' + +To get the change between the current configuration and the active transaction +for the whole configuration or for a specific section or for a specific +identified section or for a specific item:: + + $ knotc conf-diff + $ knotc conf-diff 'zone' + $ knotc conf-diff 'zone[example.com]' + $ knotc conf-diff 'zone[example.com].master' + +.. CAUTION:: + While it is possible to change most of the configuration parameters + dynamically or via configuration file reload, a few of the parameters + in the section ``server`` require restarting the server, such that the changes + take effect. These parameters are: + :ref:`rundir<server_rundir>`, + :ref:`user<server_user>`, + :ref:`pidfile<server_pidfile>`, + :ref:`tcp-reuseport<server_tcp-reuseport>`, + :ref:`udp-workers<server_udp-workers>`, + :ref:`tcp-workers<server_tcp-workers>`, + :ref:`background-workers<server_background-workers>`, and + :ref:`listen<server_listen>`. + +An example of possible configuration initialization:: + + $ knotc conf-begin + $ knotc conf-set 'server.listen' '0.0.0.0@53' '::@53' + $ knotc conf-set 'remote[master_server]' + $ knotc conf-set 'remote[master_server].address' '192.168.1.1' + $ knotc conf-set 'template[default]' + $ knotc conf-set 'template[default].storage' '/var/lib/knot/zones/' + $ knotc conf-set 'template[default].master' 'master_server' + $ knotc conf-set 'zone[example.com]' + $ knotc conf-diff + $ knotc conf-commit + +.. _Secondary mode: + +Secondary (slave) mode +====================== + +Running the server as a secondary is very straightforward as the zone +is transfered automatically from a remote server. The received zone is +usually stored in a zone file after the :ref:`zone_zonefile-sync` period +elapses. Zone differences are stored in the :ref:`zone journal <Journal behaviour>`. + +.. _Primary mode: + +Primary (master) mode +===================== + +If you just want to check the zone files before starting, you can use:: + + $ knotc zone-check example.com + +.. _Editing zones: + +Reading and editing zones +========================= + +Knot DNS allows you to read or change zone contents online using the server +control interface. + +.. WARNING:: + Avoid concurrent zone access when a zone event (zone file load, refresh, + DNSSEC signing, dynamic update) is in progress or pending. In such a case + zone events must be frozen before. For more information on how to freeze the + zone read :ref:`Editing zone file`. + +To get contents of all configured zones, or a specific zone contents, or zone +records with a specific owner, or even with a specific record type:: + + $ knotc zone-read -- + $ knotc zone-read example.com + $ knotc zone-read example.com ns1 + $ knotc zone-read example.com ns1 NS + +.. NOTE:: + If the record owner is not a fully qualified domain name, then it is + considered as a relative name to the zone name. + +To start a writing transaction on all zones or on specific zones:: + + $ knotc zone-begin -- + $ knotc zone-begin example.com example.net + +Now you can list all nodes within the transaction using the ```zone-get``` +command, which always returns current data with all changes included. The +command has the same syntax as ```zone-read```. + +Within the transaction, you can add a record to a specific zone or to all +zones with an open transaction:: + + $ knotc zone-set example.com ns1 3600 A 192.168.0.1 + $ knotc zone-set -- ns1 3600 A 192.168.0.1 + +To remove all records with a specific owner, or a specific rrset, or +specific record data:: + + $ knotc zone-unset example.com ns1 + $ knotc zone-unset example.com ns1 A + $ knotc zone-unset example.com ns1 A 192.168.0.2 + +To see the difference between the original zone and the current version:: + + $ knotc zone-diff example.com + +Finally, either commit or abort your transaction:: + + $ knotc zone-commit example.com + $ knotc zone-abort example.com + +A full example of setting up a completely new zone from scratch:: + + $ knotc conf-begin + $ knotc conf-set zone.domain example.com + $ knotc conf-commit + $ knotc zone-begin example.com + $ knotc zone-set example.com @ 7200 SOA ns hostmaster 1 86400 900 691200 3600 + $ knotc zone-set example.com ns 3600 A 192.168.0.1 + $ knotc zone-set example.com www 3600 A 192.168.0.100 + $ knotc zone-commit example.com + +.. NOTE:: + If quotes are necessary for record data specification, remember to escape them:: + + $ knotc zone-set example.com @ 3600 TXT \"v=spf1 a:mail.example.com -all\" + +.. _Editing zone file: + +Reading and editing the zone file safely +======================================== + +It's always possible to read and edit zone contents via zone file manipulation. +It may lead to confusion, however, if the zone contents are continuously being +changed by DDNS, DNSSEC signing and the like. In such a case, the safe way to +modify the zone file is to freeze zone events first:: + + $ knotc -b zone-freeze example.com. + $ knotc -b zone-flush example.com. + +After calling freeze on the zone, there still may be running zone operations (e.g. signing), +causing freeze pending. Because of this, the blocking mode is used to ensure +the operation was finished. Then the zone can be flushed to a file. + +Now the zone file can be safely modified (e.g. using a text editor). +If :ref:`zone_zonefile-load` is not set to `difference-no-serial`, it's also necessary to +**increase SOA serial** in this step to keep consistency. Finally, we can load the +modified zone file and if successful, thaw the zone:: + + $ knotc -b zone-reload example.com. + $ knotc zone-thaw example.com. + +.. _Zone loading: + +Zone loading +============ + +The process of how the server loads a zone is influenced by the configuration of the +:ref:`zonefile-load <zone_zonefile-load>` and :ref:`journal-content <zone_journal-content>` +parameters (also DNSSEC signing applies), the existence of a zone file and journal +(and their relative out-of-dateness), and whether it is a cold start of the server +or a zone reload (e.g. invoked by the :doc:`knotc<man_knotc>` interface). Please note +that zone transfers are not taken into account here – they are planned after the zone +is loaded (including :ref:`zone bootstrap<Zone bootstrap>`). + +If the zone file exists and is not excluded by the configuration, it is first loaded +and according to its SOA serial number, relevant journal changesets are applied. +If this is a zone reload and we have :ref:`zone_zonefile-load` set to `difference`, the difference +between old and new contents is computed and stored in the journal like an update. +The zone file should be either unchanged since last load or changed with incremented +SOA serial. In the case of a decreased SOA serial, the load is interrupted with +an error; if unchanged, it is increased by the server. + +If the procedure described above succeeds without errors, the resulting zone contents are (after potential DNSSEC signing) +used as the new zone. + +The option :ref:`zone_journal-content` set to `all` lets the server, beside better performance, keep +track of the zone contents also across server restarts. It makes the cold start +effectively work like a zone reload with the old contents loaded from the journal +(unless this is the very first start with the zone not yet saved into the journal). + +.. _Journal behaviour: + +Journal behaviour +================= + +The zone journal keeps some history of changes made to the zone. It is useful for +responding to IXFR queries. Also if :ref:`zone file flush <zone_zonefile-sync>` is disabled, the +journal keeps the difference between the zone file and the current zone in case of server shutdown. +The history is stored in changesets – differences of zone contents between two +(usually subsequent) zone versions (specified by SOA serials). + +Journals of all zones are stored in a common LMDB database. Huge changesets are +split into 70 KiB [#fn-hc]_ blocks to prevent fragmentation of the DB. The +journal does each operation in one transaction to keep consistency of the DB and performance. + +Each zone journal has its own occupation limits :ref:`maximum usage <zone_journal-max-usage>` +and :ref:`maximum depth <zone_journal-max-depth>`. Changesets are stored in the journal +one by one. When hitting any of the limits, the zone is flushed into the zone file +if there are no redundant changesets to delete, and the oldest changesets are deleted. +In the case of the size limit, twice [#fn-hc]_ the needed amount of space is purged +to prevent overly frequent deletes. + +If :ref:`zone file flush <zone_zonefile-sync>` is disabled, then instead of flushing +the zone, the journal tries to save space by merging the changesets into a special one. +This approach is effective if the changes rewrite each other, e.g. periodically +changing the same zone records, re-signing the whole zone etc. Thus the difference between the zone +file and the zone is still preserved even if the journal deletes some older changesets. + +If the journal is used to store both zone history and contents, a special changeset +is present with zone contents. When the journal gets full, the changes are merged into this +special changeset. + +There is also a :ref:`safety hard limit <database_journal-db-max-size>` for overall +journal database size, but it's strongly recommended to set the per-zone limits in +a way to prevent hitting this one. For LMDB, it's hard to recover from the +database-full state. For wiping one zone's journal, see *knotc zone-purge +journal* +command. + +.. [#fn-hc] This constant is hardcoded. + +.. _Handling, zone file, journal, changes, serials: + +Handling zone file, journal, changes, serials +============================================= + +Some configuration options regarding the zone file and journal, together with operation +procedures, might lead to unexpected results. This chapter points out +potential interference and both recommends and warns before some combinations thereof. +Unfortunately, there is no optimal combination of configuration options, +every approach has some disadvantages. + +Example 1 +--------- + +Keep the zone file updated:: + + zonefile-sync: 0 + zonefile-load: whole + journal-content: changes + +These are default values. The user can always check the current zone +contents in the zone file, and also modify it (recommended with server turned-off or +taking the :ref:`safe way<Editing zone file>`). The journal serves here just as a source of +history for secondary servers' IXFR. Some users dislike that the server overwrites their +prettily prepared zone file. + +Example 2 +--------- + +Zonefileless setup:: + + zonefile-sync: -1 + zonefile-load: none + journal-content: all + +Zone contents are stored only in the journal. The zone is updated by DDNS, +zone transfer, or via the control interface. The user might have filled the +zone contents initially from a zone file by setting :ref:`zone_zonefile-load` to +`whole` temporarily. +It's also a good setup for secondary servers. Anyway, it's recommended to carefully tune +the journal-size-related options to avoid surprises like the journal getting full. + +Example 3 +--------- + +Input-only zone file:: + + zonefile-sync: -1 + zonefile-load: difference + journal-content: changes + +The user can make changes to the zone by editing the zone file, and his pretty zone file +is never overwritten or filled with DNSSEC-related autogenerated records – they are +only stored in the journal. + +The zone file's SOA serial must be properly set to a number which is higher than the +current SOA serial in the zone (not in the zone file) if manually updated! + +Example 4 +--------- + +Auto-increment SOA serial:: + + zonefile-sync: -1 + zonefile-load: difference-no-serial + journal-content: all + +This is similar to the previous setup, but the SOA serial is handled by the server +automatically. So the user no longer needs to care about it in the zone file. + +However, this requires setting :ref:`zone_journal-content` to `all` so that +the information about the last real SOA serial is preserved in case of server re-start. + +.. _Zone bootstrap: + +Zone bootstrapping on secondary +=============================== + +When zone refresh from the primary fails, the ``retry`` value from SOA is used +as the interval between refresh attempts. In a case that SOA isn't known to the +secondary (either because the zone hasn't been retrieved from the primary yet, +or the zone has expired), a backoff is used for repeated retry attempts. + +With every retry, the delay rises as a quadratic polynomial (5 * n^2, where n +represents the sequence number of the retry attempt) up to two hours, each time +with a random delay of 0 to 30 seconds added to spread the load on the primary. +In each attempt, the retry interval is subject to :ref:`zone_retry-min-interval` +and :ref:`zone_retry-max-interval`. + +Until the refresh has been successfully completed, the backoff is restarted from +the beginning by every ```zone-refresh``` or ```zone-retransfer``` of the zone +triggered manually via :doc:`knotc<man_knotc>`, by ```zone-purge``` or +```zone-restore``` of the zone's timers, or by a restart of :doc:`knotd<man_knotd>`. + +.. _Zone expiration: + +Zone expiration +=============== + +On a primary, zone normally never expires. On a secondary, zone expiration results +in removal of the current zone contents and a trigger of immediate zone refresh. +The zone file and zone's journal are kept, but not used for answering requests +until the refresh is successfully completed. + +The zone expire timer is set according to the zone's SOA expire field. In addition +to it, Knot DNS also supports EDNS EXPIRE extension of the expire timer in both +primary and secondary roles as described in :rfc:`7314`. + +When Knot DNS is configured as a secondary, EDNS EXPIRE option present in a SOA, +IXFR, or AFXR response from the primary is processed and used to update the zone +timer when necessary. This functionality (together with requests of any other EDNS +options) for a specified primary may be disabled using the :ref:`remote_no-edns` +configuration parameter. + +If it's necessary, any zone may be expired manually using the ``zone-purge`` +command of the :doc:`knotc<man_knotc>` utility. Manual expiration is applicable +to any zone, including a catalog zone or a zone on a primary. Beware, a manually +expired zone on a primary or a manually expired catalog zone becomes valid again +after a server configuration is reloaded or the :doc:`knotd<man_knotd>` process +is restarted, provided that the zone data hasn't been removed. + +.. _DNSSEC Key states: + +DNSSEC key states +================= + +During its lifetime, a DNSSEC key finds itself in different states. Most of the time it +is used for signing the zone and published in the zone. In order to exchange +the key, one type of a key rollover is necessary, and during this rollover, +the key goes through various states with respect to the rollover type and also the +state of the other key being rolled-over. + +First, let's list the states of the key being rolled-in. + +Standard states: + +- ``active`` — The key is used for signing. +- ``published`` — The key is published in the zone, but not used for signing. If the key is + a KSK or CSK, it is used for signing the DNSKEY RRSet. +- ``ready`` (only for KSK) — The key is published in the zone and used for signing. The + old key is still active, since we are waiting for the DS records in the parent zone to be + updated (i.e. "KSK submission"). + +Special states for algorithm rollover: + +- ``pre-active`` — The key is not yet published in the zone, but it's used for signing the zone. +- ``published`` — The key is published in the zone, and it's still used for signing since the + pre-active state. + +Second, we list the states of the key being rolled-out. + +Standard states: + +- ``retire-active`` — The key is still used for signing, and is published in the zone, waiting for + the updated DS records in parent zone to be acked by resolvers (KSK case) or synchronizing + with KSK during algorithm rollover (ZSK case). +- ``retired`` — The key is no longer used for signing. If ZSK, the key is still published in the zone. +- ``removed`` — The key is not used in any way (in most cases such keys are deleted immediately). + +Special states for algorithm rollover: + +- ``post-active`` — The key is no longer published in the zone, but still used for signing. + +Special states for :rfc:`5011` trust anchor roll-over + +- ``revoke`` (only for KSK) — The key is published and used for signing, and the Revoked flag is set. + +.. NOTE:: + Trust anchor roll-over is not implemented with automatic key management. + + The ``revoke`` state can only be established using :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>` when using + :ref:`dnssec-manual-key-management`. + +The states listed above are relevant for :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>` operations like generating +a key, setting its timers and listing KASP database. + +Note that the key "states" displayed in the server log lines while zone signing +are not according to those listed above, but just a hint as to what the key is currently used for +(e.g. "public, active" = key is published in the zone and used for signing). + +.. _DNSSEC Key rollovers: + +DNSSEC key rollovers +==================== + +This section describes the process of DNSSEC key rollover and its implementation +in Knot DNS, and how the operator might watch and check that it's working correctly. +The prerequisite is automatic zone signing with enabled +:ref:`automatic key management<dnssec-automatic-ksk-management>`. + +The KSK and ZSK rollovers are triggered by the respective zone key getting old according +to the settings (see :ref:`KSK<policy_ksk-lifetime>` and :ref:`ZSK<policy_zsk-lifetime>` lifetimes). + +The algorithm rollover starts when the policy :ref:`algorithm<policy_algorithm>` +field is updated to a different value. + +The signing scheme rollover happens when the policy :ref:`signing scheme<policy_single-type-signing>` +field is changed. + +It's also possible to change the algorithm and signing scheme in one rollover. + +The operator may check the next rollover phase time by watching the next zone signing time, +either in the log or via ``knotc zone-status``. There is no special log for finishing a rollover. + +.. NOTE:: + There are never two key rollovers running in parallel for one zone. If + a rollover is triggered while another is in progress, it waits until the + first one is finished. + +The ZSK rollover is performed with Pre-publish method, KSK rollover uses Double-Signature +scheme, as described in :rfc:`6781`. + +.. _Automatic KSK and ZSK rollovers example: + +Automatic KSK and ZSK rollovers example +--------------------------------------- + +Let's start with the following set of keys:: + + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 50613, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 62932, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + +The last fields hint the key state: ``public`` denotes a key that will be presented +as the DNSKEY record, ``ready`` means that CDS/CDNSKEY records were created, +``active`` tells us that the key is used for signing, while ``active+`` is an +active key undergoing a roll-over or roll-in. + +For demonstration purposes, the following configuration is used:: + + submission: + - id: test_submission + check-interval: 2s + parent: dnssec_validating_resolver + + policy: + - id: test_policy + ksk-lifetime: 5m + zsk-lifetime: 2m + propagation-delay: 2s + dnskey-ttl: 10s + zone-max-ttl: 15s + ksk-submission: test_submission + +Upon the zone's KSK lifetime expiration, a new KSK is generated and the rollover +continues along the lines of :rfc:`6781#section-4.1.2`:: + + # KSK Rollover (50613 -> 9081) + + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, KSK rollover started + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 50613, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 62932, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active+ + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:50:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 + + ... (propagation-delay + dnskey-ttl) ... + + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 notice: [example.com.] DNSSEC, KSK submission, waiting for confirmation + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 50613, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 62932, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, ready, active+ + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-17T20:49:56+0200 + +At this point the new KSK has to be submitted to the parent zone. Knot detects the updated parent's DS +record automatically (and waits for additional period of the DS's TTL before retiring the old key) +if :ref:`parent DS check<Submission section>` is configured, otherwise the +operator must confirm it manually (using ``knotc zone-ksk-submitted``):: + + 2021-05-10T20:50:12+0200 info: [example.com.] DS check, outgoing, remote 127.0.0.1@5300, KSK submission check: negative + 2021-05-10T20:50:14+0200 info: [example.com.] DS check, outgoing, remote 127.0.0.1@5300, KSK submission check: negative + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DS check, outgoing, remote 127.0.0.1@5300, KSK submission check: positive + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 notice: [example.com.] DNSSEC, KSK submission, confirmed + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 50613, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active+ + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 62932, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:50:16+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:50:23+0200 + + ... (parent's DS TTL is 7 seconds) ... + + 2021-05-10T20:50:23+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:50:23+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 62932, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:23+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:50:23+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:50:23+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:50:23+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 + +Upon the zone's ZSK lifetime expiration, a new ZSK is generated and the rollover +continues along the lines of :rfc:`6781#section-4.1.1`:: + + # ZSK Rollover (62932 -> 33255) + + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, ZSK rollover started + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 62932, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 33255, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:51:56+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 + + ... (propagation-delay + dnskey-ttl) ... + + 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 62932, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public + 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 33255, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:52:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:52:25+0200 + + ... (propagation-delay + zone-max-ttl) ... + + 2021-05-10T20:52:25+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:52:25+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:52:25+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 33255, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:52:25+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:52:25+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:52:25+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + +Further rollovers:: + + ... (zsk-lifetime - propagation-delay - zone-max-ttl) ... + + # Another ZSK Rollover (33255 -> 49526) + + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, ZSK rollover started + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 33255, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 49526, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:54:08+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:54:20+0200 + + ... + + # Another KSK Rollover (9081 -> 9179) + + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing zone + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, KSK rollover started + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9081, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 49526, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, public, active + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, key, tag 9179, algorithm ECDSAP256SHA256, KSK, public, active+ + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, signing started + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, successfully signed + 2021-05-10T20:55:00+0200 info: [example.com.] DNSSEC, next signing at 2021-05-10T20:55:12+0200 + + ... + +.. TIP:: + If systemd is available, the KSK submission event is logged into journald + in a structured way. The intended use case is to trigger a user-created script. + Example:: + + journalctl -f -t knotd -o json | python3 -c ' + import json, sys + for line in sys.stdin: + k = json.loads(line); + if "KEY_SUBMISSION" in k: + print("%s, zone=%s, keytag=%s" % (k["__REALTIME_TIMESTAMP"], k["ZONE"], k["KEY_SUBMISSION"])) + ' + +.. _DNSSEC Shared KSK: + +DNSSEC shared KSK +================= + +Knot DNS allows, with automatic DNSSEC key management, to configure a shared KSK for multiple zones. +By enabling :ref:`policy_ksk-shared`, we tell Knot to share all newly-created KSKs +among all the zones with the same :ref:`DNSSEC signing policy<Policy section>` assigned. + +The feature works as follows. Each zone still manages its keys separately. If a new KSK shall be +generated for the zone, it first checks if it can grab another zone's shared KSK instead - +that is the last generated KSK in any of the zones with the same policy assigned. +Anyway, only the cryptographic material is shared, the key may have different timers +in each zone. + +.. rubric:: Consequences: + +If we have an initial setting with brand new zones without any DNSSEC keys, +the initial keys for all zones are generated. With shared KSK, they will all have the same KSK, +but different ZSKs. The KSK rollovers may take place at slightly different times for each of the zones, +but the resulting new KSK will be shared again among all of them. + +If we have zones which already have their keys, turning on the shared KSK feature triggers no action. +But when a KSK rollover takes place, they will use the same new key afterwards. + +.. WARNING:: + Changing the policy :ref:`id<policy_id>` must be done carefully if shared + KSK is in use. + +.. _DNSSEC Delete algorithm: + +DNSSEC delete algorithm +======================= + +This is how to "disconnect" a signed zone from a DNSSEC-aware parent zone. +More precisely, we tell the parent zone to remove our zone's DS record by +publishing a special formatted CDNSKEY and CDS record. This is mostly useful +if we want to turn off DNSSEC on our zone so it becomes insecure, but not bogus. + +With automatic DNSSEC signing and key management by Knot, this is as easy as +configuring :ref:`policy_cds-cdnskey-publish` option and reloading the configuration. +We check if the special CDNSKEY and CDS records with the rdata "0 3 0 AA==" and "0 0 0 00", +respectively, appeared in the zone. + +After the parent zone notices and reflects the change, we wait for TTL expire +(so all resolvers' caches get updated), and finally we may do anything with the +zone, e.g. turning off DNSSEC, removing all the keys and signatures as desired. + +.. _DNSSEC Offline KSK: + +DNSSEC Offline KSK +================== + +Knot DNS allows a special mode of operation where the private part of the Key Signing Key is +not available to the daemon, but it is rather stored securely in an offline storage. This requires +that the KSK/ZSK signing scheme is used (i.e. :ref:`policy_single-type-signing` is off). +The Zone Signing Key is always fully available to the daemon in order to sign common changes to the zone contents. + +The server (or the "ZSK side") only uses ZSK to sign zone contents and its changes. Before +performing a ZSK rollover, the DNSKEY records will be pre-generated and signed by the +signer (the "KSK side"). Both sides exchange keys in the form of human-readable messages with the help +of the :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>` utility. + +Prerequisites +------------- + +For the ZSK side (i.e. the operator of the DNS server), the zone has to be configured with: + +- Enabled :ref:`DNSSEC signing <zone_dnssec-signing>` +- Properly configured and assigned :ref:`DNSSEC policy <Policy section>`: + + - Enabled :ref:`policy_manual` + - Enabled :ref:`policy_offline-ksk` + - Explicit :ref:`policy_dnskey-ttl` + - Explicit :ref:`policy_zone-max-ttl` + - Other options are optional +- KASP DB may contain a ZSK (the present or some previous one(s)) + +For the KSK side (i.e. the operator of the KSK signer), the zone has to be configured with: + +- Properly configured and assigned :ref:`DNSSEC policy <Policy section>`: + + - Enabled :ref:`policy_manual` + - Enabled :ref:`policy_offline-ksk` + - Optional :ref:`policy_rrsig-lifetime`, :ref:`policy_rrsig-refresh`, + :ref:`policy_algorithm`, :ref:`policy_reproducible-signing`, + and :ref:`policy_cds-cdnskey-publish` + - Other options are ignored +- KASP DB contains a KSK (the present or a newly generated one) + +Generating and signing future ZSKs +---------------------------------- + +1. Use the ``keymgr pregenerate`` command on the ZSK side to prepare the ZSKs for a specified period of time in the future. The following example + generates ZSKs for the *example.com* zone for 6 months ahead starting from now:: + + $ keymgr -c /path/to/ZSK/side.conf example.com. pregenerate +6mo + + If the time period is selected as e.g. *2 x* :ref:`policy_zsk-lifetime` *+ 4 x* :ref:`policy_propagation-delay`, it will + prepare roughly two complete future key rollovers. The newly-generated + ZSKs remain in non-published state until their rollover starts, i.e. the time + they would be generated in case of automatic key management. + +2. Use the ``keymgr generate-ksr`` command on the ZSK side to export the public parts of the future ZSKs in a form + similar to DNSKEY records. You might use the same time period as in the first step:: + + $ keymgr -c /path/to/ZSK/side.conf example.com. generate-ksr +0 +6mo > /path/to/ksr/file + + Save the output of the command (called the Key Signing Request or KSR) to a file and transfer it to the KSK side e.g. via e-mail. + +3. Use the ``keymgr sign-ksr`` command on the KSK side with the KSR file from the previous step as a parameter:: + + $ keymgr -c /path/to/KSK/side.conf example.com. sign-ksr /path/to/ksr/file > /path/to/skr/file + + This creates all the future forms of the DNSKEY, CDNSKEY and CSK records and all the respective RRSIGs and prints them on output. Save + the output of the command (called the Signed Key Response or SKR) to a file and transfer it back to the ZSK side. + +4. Use the ``keymgr import-skr`` command to import the records and signatures from the SKR file generated in the last step + into the KASP DB on the ZSK side:: + + $ keymgr -c /path/to/ZSK/side.conf example.com. import-skr /path/to/skr/file + +5. Use the ``knotc zone-keys-load`` command to trigger a zone re-sign on the ZSK-side and set up the future re-signing events correctly.:: + + $ knotc -c /path/to/ZSK/side.conf zone-keys-load example.com. + +6. Now the future ZSKs and DNSKEY records with signatures are ready in KASP DB for later usage. + Knot automatically uses them at the correct time intervals. + The entire procedure must be repeated before the time period selected at the beginning passes, + or whenever a configuration is changed significantly. Importing new SKR over some previously-imported + one leads to deleting the old offline records. + +Offline KSK and manual ZSK management +------------------------------------- + +If the automatically preplanned ZSK roll-overs (first step) are not desired, just set the :ref:`policy_zsk-lifetime` +to zero, and manually pregenerate ZSK keys and set their timers. Then follow the steps +``generate-ksr — sign-ksr — import-skr — zone-keys-load`` and repeat the ceremony when necessary. + +Offline KSK roll-over +--------------------- + +The KSKs (on the KSK side) must be managed manually, but manual KSK roll-over is possible. Just plan the steps +of the KSK roll-over in advance, and whenever the KSK set or timers are changed, re-perform the relevant rest of the ceremony +``sign-ksr — import-skr — zone-keys-load``. + +Emergency SKR +------------- + +A general recommendation for large deployments is to have some backup pre-published keys, so that if the current ones are +compromised, they can be rolled-over to the backup ones without any delay. But in the case of Offline KSK, according to +the procedures above, both ZSK and KSK immediate rollovers require the KSR-SKR ceremony. + +However, a trick can be done to achieve really immediate key substitution. This is no longer about Knot DNS functionality, +just a hint for the operator. + +The idea is to perform every KSR-SKR ceremony twice: once with normal state of the keys (the backup key is only published), +and once with the keys already exchanged (the backup key is temporarily marked as active and the standard key temporarily +as public only). The second (backup) SKR should be saved for emergency key replacement. + +Summary of the steps: + +* Prepare KSK and ZSK side as usual, including public-only emergency key +* Perform normal Offline KSK ceremony: + + * Pre-generate ZSKs (only in the case of automatic ZSK management) + * Generate KSR + * Sign KSR on the KSK side + * Import SKR + * Re-sign the zone + +* Freeze the zone on the ZSK side +* Temporarily set the backup key as active and the normal key as publish-only +* Perform backup Offline KSK ceremony: + + * Generate KSR (only if the backup key is a replacement for ZSK) + * Sign the KSR on the KSK side + * Save the SKR to a backup storage, don't import it yet + +* Return the keys to the previous state +* Thaw the zone on the ZSK side + +Emergency key replacement: + +* Import the backup SKR +* Align the keys with the new states (backup key as active, compromised key as public) +* Re-sign the zone + +.. _DNSSEC Import of keys to HSM: + +Import of keys to HSM +===================== + +Knot DNS stores DNSSEC keys in textual PEM format (:rfc:`7468`), +while many HSM management software require the keys for import to be in binary +DER format (`Rec. ITU-T X.690 <https://www.itu.int/ITU-T/recommendations/rec.aspx?rec=x.690>`_). +Keys can be converted from one format to another by software tools such as +``certtool`` from `GnuTLS <https://www.gnutls.org/>`_ suite or +``openssl`` from `OpenSSL <https://www.openssl.org/>`_ suite. + +In the examples below, ``c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6`` is used as the key ID, +``c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pem`` represents the filename of the key in PEM format +as copied from the Knot DNS zone's :ref:`KASP database directory <database_kasp-db>`, +``c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.priv.der`` represents the file containing the private +key in DER format as generated by the conversion tool, and +``c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pub.der`` represents the file containing the public +key in DER format as generated by the conversion tool. + +.. code-block:: console + + $ certtool -V -k --outder --infile c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pem \ + --outfile c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.priv.der + + $ certtool -V --pubkey-info --outder --load-privkey c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pem \ + --outfile c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pub.der + +As an alternative, ``openssl`` can be used instead. It is necessary to specify either ``rsa`` or ``ec`` +command according to the algorithm used by the key. + +.. code-block:: console + + $ openssl rsa -outform DER -in c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pem \ + -out c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.priv.der + + $ openssl rsa -outform DER -in c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pem \ + -out c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pub.der -pubout + +Actual import of keys (both public and private keys from the same key pair) to an HSM can be done +via PKCS #11 interface, by ``pkcs11-tool`` from `OpenSC <https://github.com/OpenSC/OpenSC/wiki>`_ toolkit +for example. In the example below, ``/usr/local/lib/pkcs11.so`` is used as a name of the PKCS #11 library +or module used for communication with the HSM. + +.. code-block:: console + + $ pkcs11-tool --module /usr/local/lib/pkcs11.so --login \ + --write-object c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.priv.der --type privkey \ + --usage-sign --id c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6 + + $ pkcs11-tool --module /usr/local/lib/pkcs11.so -login \ + --write-object c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6.pub.der --type pubkey \ + --usage-sign --id c4eae5dea3ee8c15395680085c515f2ad41941b6 + +.. _Controlling a running daemon: + +Daemon controls +=============== + +Knot DNS was designed to allow server reconfiguration on-the-fly +without interrupting its operation. Thus it is possible to change +both configuration and zone files and also add or remove zones without +restarting the server. This can be done with:: + + $ knotc reload + +If you want to refresh the secondary zones, you can do this with:: + + $ knotc zone-refresh + +.. _Data and metadata backup: + +Data and metadata backup +======================== + +Some of the zone-related data, such as zone contents or DNSSEC signing keys, +and metadata, like zone timers, might be worth backing up. For the sake of +consistency, it's usually necessary to shut down the server, or at least freeze all +the zones, before copying the data like zone files, KASP database, etc, to +a backup location. To avoid this necessity, Knot DNS provides a feature to +back up some or all of the zones seamlessly. + +Online backup +------------- + +While the server is running and the zones normally loaded (even when they are +constantly/frequently being updated), the user can manually trigger the +backup by calling:: + + $ knotc zone-backup +backupdir /path/of/backup + +To back up just some of the zones (instead of all), the user might provide +their list:: + + $ knotc zone-backup +backupdir /path/to/backup zone1.com. zone2.com. ... + +The backup directory should be empty or non-existing and it must be accessible +and writable for the :ref:`server_user` account under which knotd is running. +The backup procedure will begin soon and will happen zone-by-zone +(partially in parallel if more :ref:`server_background-workers` are configured). +**The user shall check the logs for the outcome of each zone's backup attempt.** +The knotc's ``-b`` parameter might be used if the user desires to wait until +the backup work is done and a simple result status is printed out. + +.. TIP:: + There is a plain ASCII text file in the backup directory, + ``knot_backup.label``, that contains some useful information about the + backup, such as the backup creation date & time, the server identity, etc. + Care must always be taken **not to remove this file** from the backup nor to + damage it. + +Offline restore +--------------- + +If the Online backup was performed for all zones, it's possible to +restore the backed up data by simply copying them to their normal locations, +since they're simply copies. For example, the user can copy (overwrite) +the backed up KASP database files to their configured location. + +This restore of course must be done when the server is stopped. After starting up +the server, it should run in the same state as at the time of backup. + +This method is recommended in the case of complete data loss, for example +physical server failure. + +.. NOTE:: + The online backup procedure stores all zone files in a single directory + using their default file names. If the original directory layout was + different, then the required directory structure must be created manually + for offline restore and zone files must be placed individually to their + respective directories. If the zone file names don't follow the default + pattern, they must be renamed manually to match the configuration. These + limitations don't apply to the online restore procedure. + +Online restore +-------------- + +This procedure is symmetrical to Online backup. By calling:: + + $ knotc zone-restore +backupdir /path/of/backup + +the user triggers a one-by-one zone restore from the backup on a running +server. Again, a subset of zones might be specified. It must be specified +if the backup was created for only a subset of zones. + +.. NOTE:: + For restore of backups that have been created by Knot DNS releases prior + to 3.1, it's necessary to use the ``-f`` option. Since this option also + turns off some verification checks, it shouldn't be used in other cases. + +Limitations +----------- + +Neither configuration file nor :ref:`Configuration database` is backed up +by zone backup. The configuration has to be synchronized before zone restore +is performed! + +If the private keys are stored in a HSM (anything using a PKCS#11 interface), +they are not backed up. This includes internal metadata of the PKCS#11 provider +software, such as key mappings, authentication information, and the configuration +of the provider. Details are vendor-specific. + +The restore procedure does not care for keys deleted after taking the snapshot. +Thus, after restore, there might remain some redundant ``.pem`` files +of obsolete signing keys. + +.. TIP:: + In order to seamlessly deploy a restored backup of KASP DB with respect to + a possibly ongoing DNSSEC key rollover, it's recommended to set + :ref:`propagation-delay <policy_propagation-delay>` to the sum of: + + - The maximum delay between beginning of the zone signing and publishing + re-signed zone on all public secondary servers. + - How long it takes for the backup server to start up with the restored data. + - The period between taking backup snapshots of the live environment. + +.. _Statistics: + +Statistics +========== + +The server provides some general statistics and optional query module statistics +(see :ref:`mod-stats<mod-stats>`). + +Server statistics or global module statistics can be shown by:: + + $ knotc stats + $ knotc stats server # Show all server counters + $ knotc stats mod-stats # Show all mod-stats counters + $ knotc stats server.zone-count # Show specific server counter + +Per zone statistics can be shown by:: + + $ knotc zone-stats example.com mod-stats + +To show all supported counters even with 0 value, use the force option. + +A simple periodic statistic dump to a YAML file can also be enabled. See +:ref:`stats section` for the configuration details. + +As the statistics data can be accessed over the server control socket, +it is possible to create an arbitrary script (Python is supported at the moment) +which could, for example, publish the data in JSON format via HTTP(S) +or upload the data to a more efficient time series database. Take a look into +the python folder of the project for these scripts. + +.. _Mode XDP: + +Mode XDP +======== + +Thanks to recent Linux kernel capabilities, namely eXpress Data Path and AF_XDP +address family, Knot DNS offers a high-performance DNS over UDP packet processing +mode. The basic idea is to filter DNS messages close to the network device and +effectively forward them to the nameserver without touching the network stack +of the operating system. Other messages (including DNS over TCP) are processed +as usual. + +If :ref:`xdp_listen` is configured, the server creates +additional XDP workers, listening on specified interface(s) and port(s) for DNS +over UDP queries. Each XDP worker handles one RX and TX network queue pair. + +.. _Mode XDP_pre-requisites: + +Pre-requisites +-------------- + +* Linux kernel 4.18+ (5.x+ is recommended for optimal performance) compiled with + the `CONFIG_XDP_SOCKETS=y` option. The XDP mode isn't supported in other operating systems. +* A multiqueue network card, which offers enough Combined RX/TX channels, with + native XDP support is highly recommended. Successfully tested cards: + + * Intel series 700 (driver `i40e`), maximum number of channels per interface is 64. + * Intel series 500 (driver `ixgbe`), maximum number of channels per interface is 64. + The number of CPUs available has to be at most 64! + +* If the `knotd` service is not directly executed in the privileged mode, some + additional Linux capabilities have to be set: + + Execute command:: + + systemctl edit knot + + And insert these lines:: + + [Service] + CapabilityBoundingSet=CAP_NET_RAW CAP_NET_ADMIN CAP_SYS_ADMIN CAP_IPC_LOCK CAP_SYS_RESOURCE + AmbientCapabilities=CAP_NET_RAW CAP_NET_ADMIN CAP_SYS_ADMIN CAP_IPC_LOCK CAP_SYS_RESOURCE + + The `CAP_SYS_RESOURCE` is needed on Linux < 5.11. + + All the capabilities are dropped upon the service is started. + +* For proper processing of VLAN traffic, VLAN offloading should be disabled. E.g.:: + + ethtool -K <interface> tx-vlan-offload off rx-vlan-offload off + + +Optimizations +------------- + +Some helpful commands:: + + ethtool -N <interface> rx-flow-hash udp4 sdfn + ethtool -N <interface> rx-flow-hash udp6 sdfn + ethtool -L <interface> combined <?> + ethtool -G <interface> rx <?> tx <?> + renice -n 19 -p $(pgrep '^ksoftirqd/[0-9]*$') + +Limitations +----------- + +* Request and its response must go through the same physical network device. +* Dynamic DNS over XDP is not supported. +* MTU higher than 1790 bytes is not supported. +* Multiple BPF filters per one network device are not supported. +* Systems with big-endian byte ordering require special recompilation of the nameserver. +* IPv4 header and UDP checksums are not verified on received DNS messages. +* DNS over XDP traffic is not visible to common system tools (e.g. firewall, tcpdump etc.). +* BPF filter is not automatically unloaded from the network device. Manual filter unload:: + + ip link set dev <interface> xdp off diff --git a/doc/reference.rst b/doc/reference.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..737c4e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/reference.rst @@ -0,0 +1,2726 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Configuration Reference: + +*********************** +Configuration Reference +*********************** + +.. _Description: + +Description +=========== + +Configuration files for Knot DNS use simplified YAML format. Simplified means +that not all of the features are supported. + +For the description of configuration items, we have to declare a meaning of +the following symbols: + +- ``INT`` – Integer +- ``STR`` – Textual string +- ``HEXSTR`` – Hexadecimal string (with ``0x`` prefix) +- ``BOOL`` – Boolean value (``on``/``off`` or ``true``/``false``) +- ``TIME`` – Number of seconds, an integer with possible time multiplier suffix + (``s`` ~ 1, ``m`` ~ 60, ``h`` ~ 3600 or ``d`` ~ 24 * 3600) +- ``SIZE`` – Number of bytes, an integer with possible size multiplier suffix + (``B`` ~ 1, ``K`` ~ 1024, ``M`` ~ 1024^2 or ``G`` ~ 1024^3) +- ``BASE64`` – Base64 encoded string +- ``ADDR`` – IPv4 or IPv6 address +- ``DNAME`` – Domain name +- ``...`` – Multi-valued item, order of the values is preserved +- ``[`` ``]`` – Optional value +- ``|`` – Choice + +The configuration consists of several fixed sections and optional module +sections. There are 16 fixed sections (``module``, ``server``, ``xdp``, ``control``, +``log``, ``statistics``, ``database``, ``keystore``, ``key``, ``remote``, +``remotes``, ``acl``, ``submission``, ``policy``, ``template``, ``zone``). +Module sections are prefixed with the ``mod-`` prefix (e.g. ``mod-stats``). + +Most of the sections (e.g. ``zone``) are sequences of settings blocks. Each +settings block begins with a unique identifier, which can be used as a reference +from other sections (such an identifier must be defined in advance). + +A multi-valued item can be specified either as a YAML sequence:: + + address: [10.0.0.1, 10.0.0.2] + +or as more single-valued items each on an extra line:: + + address: 10.0.0.1 + address: 10.0.0.2 + +If an item value contains spaces or other special characters, it is necessary +to enclose such a value within double quotes ``"`` ``"``. + +.. _Comments: + +Comments +======== + +A comment begins with a ``#`` character and is ignored during processing. +Also each configuration section or sequence block allows a permanent +comment using the ``comment`` item which is stored in the server beside the +configuration. + +.. _including configuration: + +Including configuration +======================= + +Another configuration file or files, matching a pattern, can be included at +the top level in the current file. + +:: + + include: STR + +.. _include: + +include +------- + +A path or a matching pattern specifying one or more files that are included +at the place of the include option position in the configuration. +If the path is not absolute, then it is considered to be relative to the +current file. The pattern can be an arbitrary string meeting POSIX *glob* +requirements, e.g. dir/\*.conf. Matching files are processed in sorted order. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _module section: + +``module`` section +================== + +Dynamic modules loading configuration. + +.. NOTE:: + If configured with non-empty ```--with-moduledir=path``` parameter, all + shared modules in this directory will be automatically loaded. + +:: + + module: + - id: STR + file: STR + +.. _module_id: + +id +-- + +A module identifier in the form of the ``mod-`` prefix and module name suffix. + +.. _module_file: + +file +---- + +A path to a shared library file with the module implementation. + +.. WARNING:: + If the path is not absolute, the library is searched in the set of + system directories. See ``man dlopen`` for more details. + +*Default:* ``${libdir}/knot/modules-${version}``/module_name.so +(or ``${path}``/module_name.so if configured with ``--with-moduledir=path``) + +.. _server section: + +``server`` section +================== + +General options related to the server. + +:: + + server: + identity: [STR] + version: [STR] + nsid: [STR|HEXSTR] + rundir: STR + user: STR[:STR] + pidfile: STR + udp-workers: INT + tcp-workers: INT + background-workers: INT + async-start: BOOL + tcp-idle-timeout: TIME + tcp-io-timeout: INT + tcp-remote-io-timeout: INT + tcp-max-clients: INT + tcp-reuseport: BOOL + tcp-fastopen: BOOL + quic-max-clients: INT + quic-outbuf-max-size: SIZE + quic-idle-close-timeout: TIME + remote-pool-limit: INT + remote-pool-timeout: TIME + remote-retry-delay: TIME + socket-affinity: BOOL + udp-max-payload: SIZE + udp-max-payload-ipv4: SIZE + udp-max-payload-ipv6: SIZE + key-file: STR + cert-file: STR + edns-client-subnet: BOOL + answer-rotation: BOOL + automatic-acl: BOOL + proxy-allowlist: ADDR[/INT] | ADDR-ADDR ... + dbus-event: none | running | zone-updated | ksk-submission | dnssec-invalid ... + dbus-init-delay: TIME + listen: ADDR[@INT] ... + +.. CAUTION:: + When you change configuration parameters dynamically or via configuration file + reload, some parameters in the Server section require restarting the Knot server + so that the changes take effect. See below for the details. + +.. _server_identity: + +identity +-------- + +An identity of the server returned in the response to the query for TXT +record ``id.server.`` or ``hostname.bind.`` in the CHAOS class (:rfc:`4892`). +Set to an empty value to disable. + +*Default:* FQDN hostname + +.. _server_version: + +version +------- + +A version of the server software returned in the response to the query +for TXT record ``version.server.`` or ``version.bind.`` in the CHAOS +class (:rfc:`4892`). Set to an empty value to disable. + +*Default:* server version + +.. _server_nsid: + +nsid +---- + +A DNS name server identifier (:rfc:`5001`). Set to an empty value to disable. + +*Default:* FQDN hostname at the moment of the daemon start + +.. _server_rundir: + +rundir +------ + +A path for storing run-time data (PID file, unix sockets, etc.). + +Depending on the usage of this parameter, its change may require restart of the Knot +server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``${localstatedir}/run/knot`` (configured with ``--with-rundir=path``) + +.. _server_user: + +user +---- + +A system user with an optional system group (``user:group``) under which the +server is run after starting and binding to interfaces. Linux capabilities +are employed if supported. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``root:root`` + +.. _server_pidfile: + +pidfile +------- + +A PID file location. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* :ref:`rundir<server_rundir>`\ ``/knot.pid`` + +.. _server_udp-workers: + +udp-workers +----------- + +A number of UDP workers (threads) used to process incoming queries +over UDP. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* equal to the number of online CPUs + +.. _server_tcp-workers: + +tcp-workers +----------- + +A number of TCP workers (threads) used to process incoming queries +over TCP. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* equal to the number of online CPUs, default value is at least 10 + +.. _server_background-workers: + +background-workers +------------------ + +A number of workers (threads) used to execute background operations (zone +loading, zone updates, etc.). + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* equal to the number of online CPUs, default value is at most 10 + +.. _server_async-start: + +async-start +----------- + +If enabled, server doesn't wait for the zones to be loaded and starts +responding immediately with SERVFAIL answers until the zone loads. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _server_tcp-idle-timeout: + +tcp-idle-timeout +---------------- + +Maximum idle time (in seconds) between requests on an inbound TCP connection. +It means if there is no activity on an inbound TCP connection during this limit, +the connection is closed by the server. + +*Minimum:* ``1`` + +*Default:* ``10`` + +.. _server_tcp-io-timeout: + +tcp-io-timeout +-------------- + +Maximum time (in milliseconds) to receive or send one DNS message over an inbound +TCP connection. It means this limit applies to normal DNS queries and replies, +incoming DDNS, and **outgoing zone transfers**. The timeout is measured since some +data is already available for processing. +Set to 0 for infinity. + +*Default:* ``500`` (milliseconds) + +.. CAUTION:: + In order to reduce the risk of Slow Loris attacks, it's recommended setting + this limit as low as possible on public servers. + +.. _server_tcp-remote-io-timeout: + +tcp-remote-io-timeout +--------------------- + +Maximum time (in milliseconds) to receive or send one DNS message over an outbound +TCP connection which has already been established to a configured remote server. +It means this limit applies to incoming zone transfers, sending NOTIFY, +DDNS forwarding, and DS check or push. This timeout includes the time needed +for a network round-trip and for a query processing by the remote. +Set to 0 for infinity. + +*Default:* ``5000`` (milliseconds) + +.. _server_tcp-reuseport: + +tcp-reuseport +------------- + +If enabled, each TCP worker listens on its own socket and the OS kernel +socket load balancing is employed using SO_REUSEPORT (or SO_REUSEPORT_LB +on FreeBSD). Due to the lack of one shared socket, the server can offer +higher response rate processing over TCP. However, in the case of +time-consuming requests (e.g. zone transfers of a TLD zone), enabled reuseport +may result in delayed or not being responded client requests. So it is +advisable to use this option on secondary servers. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _server_tcp-fastopen: + +tcp-fastopen +------------ + +If enabled, use TCP Fast Open for outbound TCP communication (client side): +incoming zone transfers, sending NOTIFY, and DDNS forwarding. This mode simplifies +TCP handshake and can result in better networking performance. TCP Fast Open +for inbound TCP communication (server side) isn't affected by this +configuration as it's enabled automatically if supported by OS. + +.. NOTE:: + The TCP Fast Open support must also be enabled on the OS level: + + * Linux/macOS: ensure kernel parameter ``net.ipv4.tcp_fastopen`` is ``2`` or + ``3`` for server side, and ``1`` or ``3`` for client side. + * FreeBSD: ensure kernel parameter ``net.inet.tcp.fastopen.server_enable`` + is ``1`` for server side, and ``net.inet.tcp.fastopen.client_enable`` is + ``1`` for client side. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _server_quic-max-clients: + +quic-max-clients +---------------- + +A maximum number of QUIC clients connected in parallel. + +See also :ref:`xdp_quic`. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Minimum:* ``128`` + +*Default:* ``10000`` (ten thousand) + +.. _server_quic-outbuf-max-size: + +quic-outbuf-max-size +-------------------- + +Maximum cumulative size of memory used for buffers of unACKed +sent messages. + +.. NOTE:: + Set low if little memory is available (together with :ref:`server_quic-max-clients` + since QUIC connections are memory-heavy). Set to high value if outgoing zone + transfers of big zone over QUIC are expected. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Minimum:* ``1M`` (1 MiB) + +*Default:* ``100M`` (100 MiB) + +.. _server_quic-idle-close-timeout: + +quic-idle-close-timeout +----------------------- + +Time in seconds, after which any idle QUIC connection is gracefully closed. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Minimum:* ``1`` + +*Default:* ``4`` + +.. _server_remote-pool-limit: + +remote-pool-limit +----------------- + +If nonzero, the server will keep up to this number of outgoing TCP connections +open for later use. This is an optimization to avoid frequent opening of +TCP connections to the same remote. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``0`` + +.. _server_remote-pool-timeout: + +remote-pool-timeout +------------------- + +The timeout in seconds after which the unused kept-open outgoing TCP connections +to remote servers are closed. + +*Default:* ``5`` + +.. _server_remote-retry-delay: + +remote-retry-delay +------------------ + +When a connection attempt times out to some remote address, this information will be +kept for this specified time (in milliseconds) and other connections to the same address won't +be attempted. This prevents repetitive waiting for timeout on an unreachable remote. + +*Default:* ``0`` + +.. _server_socket-affinity: + +socket-affinity +--------------- + +If enabled and if SO_REUSEPORT is available on Linux, all configured network +sockets are bound to UDP and TCP workers in order to increase the networking performance. +This mode isn't recommended for setups where the number of network card queues +is lower than the number of UDP or TCP workers. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _server_tcp-max-clients: + +tcp-max-clients +--------------- + +A maximum number of TCP clients connected in parallel, set this below the file +descriptor limit to avoid resource exhaustion. + +.. NOTE:: + It is advisable to adjust the maximum number of open files per process in your + operating system configuration. + +*Default:* one half of the file descriptor limit for the server process + +.. _server_udp-max-payload: + +udp-max-payload +--------------- + +Maximum EDNS0 UDP payload size default for both IPv4 and IPv6. + +*Default:* ``1232`` + +.. _server_udp-max-payload-ipv4: + +udp-max-payload-ipv4 +-------------------- + +Maximum EDNS0 UDP payload size for IPv4. + +*Default:* ``1232`` + +.. _server_udp-max-payload-ipv6: + +udp-max-payload-ipv6 +-------------------- + +Maximum EDNS0 UDP payload size for IPv6. + +*Default:* ``1232`` + +.. _server_key-file: + +key-file +-------- + +Path to a server key PEM file which is used for DNS over QUIC communication. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* one-time in-memory key + +.. _server_cert-file: + +cert-file +--------- + +Path to a server certificate PEM file which is used for DNS over QUIC communication. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* one-time in-memory certificate + +.. _server_edns-client-subnet: + +edns-client-subnet +------------------ + +Enable or disable EDNS Client Subnet support. If enabled, responses to queries +containing the EDNS Client Subnet option +always contain a valid EDNS Client Subnet option according to :rfc:`7871`. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _server_answer-rotation: + +answer-rotation +--------------- + +Enable or disable sorted-rrset rotation in the answer section of normal replies. +The rotation shift is simply determined by a query ID. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _server_automatic-acl: + +automatic-acl +------------- + +If enabled, :ref:`automatic ACL<remote_automatic-acl>` setting of +configured remotes is considered when evaluating authorized operations. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _server_proxy-allowlist: + +proxy-allowlist +--------------- + +An ordered list of IP addresses, network subnets, or network ranges +which are allowed as a source address of proxied DNS traffic over UDP. +The supported proxy protocol is +`haproxy PROXY v2 <https://www.haproxy.org/download/2.5/doc/proxy-protocol.txt>`_. + +.. NOTE:: + TCP is not supported. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _server_dbus-event: + +dbus-event +---------- + +Specification of server or zone states which emit a D-Bus signal on the system +bus. The bus name is ``cz.nic.knotd``, the object path is ``/cz/nic/knotd``, and +the interface name is ``cz.nic.knotd.events``. + +Possible values: + +- ``none`` – No signal is emitted. +- ``running`` – The signal ``started`` is emitted when the server is fully operational + and the signal ``stopped`` is emitted at the beginning of the server shutdown. +- ``zone-updated`` – The signal ``zone_updated`` is emitted when a zone has been updated; + the signal parameters are `zone name` and `zone SOA serial`. +- ``ksk-submission`` – The signal ``zone_ksk_submission`` is emitted if there is + a ready KSK present when the zone is signed; the signal parameters are + `zone name`, `KSK keytag`, and `KSK KASP id`. +- ``dnssec-invalid`` – The signal ``zone_dnssec_invalid`` is emitted when DNSSEC + validation fails; the signal parameter is `zone name`. + +.. NOTE:: + This function requires systemd version at least 221. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``none`` + +.. _server_dbus-init-delay: + +dbus-init-delay +--------------- + +Time in seconds which the server waits upon D-Bus initialization to ensure +the D-Bus client is ready to receive signals. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Minimum:* ``0`` + +*Default:* ``1`` + +.. _server_listen: + +listen +------ + +One or more IP addresses where the server listens for incoming queries. +Optional port specification (default is 53) can be appended to each address +using ``@`` separator. Use ``0.0.0.0`` for all configured IPv4 addresses or +``::`` for all configured IPv6 addresses. Filesystem path can be specified +for listening on local unix SOCK_STREAM socket. Non-local address binding +is automatically enabled if supported by the operating system. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _xdp section: + +``xdp`` section +=============== + +Various options related to XDP listening, especially TCP. + +:: + + xdp: + listen: STR[@INT] | ADDR[@INT] ... + udp: BOOL + tcp: BOOL + quic: BOOL + quic-port: INT + quic-log: BOOL + tcp-max-clients: INT + tcp-inbuf-max-size: SIZE + tcp-outbuf-max-size: SIZE + tcp-idle-close-timeout: TIME + tcp-idle-reset-timeout: TIME + tcp-resend-timeout: TIME + route-check: BOOL + +.. CAUTION:: + When you change configuration parameters dynamically or via configuration file + reload, some parameters in the XDP section require restarting the Knot server + so that the changes take effect. + +.. _xdp_listen: + +listen +------ + +One or more network device names (e.g. ``ens786f0``) on which the :ref:`Mode XDP` +is enabled. Alternatively, an IP address can be used instead of a device name, +but the server will still listen on all addresses belonging to the same interface! +Optional port specification (default is 53) can be appended to each device name +or address using ``@`` separator. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +.. CAUTION:: + If XDP workers only process regular DNS traffic over UDP, it is strongly + recommended to also :ref:`listen <server_listen>` on the addresses which are + intended to offer the DNS service, at least to fulfil the DNS requirement for + working TCP. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _xdp_udp: + +udp +--- + +If enabled, DNS over UDP is processed with XDP workers. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``on`` + +.. _xdp_tcp: + +tcp +--- + +If enabled, DNS over TCP traffic is processed with XDP workers. + +The TCP stack limitations: + + - Congestion control is not implemented. + - Lost packets that do not contain TCP payload may not be resend. + - Not optimized for transfers of non-trivial zones. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _xdp_quic: + +quic +---- + +If enabled, DNS over QUIC is processed with XDP workers. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _xdp_quic-port: + +quic-port +--------- + +DNS over QUIC will listen on the interfaces configured by :ref:`xdp_listen`, +but on different port, configured by this option. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``853`` + +.. _xdp_quic-log: + +quic-log +-------- + +Triggers extensive logging of all QUIC protocol internals for every connection. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _xdp_tcp-max-clients: + +tcp-max-clients +--------------- + +A maximum number of TCP clients connected in parallel. + +*Minimum:* ``1024`` + +*Default:* ``1000000`` (one million) + +.. _xdp_tcp-inbuf-max-size: + +tcp-inbuf-max-size +------------------ + +Maximum cumulative size of memory used for buffers of incompletely +received messages. + +*Minimum:* ``1M`` (1 MiB) + +*Default:* ``100M`` (100 MiB) + +.. _xdp_tcp-outbuf-max-size: + +tcp-outbuf-max-size +------------------- + +Maximum cumulative size of memory used for buffers of unACKed +sent messages. + +*Minimum:* ``1M`` (1 MiB) + +*Default:* ``100M`` (100 MiB) + +.. _xdp_tcp-idle-close-timeout: + +tcp-idle-close-timeout +---------------------- + +Time in seconds, after which any idle connection is gracefully closed. + +*Minimum:* ``1`` + +*Default:* ``10`` + +.. _xdp_tcp-idle-reset-timeout: + +tcp-idle-reset-timeout +---------------------- + +Time in seconds, after which any idle connection is forcibly closed. + +*Minimum:* ``1`` + +*Default:* ``20`` + +.. _xdp_tcp-resend-timeout: + +tcp-resend-timeout +------------------ + +Resend outgoing data packets (with DNS response payload) if not ACKed +before this timeout. + +*Minimum:* ``1`` + +*Default:* ``5`` + +.. _xdp_route-check: + +route-check +----------- + +If enabled, routing information from the operating system is considered +when processing every incoming DNS packet received over the XDP interface: + +- If the outgoing interface of the corresponding DNS response differs from + the incoming one, the packet is processed normally by UDP/TCP workers + (XDP isn't used). +- If the destination address is blackholed, unreachable, or prohibited, + the DNS packet is dropped without any response. +- The destination MAC address and possible VLAN tag for the response are taken + from the routing system. + +If disabled, symmetrical routing is applied. It means that the query source +MAC address is used as a response destination MAC address. Possible VLAN tag +is preserved. + +Change of this parameter requires restart of the Knot server to take effect. + +.. NOTE:: + This mode requires forwarding enabled on the loopback interface + (``sysctl -w net.ipv4.conf.lo.forwarding=1`` and ``sysctl -w net.ipv6.conf.lo.forwarding=1``). + If forwarding is disabled, all incoming DNS packets are dropped! + + Only VLAN 802.1Q is supported. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _control section: + +``control`` section +=================== + +Configuration of the server control interface. + +:: + + control: + listen: STR + timeout: TIME + +.. _control_listen: + +listen +------ + +A UNIX socket path where the server listens for control commands. + +*Default:* :ref:`rundir<server_rundir>`\ ``/knot.sock`` + +.. _control_timeout: + +timeout +------- + +Maximum time (in seconds) the control socket operations can take. +Set to 0 for infinity. + +*Default:* ``5`` + +.. _log section: + +``log`` section +=============== + +Server can be configured to log to the standard output, standard error +output, syslog (or systemd journal if systemd is enabled) or into an arbitrary +file. + +There are 6 logging severity levels: + +- ``critical`` – Non-recoverable error resulting in server shutdown. +- ``error`` – Recoverable error, action should be taken. +- ``warning`` – Warning that might require user action. +- ``notice`` – Server notice or hint. +- ``info`` – Informational message. +- ``debug`` – Debug or detailed message. + +In the case of a missing log section, ``warning`` or more serious messages +will be logged to both standard error output and syslog. The ``info`` and +``notice`` messages will be logged to standard output. + +:: + + log: + - target: stdout | stderr | syslog | STR + server: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug + control: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug + zone: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug + any: critical | error | warning | notice | info | debug + +.. _log_target: + +target +------ + +A logging output. + +Possible values: + +- ``stdout`` – Standard output. +- ``stderr`` – Standard error output. +- ``syslog`` – Syslog or systemd journal. +- *file\_name* – A specific file. + +With ``syslog`` target, syslog service is used. However, if Knot DNS has been compiled +with systemd support and operating system has been booted with systemd, systemd journal +is used for logging instead of syslog. + +.. _log_server: + +server +------ + +Minimum severity level for messages related to general operation of the server to be +logged. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _log_control: + +control +------- + +Minimum severity level for messages related to server control to be logged. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _log_zone: + +zone +---- + +Minimum severity level for messages related to zones to be logged. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _log_any: + +any +--- + +Minimum severity level for all message types to be logged. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _stats section: + +``stats`` section +================= + +Periodic server statistics dumping. + +:: + + statistics: + timer: TIME + file: STR + append: BOOL + +.. _statistics_timer: + +timer +----- + +A period after which all available statistics metrics will by written to the +:ref:`file<statistics_file>`. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _statistics_file: + +file +---- + +A file path of statistics output in the YAML format. + +*Default:* :ref:`rundir<server_rundir>`\ ``/stats.yaml`` + +.. _statistics_append: + +append +------ + +If enabled, the output will be appended to the :ref:`file<statistics_file>` +instead of file replacement. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _database section: + +``database`` section +==================== + +Configuration of databases for zone contents, DNSSEC metadata, or event timers. + +:: + + database: + storage: STR + journal-db: STR + journal-db-mode: robust | asynchronous + journal-db-max-size: SIZE + kasp-db: STR + kasp-db-max-size: SIZE + timer-db: STR + timer-db-max-size: SIZE + catalog-db: str + catalog-db-max-size: SIZE + +.. _database_storage: + +storage +------- + +A data directory for storing journal, KASP, and timer databases. + +*Default:* ``${localstatedir}/lib/knot`` (configured with ``--with-storage=path``) + +.. _database_journal-db: + +journal-db +---------- + +An explicit specification of the persistent journal database directory. +Non-absolute path (i.e. not starting with ``/``) is relative to +:ref:`storage<database_storage>`. + +*Default:* :ref:`storage<database_storage>`\ ``/journal`` + +.. _database_journal-db-mode: + +journal-db-mode +--------------- + +Specifies journal LMDB backend configuration, which influences performance +and durability. + +Possible values: + +- ``robust`` – The journal database disk synchronization ensures database + durability but is generally slower. +- ``asynchronous`` – The journal database disk synchronization is optimized for + better performance at the expense of lower database durability in the case of + a crash. This mode is recommended on secondary servers with many zones. + +*Default:* ``robust`` + +.. _database_journal-db-max-size: + +journal-db-max-size +------------------- + +The hard limit for the journal database maximum size. There is no cleanup logic +in journal to recover from reaching this limit. Journal simply starts refusing +changes across all zones. Decreasing this value has no effect if it is lower +than the actual database file size. + +It is recommended to limit :ref:`journal-max-usage<zone_journal-max-usage>` +per-zone instead of :ref:`journal-db-max-size<database_journal-db-max-size>` +in most cases. Please keep this value larger than the sum of all zones' +journal usage limits. See more details regarding +:ref:`journal behaviour<Journal behaviour>`. + +.. NOTE:: + This value also influences server's usage of virtual memory. + +*Default:* ``20G`` (20 GiB), or ``512M`` (512 MiB) for 32-bit + +.. _database_kasp-db: + +kasp-db +------- + +An explicit specification of the KASP database directory. +Non-absolute path (i.e. not starting with ``/``) is relative to +:ref:`storage<database_storage>`. + +*Default:* :ref:`storage<database_storage>`\ ``/keys`` + +.. _database_kasp-db-max-size: + +kasp-db-max-size +---------------- + +The hard limit for the KASP database maximum size. + +.. NOTE:: + This value also influences server's usage of virtual memory. + +*Default:* ``500M`` (500 MiB) + +.. _database_timer-db: + +timer-db +-------- + +An explicit specification of the persistent timer database directory. +Non-absolute path (i.e. not starting with ``/``) is relative to +:ref:`storage<database_storage>`. + +*Default:* :ref:`storage<database_storage>`\ ``/timers`` + +.. _database_timer-db-max-size: + +timer-db-max-size +----------------- + +The hard limit for the timer database maximum size. + +.. NOTE:: + This value also influences server's usage of virtual memory. + +*Default:* ``100M`` (100 MiB) + +.. _database_catalog-db: + +catalog-db +---------- + +An explicit specification of the zone catalog database directory. +Only useful if :ref:`catalog-zones` are enabled. +Non-absolute path (i.e. not starting with ``/``) is relative to +:ref:`storage<database_storage>`. + +*Default:* :ref:`storage<database_storage>`\ ``/catalog`` + +.. _database_catalog-db-max-size: + +catalog-db-max-size +------------------- + +The hard limit for the catalog database maximum size. + +.. NOTE:: + This value also influences server's usage of virtual memory. + +*Default:* ``20G`` (20 GiB), or ``512M`` (512 MiB) for 32-bit + +.. _keystore section: + +``keystore`` section +==================== + +DNSSEC keystore configuration. + +:: + + keystore: + - id: STR + backend: pem | pkcs11 + config: STR + key-label: BOOL + +.. _keystore_id: + +id +-- + +A keystore identifier. + + +.. _keystore_backend: + +backend +------- + +A key storage backend type. + +Possible values: + +- ``pem`` – PEM files. +- ``pkcs11`` – PKCS #11 storage. + +*Default:* ``pem`` + +.. _keystore_config: + +config +------ + +A backend specific configuration. A directory with PEM files (the path can +be specified as a relative path to :ref:`kasp-db<database_kasp-db>`) or +a configuration string for PKCS #11 storage (`<pkcs11-url> <module-path>`). + +.. NOTE:: + Example configuration string for PKCS #11:: + + "pkcs11:token=knot;pin-value=1234 /usr/lib64/pkcs11/libsofthsm2.so" + +*Default:* :ref:`kasp-db<database_kasp-db>`\ ``/keys`` + +.. _keystore_key-label: + +key-label +--------- + +If enabled in combination with the PKCS #11 :ref:`keystore_backend`, generated keys +are labeled in the form ``<zone_name> KSK|ZSK``. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _key section: + +``key`` section +=============== + +Shared TSIG keys used to authenticate communication with the server. + +:: + + key: + - id: DNAME + algorithm: hmac-md5 | hmac-sha1 | hmac-sha224 | hmac-sha256 | hmac-sha384 | hmac-sha512 + secret: BASE64 + +.. _key_id: + +id +-- + +A key name identifier. + +.. NOTE:: + This value MUST be exactly the same as the name of the TSIG key on the + opposite primary/secondary server(s). + +.. _key_algorithm: + +algorithm +--------- + +A TSIG key algorithm. See +`TSIG Algorithm Numbers <https://www.iana.org/assignments/tsig-algorithm-names/tsig-algorithm-names.xhtml>`_. + +Possible values: + +- ``hmac-md5`` +- ``hmac-sha1`` +- ``hmac-sha224`` +- ``hmac-sha256`` +- ``hmac-sha384`` +- ``hmac-sha512`` + +*Default:* not set + +.. _key_secret: + +secret +------ + +Shared key secret. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _remote section: + +``remote`` section +================== + +Definitions of remote servers for outgoing connections (source of a zone +transfer, target for a notification, etc.). + +:: + + remote: + - id: STR + address: ADDR[@INT] ... + via: ADDR[@INT] ... + key: key_id + block-notify-after-transfer: BOOL + no-edns: BOOL + automatic-acl: BOOL + +.. _remote_id: + +id +-- + +A remote identifier. + +.. _remote_address: + +address +------- + +An ordered list of destination IP addresses which are used for communication +with the remote server. The addresses are tried in sequence until the +remote is reached. Optional destination port (default is 53) +can be appended to the address using ``@`` separator. + +*Default:* not set + +.. NOTE:: + If the remote is contacted and it refuses to perform requested action, + no more addresses will be tried for this remote. + +.. _remote_via: + +via +--- + +An ordered list of source IP addresses. The first address with the same family +as the destination address is used as a source address for communication with +the remote. This option can help if the server listens on more addresses. +Optional source port (default is random) can be appended +to the address using ``@`` separator. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _remote_key: + +key +--- + +A :ref:`reference<key_id>` to the TSIG key which is used to authenticate +the communication with the remote server. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _remote_block-notify-after-transfer: + +block-notify-after-transfer +--------------------------- + +When incoming AXFR/IXFR from this remote (as a primary server), suppress +sending NOTIFY messages to all configured secondary servers. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _remote_no-edns: + +no-edns +------- + +If enabled, no OPT record (EDNS) is inserted to outgoing requests to this +remote server. This mode is necessary for communication with some broken +implementations (e.g. Windows Server 2016). + +.. NOTE:: + This option effectively disables :ref:`zone expire<Zone expiration>` timer + updates via EDNS EXPIRE option specified in :rfc:`7314`. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _remote_automatic-acl: + +automatic-acl +------------- + +If enabled, some authorized operations for the remote are automatically allowed +based on the context: + +- Incoming NOTIFY is allowed from the remote if it's configured as a + :ref:`primary server <zone_master>` for the zone. +- Outgoing zone transfer is allowed to the remote if it's configured as a + :ref:`NOTIFY target <zone_notify>` for the zone. + +Automatic ACL rules are evaluated before explicit :ref:`zone ACL <zone_acl>` configuration. + +.. NOTE:: + This functionality requires global activation via + :ref:`server_automatic-acl` in the server section. + +*Default:* ``on`` + +.. _remotes section: + +``remotes`` section +=================== + +Definitions of groups of remote servers. Remote grouping can simplify the +configuration. + +:: + + remotes: + - id: STR + remote: remote_id ... + +.. _remotes_id: + +id +-- + +A remote group identifier. + +.. _remotes_remote: + +remote +------ + +An ordered list of :ref:`references<remote_id>` to remote server definitions. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _acl section: + +``acl`` section +=============== + +Access control list rule definitions. An ACL rule is a description of one +or more authorized operations (zone transfer request, zone change notification, +and dynamic DNS update) which are allowed to be processed or denied. + +:: + + acl: + - id: STR + address: ADDR[/INT] | ADDR-ADDR ... + key: key_id ... + remote: remote_id | remotes_id ... + action: query | notify | transfer | update ... + deny: BOOL + update-type: STR ... + update-owner: key | zone | name + update-owner-match: sub-or-equal | equal | sub + update-owner-name: STR ... + +.. _acl_id: + +id +-- + +An ACL rule identifier. + +.. _acl_address: + +address +------- + +An ordered list of IP addresses, network subnets, or network ranges. The query's +source address must match one of them. If this item is not set, address match is not +required. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _acl_key: + +key +--- + +An ordered list of :ref:`reference<key_id>`\ s to TSIG keys. The query must +match one of them. If this item is not set, transaction authentication is not used. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _acl_remote: + +remote +------ + +An ordered list of references :ref:`remote<remote_id>` and +:ref:`remotes<remotes_id>`. The query must +match one of the remotes. Specifically, one of the remote's addresses and remote's +TSIG key if configured must match. + +.. NOTE:: + This option cannot be specified along with the :ref:`acl_address` or + :ref:`acl_key` option at one ACL item. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _acl_action: + +action +------ + +An ordered list of allowed (or denied) actions. + +Possible values: + +- ``query`` – Allow regular DNS query. As normal queries are always allowed, + this action is only useful in combination with :ref:`TSIG key<acl_key>`. +- ``notify`` – Allow incoming notify (NOTIFY). +- ``transfer`` – Allow zone transfer (AXFR, IXFR). +- ``update`` – Allow zone updates (DDNS). + +*Default:* ``query`` + +.. _acl_deny: + +deny +---- + +If enabled, instead of allowing, deny the specified :ref:`action<acl_action>`, +:ref:`address<acl_address>`, :ref:`key<acl_key>`, or combination if these +items. If no action is specified, deny all actions. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _acl_update-type: + +update-type +----------- + +A list of allowed types of Resource Records in a zone update. Every record in an update +must match one of the specified types. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _acl_update-owner: + +update-owner +------------ + +This option restricts possible owners of Resource Records in a zone update by comparing +them to either the :ref:`TSIG key<acl_key>` identity, the current zone name, or to a list of +domain names given by the :ref:`acl_update-owner-name` option. +The comparison method is given by the :ref:`acl_update-owner-match` option. + +Possible values: + +- ``key`` — The owner of each updated RR must match the identity of the TSIG key if used. +- ``name`` — The owner of each updated RR must match at least one name in the + :ref:`acl_update-owner-name` list. +- ``zone`` — The owner of each updated RR must match the current zone name. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _acl_update-owner-match: + +update-owner-match +------------------ + +This option defines how the owners of Resource Records in an update are matched to the domain name(s) +set by the :ref:`acl_update-owner` option. + +Possible values: + +- ``sub-or-equal`` — The owner of each RR in an update must either be equal to + or be a subdomain of at least one domain name set by :ref:`acl_update-owner`. +- ``equal`` — The owner of each updated RR must be equal to at least one domain + name set by :ref:`acl_update-owner`. +- ``sub`` — The owner of each updated RR must be a subdomain of, but MUST NOT + be equal to at least one domain name set by :ref:`acl_update-owner`. + +*Default:* ``sub-or-equal`` + +.. _acl_update-owner-name: + +update-owner-name +----------------- + +A list of allowed owners of RRs in a zone update used with :ref:`acl_update-owner` +set to ``name``. Every listed owner name which is not FQDN (i.e. it doesn't end +in a dot) is considered as if it was appended with the target zone name. +Such a relative owner name specification allows better ACL rule reusability across +multiple zones. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _submission section: + +``submission`` section +====================== + +Parameters of KSK submission checks. + +:: + + submission: + - id: STR + parent: remote_id | remotes_id ... + check-interval: TIME + timeout: TIME + parent-delay: TIME + +.. _submission_id: + +id +-- + +A submission identifier. + +.. _submission_parent: + +parent +------ + +A list of references :ref:`remote<remote_id>` and :ref:`remotes<remotes_id>` +to parent's DNS servers to be checked for +presence of corresponding DS records in the case of KSK submission. All of them must +have a corresponding DS for the rollover to continue. If none is specified, the +rollover must be pushed forward manually. + +*Default:* not set + +.. TIP:: + A DNSSEC-validating resolver can be set as a parent. + +.. _submission_check-interval: + +check-interval +-------------- + +Interval for periodic checks of DS presence on parent's DNS servers, in the +case of the KSK submission. + +*Default:* ``1h`` (1 hour) + +.. _submission_timeout: + +timeout +------- + +After this time period (in seconds) the KSK submission is automatically considered +successful, even if all the checks were negative or no parents are configured. +Set to 0 for infinity. + +*Default:* ``0`` + +.. _submission_parent-delay: + +parent-delay +------------ + +After successful parent DS check, wait for this period before continuing the next +key roll-over step. This delay shall cover the propagation delay of update in the +parent zone. + +*Default:* ``0`` + +.. _policy section: + +``policy`` section +================== + +DNSSEC policy configuration. + +:: + + policy: + - id: STR + keystore: keystore_id + manual: BOOL + single-type-signing: BOOL + algorithm: rsasha1 | rsasha1-nsec3-sha1 | rsasha256 | rsasha512 | ecdsap256sha256 | ecdsap384sha384 | ed25519 | ed448 + ksk-size: SIZE + zsk-size: SIZE + ksk-shared: BOOL + dnskey-ttl: TIME + zone-max-ttl: TIME + ksk-lifetime: TIME + zsk-lifetime: TIME + delete-delay: TIME + propagation-delay: TIME + rrsig-lifetime: TIME + rrsig-refresh: TIME + rrsig-pre-refresh: TIME + reproducible-signing: BOOL + nsec3: BOOL + nsec3-iterations: INT + nsec3-opt-out: BOOL + nsec3-salt-length: INT + nsec3-salt-lifetime: TIME + signing-threads: INT + ksk-submission: submission_id + ds-push: remote_id | remotes_id ... + cds-cdnskey-publish: none | delete-dnssec | rollover | always | double-ds + cds-digest-type: sha256 | sha384 + dnskey-management: full | incremental + offline-ksk: BOOL + unsafe-operation: none | no-check-keyset | no-update-dnskey | no-update-nsec | no-update-expired ... + +.. _policy_id: + +id +-- + +A policy identifier. + +.. _policy_keystore: + +keystore +-------- + +A :ref:`reference<keystore_id>` to a keystore holding private key material +for zones. + +*Default:* an imaginary keystore with all default values + +.. NOTE:: + A configured keystore called "default" won't be used unless explicitly referenced. + +.. _policy_manual: + +manual +------ + +If enabled, automatic key management is not used. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _policy_single-type-signing: + +single-type-signing +------------------- + +If enabled, Single-Type Signing Scheme is used in the automatic key management +mode. + +*Default:* ``off`` (:ref:`module onlinesign<mod-onlinesign>` has default ``on``) + +.. _policy_algorithm: + +algorithm +--------- + +An algorithm of signing keys and issued signatures. See +`DNSSEC Algorithm Numbers <https://www.iana.org/assignments/dns-sec-alg-numbers/dns-sec-alg-numbers.xhtml#dns-sec-alg-numbers-1>`_. + +Possible values: + +- ``rsasha1`` +- ``rsasha1-nsec3-sha1`` +- ``rsasha256`` +- ``rsasha512`` +- ``ecdsap256sha256`` +- ``ecdsap384sha384`` +- ``ed25519`` +- ``ed448`` + +.. NOTE:: + Ed25519 algorithm is only available if compiled with GnuTLS 3.6.0+. + + Ed448 algorithm is only available if compiled with GnuTLS 3.6.12+ and Nettle 3.6+. + +*Default:* ``ecdsap256sha256`` + +.. _policy_ksk-size: + +ksk-size +-------- + +A length of newly generated :abbr:`KSK (Key Signing Key)` or +:abbr:`CSK (Combined Signing Key)` keys. + +*Default:* ``2048`` (rsa*), ``256`` (ecdsap256), ``384`` (ecdsap384), ``256`` (ed25519), +``456`` (ed448) + +.. _policy_zsk-size: + +zsk-size +-------- + +A length of newly generated :abbr:`ZSK (Zone Signing Key)` keys. + +*Default:* see default for :ref:`ksk-size<policy_ksk-size>` + +.. _policy_ksk-shared: + +ksk-shared +---------- + +If enabled, all zones with this policy assigned will share one or more KSKs. +More KSKs can be shared during a KSK rollover. + +.. WARNING:: + As the shared KSK set is bound to the policy :ref:`id<policy_id>`, renaming the + policy breaks this connection and new shared KSK set is initiated when + a new KSK is needed. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _policy_dnskey-ttl: + +dnskey-ttl +---------- + +A TTL value for DNSKEY records added into zone apex. + +.. NOTE:: + Has influence over ZSK key lifetime. + +.. WARNING:: + Ensure all DNSKEYs with updated TTL are propagated before any subsequent + DNSKEY rollover starts. + +*Default:* zone SOA TTL + +.. _policy_zone-max-ttl: + +zone-max-ttl +------------ + +Declare (override) maximal TTL value among all the records in zone. + +.. NOTE:: + It's generally recommended to override the maximal TTL computation by setting this + explicitly whenever possible. It's required for :ref:`DNSSEC Offline KSK` and + really reasonable when records are generated dynamically + (e.g. by a :ref:`module<mod-synthrecord>`). + +*Default:* computed after zone is loaded + +.. _policy_ksk-lifetime: + +ksk-lifetime +------------ + +A period between KSK activation and the next rollover initiation. + +.. NOTE:: + KSK key lifetime is also influenced by propagation-delay, dnskey-ttl, + and KSK submission delay. + + Zero (aka infinity) value causes no KSK rollover as a result. + + This applies for CSK lifetime if single-type-signing is enabled. + +*Default:* ``0`` + +.. _policy_zsk-lifetime: + +zsk-lifetime +------------ + +A period between ZSK activation and the next rollover initiation. + +.. NOTE:: + More exactly, this period is measured since a ZSK is activated, + and after this, a new ZSK is generated to replace it within + following roll-over. + + ZSK key lifetime is also influenced by propagation-delay and dnskey-ttl + + Zero (aka infinity) value causes no ZSK rollover as a result. + +*Default:* ``30d`` (30 days) + +.. _policy_delete-delay: + +delete-delay +------------ + +Once a key (KSK or ZSK) is rolled-over and removed from the zone, +keep it in the KASP database for at least this period before deleting it completely. +This might be useful in some troubleshooting cases when resurrection +is needed. + +*Default:* ``0`` + +.. _policy_propagation-delay: + +propagation-delay +----------------- + +An extra delay added for each key rollover step. This value should be high +enough to cover propagation of data from the primary server to all +secondary servers, as well as the duration of signing routine itself and +possible outages in signing and propagation infrastructure. In other words, +this delay should ensure that within this period of time after planned +change of the key set, all public-facing secondaries will already serve +new DNSKEY RRSet for sure. + +.. NOTE:: + Has influence over ZSK key lifetime. + +*Default:* ``1h`` (1 hour) + +.. _policy_rrsig-lifetime: + +rrsig-lifetime +-------------- + +A validity period of newly issued signatures. + +.. NOTE:: + The RRSIG's signature inception time is set to 90 minutes in the past. This + time period is not counted to the signature lifetime. + +*Default:* ``14d`` (14 days) + +.. _policy_rrsig-refresh: + +rrsig-refresh +------------- + +A period how long at least before a signature expiration the signature will be refreshed, +in order to prevent expired RRSIGs on secondary servers or resolvers' caches. + +*Default:* :ref:`policy_propagation-delay` + :ref:`policy_zone-max-ttl` + +.. _policy_rrsig-pre-refresh: + +rrsig-pre-refresh +----------------- + +A period how long at most before a signature refresh time the signature might be refreshed, +in order to refresh RRSIGs in bigger batches on a frequently updated zone +(avoid re-sign event too often). + +*Default:* ``1h`` (1 hour) + +.. _policy_reproducible-signing: + +reproducible-signing +-------------------- + +For ECDSA algorithms, generate RRSIG signatures deterministically (:rfc:`6979`). +Besides better theoretical cryptographic security, this mode allows significant +speed-up of loading signed (by the same method) zones. However, the zone signing +is a bit slower. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _policy_nsec3: + +nsec3 +----- + +Specifies if NSEC3 will be used instead of NSEC. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _policy_nsec3-iterations: + +nsec3-iterations +---------------- + +A number of additional times the hashing is performed. + +*Default:* ``0`` + +.. _policy_nsec3-opt-out: + +nsec3-opt-out +------------- + +If set, NSEC3 records won't be created for insecure delegations. +This speeds up the zone signing and reduces overall zone size. + +.. WARNING:: + NSEC3 with the Opt-Out bit set no longer works as a proof of non-existence + in this zone. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _policy_nsec3-salt-length: + +nsec3-salt-length +----------------- + +A length of a salt field in octets, which is appended to the original owner +name before hashing. + +*Default:* ``8`` + +.. _policy_nsec3-salt-lifetime: + +nsec3-salt-lifetime +------------------- + +A validity period of newly issued salt field. + +Zero value means infinity. + +Special value *-1* triggers re-salt every time when active ZSK changes. +This optimizes the number of big changes to the zone. + +*Default:* ``30d`` (30 days) + +.. _policy_signing-threads: + +signing-threads +--------------- + +When signing zone or update, use this number of threads for parallel signing. + +Those are extra threads independent of :ref:`Background workers<server_background-workers>`. + +.. NOTE:: + Some steps of the DNSSEC signing operation are not parallelized. + +*Default:* ``1`` (no extra threads) + +.. _policy_ksk-submission-check: + +ksk-submission +-------------- + +A reference to :ref:`submission<submission_id>` section holding parameters of +KSK submission checks. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _policy_ds-push: + +ds-push +------- + +Optional references :ref:`remote<remote_id>` and :ref:`remotes<remotes_id>` +to authoritative DNS server of the +parent's zone. The remote server must be configured to accept DS record +updates via DDNS. Whenever a CDS record in the local zone is changed, the +corresponding DS record is sent as a dynamic update (DDNS) to the parent +DNS server. All previous DS records are deleted within the DDNS message. +It's possible to manage both child and parent zones by the same Knot DNS server. + +.. NOTE:: + This feature requires :ref:`cds-cdnskey-publish<policy_cds-cdnskey-publish>` + not to be set to ``none``. + +.. NOTE:: + The mentioned change to CDS record usually means that a KSK roll-over is running + and the new key being rolled-in is in "ready" state already for the period of + :ref:`propagation-delay<policy_propagation-delay>`. + +.. NOTE:: + Module :ref:`Onlinesign<mod-onlinesign>` doesn't support DS push. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _policy_cds-cdnskey-publish: + +cds-cdnskey-publish +------------------- + +Controls if and how shall the CDS and CDNSKEY be published in the zone. + +Possible values: + +- ``none`` – Never publish any CDS or CDNSKEY records in the zone. +- ``delete-dnssec`` – Publish special CDS and CDNSKEY records indicating turning off DNSSEC. +- ``rollover`` – Publish CDS and CDNSKEY records for ready and not yet active KSK (submission phase of KSK rollover). +- ``always`` – Always publish one CDS and one CDNSKEY records for the current KSK. +- ``double-ds`` – Always publish up to two CDS and two CDNSKEY records for ready and/or active KSKs. + +.. NOTE:: + If the zone keys are managed manually, the CDS and CDNSKEY rrsets may contain + more records depending on the keys available. + +.. WARNING:: + The ``double-ds`` value does not trigger double-DS roll-over method. That method is + only supported when performed manually, with unset :ref:`policy_ksk-submission-check`. + +*Default:* ``rollover`` + +.. _policy_cds-digest-type: + +cds-digest-type +--------------- + +Specify digest type for published CDS records. + +*Default:* ``sha256`` + +.. _policy_dnskey-management: + +dnskey-management +----------------- + +Specify how the DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS RRSets at the zone apex are handled +when (re-)signing the zone. + +Possible values: + +- ``full`` – Upon every zone (re-)sign, delete all unknown DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS + records and keep just those that are related to the zone keys stored in the KASP database. +- ``incremental`` – Keep unknown DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS records in the zone, and + modify server-managed records incrementally by employing changes in the KASP database. + +.. NOTE:: + Prerequisites for *incremental*: + + - The :ref:`Offline KSK <DNSSEC Offline KSK>` isn't supported. + - The :ref:`policy_delete-delay` is long enough to cover possible daemon + shutdown (e.g. due to server maintenance). + - Avoided manual deletion of keys with :doc:`keymgr<man_keymgr>`. + + Otherwise there might remain some DNSKEY records in the zone, belonging to + deleted keys. + +*Default:* ``full`` + +.. _policy_offline-ksk: + +offline-ksk +----------- + +Specifies if :ref:`Offline KSK <DNSSEC Offline KSK>` feature is enabled. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _policy_unsafe-operation: + +unsafe-operation +---------------- + +Turn off some DNSSEC safety features. + +Possible values: + +- ``none`` – Nothing disabled. +- ``no-check-keyset`` – Don't check active keys in present algorithms. This may + lead to violation of :rfc:`4035#section-2.2`. +- ``no-update-dnskey`` – Don't maintain/update DNSKEY, CDNSKEY, and CDS records + in the zone apex according to KASP database. Juste leave them as they are in the zone. +- ``no-update-nsec`` – Don't maintain/update NSEC/NSEC3 chain. Leave all the records + as they are in the zone. +- ``no-update-expired`` – Don't update expired RRSIGs. + +Multiple values may be specified. + +.. WARNING:: + This mode is intended for DNSSEC experts who understand the corresponding consequences. + +*Default:* ``none`` + +.. _template section: + +``template`` section +==================== + +A template is shareable zone settings, which can simplify configuration by +reducing duplicates. A special default template (with the *default* identifier) +can be used for global zone configuration or as an implicit configuration +if a zone doesn't have another template specified. + +:: + + template: + - id: STR + global-module: STR/STR ... + # All zone options (excluding 'template' item) + +.. NOTE:: + If an item is explicitly specified both in the referenced template and + the zone, the template item value is overridden by the zone item value. + +.. _template_id: + +id +-- + +A template identifier. + +.. _template_global-module: + +global-module +------------- + +An ordered list of references to query modules in the form of *module_name* or +*module_name/module_id*. These modules apply to all queries. + +.. NOTE:: + This option is only available in the *default* template. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone section: + +``zone`` section +================ + +Definition of zones served by the server. + +:: + + zone: + - domain: DNAME + template: template_id + storage: STR + file: STR + master: remote_id | remotes_id ... + ddns-master: remote_id + notify: remote_id | remotes_id ... + acl: acl_id ... + provide-ixfr: BOOL + semantic-checks: BOOL | soft + zonefile-sync: TIME + zonefile-load: none | difference | difference-no-serial | whole + journal-content: none | changes | all + journal-max-usage: SIZE + journal-max-depth: INT + zone-max-size : SIZE + adjust-threads: INT + dnssec-signing: BOOL + dnssec-validation: BOOL + dnssec-policy: policy_id + ds-push: remote_id | remotes_id ... + zonemd-verify: BOOL + zonemd-generate: none | zonemd-sha384 | zonemd-sha512 | remove + serial-policy: increment | unixtime | dateserial + refresh-min-interval: TIME + refresh-max-interval: TIME + retry-min-interval: TIME + retry-max-interval: TIME + expire-min-interval: TIME + expire-max-interval: TIME + catalog-role: none | interpret | generate | member + catalog-template: template_id ... + catalog-zone: DNAME + catalog-group: STR + module: STR/STR ... + +.. _zone_domain: + +domain +------ + +A zone name identifier. + +.. _zone_template: + +template +-------- + +A :ref:`reference<template_id>` to a configuration template. + +*Default:* not set or ``default`` (if the template exists) + +.. _zone_storage: + +storage +------- + +A data directory for storing zone files. + +*Default:* ``${localstatedir}/lib/knot`` (configured with ``--with-storage=path``) + +.. _zone_file: + +file +---- + +A path to the zone file. Non-absolute path (i.e. not starting with ``/``) is +relative to :ref:`storage<zone_storage>`. +It is also possible to use the following formatters: + +- ``%c[``\ *N*\ ``]`` or ``%c[``\ *N*\ ``-``\ *M*\ ``]`` – Means the *N*\ th + character or a sequence of characters beginning from the *N*\ th and ending + with the *M*\ th character of the textual zone name (see ``%s``). The + indexes are counted from 0 from the left. All dots (including the terminal + one) are considered. If the character is not available, the formatter has no effect. +- ``%l[``\ *N*\ ``]`` – Means the *N*\ th label of the textual zone name + (see ``%s``). The index is counted from 0 from the right (0 ~ TLD). + If the label is not available, the formatter has no effect. +- ``%s`` – Means the current zone name in the textual representation. + The zone name doesn't include the terminating dot (the result for the root + zone is the empty string!). +- ``%%`` – Means the ``%`` character. + +.. WARNING:: + Beware of special characters which are escaped or encoded in the \\DDD form + where DDD is corresponding decimal ASCII code. + +*Default:* :ref:`storage<zone_storage>`\ ``/%s.zone`` + +.. _zone_master: + +master +------ + +An ordered list of references :ref:`remote<remote_id>` and +:ref:`remotes<remotes_id>` to zone primary servers +(formerly known as master servers). + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_ddns-master: + +ddns-master +----------- + +A :ref:`reference<remote_id>` to zone primary master. If not specified, +the first :ref:`master<zone_master>` server is used. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_notify: + +notify +------ + +An ordered list of references :ref:`remote<remote_id>` and +:ref:`remotes<remotes_id>` to secondary servers to which notify +message is sent if the zone changes. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_acl: + +acl +--- + +An ordered list of :ref:`references<acl_id>` to ACL rules which can allow +or disallow zone transfers, updates or incoming notifies. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_provide-ixfr: + +provide-ixfr +------------ + +If disabled, the server is forced to respond with AXFR to IXFR queries. +If enabled, IXFR requests are responded normally. + +*Default:* ``on`` + +.. _zone_semantic-checks: + +semantic-checks +--------------- + +Selects if extra zone semantic checks are used or impacts of the mandatory checks. + +There are several mandatory checks which are always enabled and cannot be turned +off. An error in a mandatory check causes the zone not to be loaded. Most of +the mandatory checks can be weakened by setting ``soft``, which allows the zone to +be loaded even if the check fails. + +If enabled, extra checks are used. These checks don't prevent the zone from loading. + +The mandatory checks are applied to zone files, zone transfers, and updates via +control interface. The extra checks are applied to zone files only! + +Mandatory checks: + +- Missing SOA record at the zone apex (:rfc:`1034`) (*) +- An extra record exists together with a CNAME record except for RRSIG and NSEC (:rfc:`1034`) +- Multiple CNAME records with the same owner exist (:rfc:`1034`) +- DNAME record having a record under it (:rfc:`6672`) +- Multiple DNAME records with the same owner exist (:rfc:`6672`) +- NS record exists together with a DNAME record (:rfc:`6672`) + +(*) The marked check can't be weakened by the soft mode. All other mandatory checks +are subject to the optional soft mode. + +Extra checks: + +- Missing NS record at the zone apex +- Missing glue A or AAAA record +- Invalid DS or NSEC3PARAM record +- CDS or CDNSKEY inconsistency +- All other DNSSEC checks executed during :ref:`zone_dnssec-validation` + +.. NOTE:: + The soft mode allows the refresh event to ignore a CNAME response to a SOA + query (malformed message) and triggers a zone bootstrap instead. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _zone_zonefile-sync: + +zonefile-sync +------------- + +The time after which the current zone in memory will be synced with a zone file +on the disk (see :ref:`file<zone_file>`). The server will serve the latest +zone even after a restart using zone journal, but the zone file on the disk will +only be synced after ``zonefile-sync`` time has expired (or after manual zone +flush). This is applicable when the zone is updated via IXFR, DDNS or automatic +DNSSEC signing. In order to completely disable automatic zone file synchronization, +set the value to -1. In that case, it is still possible to force a manual zone flush +using the ``-f`` option. + +.. NOTE:: + If you are serving large zones with frequent updates where + the immediate sync with a zone file is not desirable, increase the value. + +*Default:* ``0`` (immediate) + +.. _zone_zonefile-load: + +zonefile-load +------------- + +Selects how the zone file contents are applied during zone load. + +Possible values: + +- ``none`` – The zone file is not used at all. +- ``difference`` – If the zone contents are already available during server start or reload, + the difference is computed between them and the contents of the zone file. This difference + is then checked for semantic errors and applied to the current zone contents. +- ``difference-no-serial`` – Same as ``difference``, but the SOA serial in the zone file is + ignored, the server takes care of incrementing the serial automatically. +- ``whole`` – Zone contents are loaded from the zone file. + +When ``difference`` is configured and there are no zone contents yet (cold start +and no zone contents in the journal), it behaves the same way as ``whole``. + +*Default:* ``whole`` + +.. _zone_journal-content: + +journal-content +--------------- + +Selects how the journal shall be used to store zone and its changes. + +Possible values: + +- ``none`` – The journal is not used at all. +- ``changes`` – Zone changes history is stored in journal. +- ``all`` – Zone contents and history is stored in journal. + +*Default:* ``changes`` + +.. _zone_journal-max-usage: + +journal-max-usage +----------------- + +Policy how much space in journal DB will the zone's journal occupy. + +.. NOTE:: + Journal DB may grow far above the sum of journal-max-usage across + all zones, because of DB free space fragmentation. + +*Default:* ``100M`` (100 MiB) + +.. _zone_journal-max-depth: + +journal-max-depth +----------------- + +Maximum history length of the journal. + +.. NOTE:: + Zone-in-journal changeset isn't counted to the limit. + +*Minimum:* ``2`` + +*Default:* ``20`` + +.. _zone_zone-max-size: + +zone-max-size +------------- + +Maximum size of the zone. The size is measured as size of the zone records +in wire format without compression. The limit is enforced for incoming zone +transfers and dynamic updates. + +For incremental transfers (IXFR), the effective limit for the total size of +the records in the transfer is twice the configured value. However the final +size of the zone must satisfy the configured value. + +*Default:* unlimited + +.. _zone_adjust-threads: + +adjust-threads +-------------- + +Parallelize internal zone adjusting procedures by using specified number of +threads. This is useful with huge zones with NSEC3. Speedup observable at +server startup and while processing NSEC3 re-salt. + +*Default:* ``1`` (no extra threads) + +.. _zone_dnssec-signing: + +dnssec-signing +-------------- + +If enabled, automatic DNSSEC signing for the zone is turned on. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _zone_dnssec-validation: + +dnssec-validation +----------------- + +If enabled, the zone contents are validated for being correctly signed +(including NSEC/NSEC3 chain) with DNSSEC signatures every time the zone +is loaded or changed (including AXFR/IXFR). + +When the validation fails, the zone being loaded or update being applied +is cancelled with an error, and either none or previous zone state is published. + +List of DNSSEC checks: + +- Every zone RRSet is correctly signed by at least one present DNSKEY. +- DNSKEY RRSet is signed by KSK. +- NSEC(3) RR exists for each name (unless opt-out) with correct bitmap. +- Every NSEC(3) RR is linked to the lexicographically next one. + +The validation is not affected by :ref:`zone_dnssec-policy` configuration, +except for :ref:`policy_signing-threads` option, which specifies the number +of threads for parallel validation. + +*Default:* not set + +.. NOTE:: + + Redundant or garbage NSEC3 records are ignored. + + This mode is not compatible with :ref:`zone_dnssec-signing`. + +.. _zone_dnssec-policy: + +dnssec-policy +------------- + +A :ref:`reference<policy_id>` to DNSSEC signing policy. + +*Default:* an imaginary policy with all default values + +.. NOTE:: + A configured policy called "default" won't be used unless explicitly referenced. + +.. _zone_ds-push: + +ds-push +------- + +Per zone configuration of :ref:`policy_ds-push`. This option overrides possible +per policy option. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_zonemd-verify: + +zonemd-verify +------------- + +On each zone load/update, verify that ZONEMD is present in the zone and valid. + +.. NOTE:: + Zone digest calculation may take much time and CPU on large zones. + +*Default:* ``off`` + +.. _zone_zonemd-generate: + +zonemd-generate +--------------- + +On each zone update, calculate ZONEMD and put it into the zone. + +Possible values: + +- ``none`` – No action regarding ZONEMD. +- ``zonemd-sha384`` – Generate ZONEMD using SHA384 algorithm. +- ``zonemd-sha512`` – Generate ZONEMD using SHA512 algorithm. +- ``remove`` – Remove any ZONEMD from the zone apex. + +*Default:* ``none`` + +.. _zone_serial-policy: + +serial-policy +------------- + +Specifies how the zone serial is updated after a dynamic update or +automatic DNSSEC signing. If the serial is changed by the dynamic update, +no change is made. + +Possible values: + +- ``increment`` – The serial is incremented according to serial number arithmetic. +- ``unixtime`` – The serial is set to the current unix time. +- ``dateserial`` – The 10-digit serial (YYYYMMDDnn) is incremented, the first + 8 digits match the current iso-date. + +.. NOTE:: + If the resulting serial for ``unixtime`` or ``dateserial`` is lower than or + equal to the current serial (this happens e.g. when migrating from other policy or + frequent updates), the serial is incremented instead. + + To avoid user confusion, use ``dateserial`` only if you expect at most + 100 updates per day per zone and ``unixtime`` only if you expect at most + one update per second per zone. + + Generated catalog zones use ``unixtime`` only. + +*Default:* ``increment`` (``unixtime`` for generated catalog zones) + +.. _zone_refresh-min-interval: + +refresh-min-interval +-------------------- + +Forced minimum zone refresh interval (in seconds) to avoid flooding primary server. + +*Minimum:* ``2`` + +*Default:* ``2`` + +.. _zone_refresh-max-interval: + +refresh-max-interval +-------------------- + +Forced maximum zone refresh interval (in seconds). + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_retry-min-interval: + +retry-min-interval +------------------ + +Forced minimum zone retry interval (in seconds) to avoid flooding primary server. + +*Minimum:* ``1`` + +*Default:* ``1`` + +.. _zone_retry-max-interval: + +retry-max-interval +------------------ + +Forced maximum zone retry interval (in seconds). + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_expire-min-interval: + +expire-min-interval +------------------- + +Forced minimum zone expire interval (in seconds) to avoid flooding primary server. + +*Minimum:* ``3`` + +*Default:* ``3`` + +.. _zone_expire-max-interval: + +expire-max-interval +------------------- + +Forced maximum zone expire interval (in seconds). + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_catalog-role: + +catalog-role +------------ + +Trigger zone catalog feature. Possible values: + +- ``none`` – Not a catalog zone. +- ``interpret`` – A catalog zone which is loaded from a zone file or XFR, + and member zones shall be configured based on its contents. +- ``generate`` – A catalog zone whose contents are generated according to + assigned member zones. +- ``member`` – A member zone that is assigned to one generated catalog zone. + +*Default:* ``none`` + +.. _zone_catalog-template: + +catalog-template +---------------- + +For the catalog member zones, the specified configuration template will be applied. + +Multiple catalog templates may be defined. The first one is used unless the member zone +has the *group* property defined, matching another catalog template. + +.. NOTE:: + This option must be set if and only if :ref:`zone_catalog-role` is *interpret*. + + Nested catalog zones aren't supported. Therefore catalog templates can't use + :ref:`zone_catalog-template`, :ref:`zone_catalog-role`, :ref:`zone_catalog-zone`, + and :ref:`zone_catalog-group` options. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_catalog-zone: + +catalog-zone +------------ + +Assign this member zone to specified generated catalog zone. + +.. NOTE:: + This option must be set if and only if :ref:`zone_catalog-role` is *member*. + + The referenced catalog zone must exist and have :ref:`zone_catalog-role` set to *generate*. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_catalog-group: + +catalog-group +------------- + +Assign this member zone to specified catalog group (configuration template). + +.. NOTE:: + This option has effect if and only if :ref:`zone_catalog-role` is *member*. + +*Default:* not set + +.. _zone_module: + +module +------ + +An ordered list of references to query modules in the form of *module_name* or +*module_name/module_id*. These modules apply only to the current zone queries. + +*Default:* not set diff --git a/doc/requirements.rst b/doc/requirements.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed114b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/requirements.rst @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Requirements: + +************ +Requirements +************ + +Hardware +======== + +Knot DNS requirements are not very demanding for typical +installations, and a commodity server or a virtual solution will be +sufficient in most cases. + +However, please note that there are some scenarios that will require +administrator's attention and some testing of exact requirements before +deploying Knot DNS to a production environment. These cases include +deployment for a large number of zones (DNS hosting), large number +of records in one or more zones (TLD), or large number of requests. + +CPU requirements +---------------- + +The server scales with processing power and also with the number of +available cores/CPUs. Enabling Hyper-threading is convenient if supported. + +There is no lower bound on the CPU requirements, but it should support +memory barriers and atomic instructions (i586 and newer). + +Network card +------------ + +The best results have been achieved with multi-queue network cards. The +number of multi-queues should equal the total number of CPU cores (with +Hyper-threading enabled). + +Memory requirements +------------------- + +The server implementation focuses on performance and thus can be quite +memory demanding. The rough estimate for memory requirements is +3 times the size of the zone in the plain-text format. Again this is only +an estimate and you are advised to do your own measurements before +deploying Knot DNS to production. + +.. NOTE:: + To ensure uninterrupted serving of the zone, Knot DNS + employs the Read-Copy-Update mechanism instead of locking and thus + requires twice the amount of memory for the duration of incoming + transfers. + +Operating system +================ + +Knot DNS itself is written in a portable way and can be compiled +and run on most UNIX-like systems, such as Linux, \*BSD, and macOS. + +Required libraries +================== + +Knot DNS requires a few libraries to be available: + +* libedit +* gnutls >= 3.3 +* liburcu >= 0.5.4 +* lmdb >= 0.9.15 + +.. NOTE:: + The LMDB library is included with Knot DNS source code. However, linking + with the system library is preferred. + +Optional libraries +================== + +International Domain Names support (IDNA2008 or IDNA2003) in :doc:`kdig<man_kdig>`: + +* libidn2 (or libidn) + +Systemd's startup notification mechanism and journald logging: + +* libsystemd + +Dnstap support in :doc:`kdig<man_kdig>` or module :ref:`dnstap<mod-dnstap>`: + +* fstrm (and protobuf-c if building from source code) + +Linux :manpage:`capabilities(7)` support, which allows the server to be started +as a non-root user/group, binding to privileged ports (53), and giving up all +its capabilities, resulting in a completely unprivileged process: + +* libcap-ng >= 0.6.4 + +MaxMind database for **geodb** support in module :ref:`geoip<mod-geoip>`: + +* libmaxminddb0 + +DNS-over-HTTPS (DoH) support in :doc:`kdig<man_kdig>`: + +* libnghttp2 + +The :ref:`XDP functionality <Mode XDP>` and :doc:`kxdpgun <man_kxdpgun>` +tool. These are only supported on Linux operating systems. See the chapter +:ref:`Mode XDP <Mode XDP_pre-requisites>` for software and hardware +recommendations. + +* libbpf >= 0.0.6 (or embedded one via `--enable-xdp`) +* libxdp (if libbpf >= 1.0) +* libmnl (for kxdpgun) + +DNS-over-QUIC (DoQ) support in :doc:`knotd<man_knotd>`, :doc:`kxdpgun<man_kxdpgun>`, +and :doc:`kdig<man_kdig>`: + +* libngtcp2 >= 0.13.0 (or embedded one via `--enable-quic`) +* gnutls >= 3.7.2 +* :ref:`Mode XDP` (for knotd and kxdpgun) diff --git a/doc/theme_html/static/admon_caution_48.png b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_caution_48.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9016ec0 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_caution_48.png diff --git a/doc/theme_html/static/admon_important_48.png b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_important_48.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..7021f4c --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_important_48.png diff --git a/doc/theme_html/static/admon_note_48.png b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_note_48.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e72e336 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_note_48.png diff --git a/doc/theme_html/static/admon_tip_48.png b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_tip_48.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f679193 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_tip_48.png diff --git a/doc/theme_html/static/admon_warning_48.png b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_warning_48.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c338d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/static/admon_warning_48.png diff --git a/doc/theme_html/static/admons.css b/doc/theme_html/static/admons.css new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9f3406 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/static/admons.css @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +/* === Style for admonitions === */ + +/* Settings from 'basic' theme (modified only) */ + +div.admonition { + margin-top: 10px; + margin-bottom: 10px; + padding: 7px; + padding-left: 54px;/* based on icon size */ + padding-right: 24px;/* based on icon size */ +} + +/* Settings from 'classic' theme (modified only) */ + +div.admonition p { + display: block; +} + +p.admonition-title { + padding-bottom: 11px;/* based on icon size */ + padding-top: 11px;/* based on icon size */ +} + +p.admonition-title:after { + content: none; /* do not add colon */ +} + +/* Icon settings for all admonitions */ +div.admonition { + /* background-image: url('abstract_admon_48.png'); */ + background-repeat: no-repeat; + background-position: 2px 2px; +} + +/* Specific admonitions */ +div.admonition-todo { + background-color: #CAE2B6; + border: solid 1px #439427; +} + +div.warning { + background-image: url('admon_warning_48.png'); + background-color: #FFE4E4; + border: solid 3px #990D1C; +} + +div.caution { + background-image: url('admon_caution_48.png'); + background-color: #FFE4E4; + border: solid 1px #990D1C; +} + +div.important { + background-image: url('admon_important_48.png'); + background-color: #FBECC8; + border: solid 1px #D68612; +} + +div.note { + background-image: url('admon_note_48.png'); + background-color: white; + border: solid 1px #D1D3D4; +} + +div.tip { + background-image: url('admon_tip_48.png'); + background-color: #F2E4FD; + border: solid 1px #D1C2E6; +} diff --git a/doc/theme_html/static/main.css b/doc/theme_html/static/main.css new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7eb5d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/static/main.css @@ -0,0 +1,6 @@ +@import url("nature.css"); + +/* Addendum for admonitions */ +@import url("admons.css"); + +/* Other overrides here */ diff --git a/doc/theme_html/theme.conf b/doc/theme_html/theme.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb8c607 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/theme_html/theme.conf @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +[theme] +inherit = nature +stylesheet = main.css +pygments_style = sphinx diff --git a/doc/troubleshooting.rst b/doc/troubleshooting.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a07dd12 --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/troubleshooting.rst @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ +.. highlight:: console +.. _Troubleshooting: + +*************** +Troubleshooting +*************** + +First of all, check the logs. Enabling at least the ``warning`` message +severity may help you to identify some problems. See the :ref:`log section` +for details. + +.. _Submitting a bugreport: + +Reporting bugs +============== + +If you are unable to solve the problem by yourself, you can submit a +bugreport to the Knot DNS developers. For security or sensitive issues +contact the developers directly on +`knot-dns@labs.nic.cz <mailto:knot-dns@labs.nic.cz>`_. +All other bugs and questions may be directed to the public Knot DNS users +mailing list +(`knot-dns-users@lists.nic.cz <mailto:knot-dns-users@lists.nic.cz>`_) or +may be entered into the +`issue tracking system <https://gitlab.nic.cz/knot/knot-dns/issues>`_. + +Before anything else, please try to answer the following questions: + +* Has it been working? +* What has changed? System configuration, software updates, network + configuration, firewall rules modification, hardware replacement, etc. + +The bugreport should contain the answers for the previous questions and in +addition at least the following information: + +* Knot DNS version and type of installation (distribution package, from source, + etc.) +* Operating system, platform, kernel version +* Relevant basic hardware information (processor, amount of memory, available + network devices, etc.) +* Description of the bug +* Log output with the highest verbosity (category ``any``, severity ``debug``) +* Steps to reproduce the bug (if known) +* Backtrace (if the bug caused a crash or a hang; see the next section) + +If possible, please provide a minimal configuration file and zone files which +can be used to reproduce the bug. + +.. _Generating backtrace: + +Generating backtrace +==================== + +Backtrace carries basic information about the state of the program and how +the program got where it is. It helps determining the location of the bug in +the source code. + +If you run Knot DNS from distribution packages, make sure the debugging +symbols for the package are installed. The symbols are usually distributed +in a separate package. + +There are several ways to get the backtrace. One possible way is to extract +the backtrace from a core dump file. Core dump is a memory snapshot generated +by the operating system when a process crashes. The generating of core dumps +must be usually enabled:: + + $ ulimit -c unlimited # Enable unlimited core dump size + $ knotd ... # Reproduce the crash + ... + $ gdb knotd <core-dump-file> # Start gdb on the core dump + (gdb) info threads # Get a summary of all threads + (gdb) thread apply all bt full # Extract backtrace from all threads + (gdb) quit + +To save the backtrace into a file, the following GDB commands can be used:: + + (gdb) set pagination off + (gdb) set logging file backtrace.txt + (gdb) set logging on + (gdb) info threads + (gdb) thread apply all bt full + (gdb) set logging off + +To generate a core dump of a running process, the `gcore` utility can be used:: + + $ gcore -o <output-file> $(pidof knotd) + +Please note that core dumps can be intercepted by an error-collecting system +service (systemd-coredump, ABRT, Apport, etc.). If you are using such a service, +consult its documentation about core dump retrieval. + +If the error is reproducible, it is also possible to start and inspect the +server directly in the debugger:: + + $ gdb --args knotd -c /etc/knot.conf + (gdb) run + ... + +Alternatively, the debugger can be attached to a running server +process. This is generally useful when troubleshooting a stuck process:: + + $ knotd ... + $ gdb --pid $(pidof knotd) + (gdb) continue + ... + +If you fail to get a backtrace of a running process using the previous method, +you may try the single-purpose ``pstack`` utility:: + + $ pstack $(pidof knotd) > backtrace.txt diff --git a/doc/utilities.rst b/doc/utilities.rst new file mode 100644 index 0000000..392115d --- /dev/null +++ b/doc/utilities.rst @@ -0,0 +1,24 @@ +.. highlight:: none +.. _Utilities: + +Utilities +========= + +Knot DNS comes with a few DNS client utilities and a few utilities to control +the server. This section collects manual pages for all provided binaries: + +.. toctree:: + :titlesonly: + + man_knotd + man_knotc + man_keymgr + man_kjournalprint + man_kcatalogprint + man_kzonecheck + man_kzonesign + man_kdig + man_khost + man_knsec3hash + man_knsupdate + man_kxdpgun |
